Programmer`s Manual
Programmer’s Manual
Covers the following models:
E-Class Mark III Basic and Advanced (Serial# 4xxxxxxx or greater)
E-Class Mark III Pro/Pro+
I-Class Mark II
RL3 & RL4
CG Times (based upon Times New Roman), CG Triumvirate, MicroType, and TrueType are
trademarks of the AGFA Monotype Corporation.
PCL, Intellifont, and HP Laser JetII are trademarks of the Hewlett Packard Corporation.
Macintosh is a trademark of the Apple Corporation.
Windows is a trademark of the Microsoft Corporation.
All other brand and product names are trademarks, service marks, registered trademarks,
or registered service marks of their respective companies.
Information in this manual is subject to change without notice and does not represent a
commitment on the part of Datamax-O’Neil Corporation. No part of this manual may be
reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, for any purpose other than the
purchaser’s personal use, without the expressed written permission of Datamax-O’Neil
Corporation.
All rights reserved
Copyright © 2013, Datamax-O’Neil
Part Number 88-2360-01
Revision B
Contents
1
Overview ...................................................................................... 1
Who Should Use this Manual ...................................................................... 1
The Scope of this Manual........................................................................... 1
General Conventions................................................................................. 2
Computer Entry and Display Conventions .................................................... 2
Important Safety Instructions .................................................................... 2
Special Instructions .................................................................................. 2
Typical Data Flow Sequence ....................................................................... 3
2
Control Code Command Functions ................................................7
Introduction ............................................................................................ 7
Attention-Getters ..................................................................................... 7
Easy Control Codes .................................................................................. 7
Alternate Control Code Modes .................................................................... 8
3
Immediate Command Functions ...................................................9
Introduction ............................................................................................ 9
4
SOH #
Reset ...................................................................................... 9
SOH *
Reset ...................................................................................... 9
SOH A
Send ASCII Status String......................................................... 10
SOH a
Send ASCII Extended Status String ........................................... 10
SOH B
Toggle Pause ......................................................................... 11
SOH C
Stop/Cancel ........................................................................... 12
SOH D
SOH Shutdown ....................................................................... 12
SOH E
Send Batch Remaining Quantity................................................ 12
SOH e
Send Batch Printed Quantity .................................................... 13
SOH F
Send Status Byte.................................................................... 13
System-Level Command Functions ............................................. 15
Introduction .......................................................................................... 15
STX A
Set Time and Date .................................................................. 15
STX a
Enable Feedback Characters..................................................... 16
STX B
Get Printer Time and Date Information ...................................... 16
STX c
Set Continuous Paper Length ................................................... 17
i
STX E
Set Quantity for Stored Label ................................................... 17
STX e
Select Edge Sensor ................................................................. 18
STX F
Form Feed ............................................................................. 18
STX f
Set Form Stop Position (Backfeed Command) ............................. 18
STX G
Print Last Label Format ........................................................... 19
STX I
Input Image Data ................................................................... 19
STX i
Scalable Font Downloading ...................................................... 20
STX J
Set Pause for Each Label ......................................................... 20
STX K
Extended System-Level Commands ........................................... 20
STX k
Test Communication Port ......................................................... 21
STX L
Enter Label Formatting Command Mode ..................................... 21
STX M
Set Maximum Label Length ...................................................... 21
STX m
Set Printer to Metric Mode ....................................................... 21
STX n
Set Printer to Imperial Mode .................................................... 22
STX O
Set Start of Print (SOP) Position ............................................... 22
STX o
Cycle Cutter........................................................................... 22
STX P
Set Hex Dump Mode ............................................................... 23
STX p
Controlled Pause .................................................................... 23
STX Q
Clear All Modules .................................................................... 23
STX q
Clear Module .......................................................................... 24
STX R
Ribbon Saver Control .............................................................. 24
STX r
Select Reflective Sensor .......................................................... 24
STX S
Set Feed Speed ...................................................................... 25
STX T
Print Quality Label .................................................................. 25
STX t
Test DRAM Memory Module ...................................................... 25
STX U
Label Format String Replacement Field ...................................... 26
STX V
Software Switch Settings ......................................................... 27
STX v
Request Firmware Version ....................................................... 28
STX W
Request Memory Module Information ........................................ 28
STX w
Test Flash Memory Module ....................................................... 29
STX X
Set Default Module ................................................................. 29
STX x
Delete File from Module ........................................................... 30
STX Y
Output Sensor Values.............................................................. 31
STX y
Select Font Symbol Set ........................................................... 31
STX Z
Print Configuration Label ......................................................... 32
STX z
Pack Module .......................................................................... 32
ii
5
Extended System-Level Command Functions ..............................33
Introduction .......................................................................................... 33
STX K}E
Empty Sensor Calibration ........................................................ 33
STX K}M
Manual Media Calibration ......................................................... 34
STX K}Q
Quick Media Calibration ........................................................... 34
STX KaR
Read Data from RFID Tag ........................................................ 35
STX KaW
Write Data to RFID Tag ........................................................... 36
STX Kb
Backfeed Time Delay............................................................... 36
STX KC
Get Configuration ................................................................... 37
STX Kc
Configuration Set ................................................................... 40
STX KD
Database Configuration ........................................................... 92
STX Kd
Set File as Factory Default ....................................................... 93
STX KE
Character Encoding ................................................................. 93
STX KF
Select Factory Defaults ............................................................ 95
STX Kf
Set Present Distance ............................................................... 95
STX KH
Dot Check ............................................................................. 96
STX KI
GPIO Input ............................................................................ 98
STX Kn
NIC Reset .............................................................................. 98
STX KO
GPIO Output .......................................................................... 99
STX Kp
Module Protection ..................................................................100
STX Kr
Resettable Counter Reset .......................................................101
STX KtA
Write Application Family Identifier (AFI) to Tag .......................... 101
STX KtD
Write Data Storage Format Identifier (DSFID) to Tag .................. 101
STX KtE
Write Electronic Article Surveillance (EAS) Bit ............................ 102
STX KtH
Read and Feedback Tag Information to Host.............................. 102
STX KtR
Read Data from RFID Tag .......................................................103
STX KtU
Read Unique Serial Number from RFID Tag ............................... 104
STX KtW
Write Data to RFID Tag ..........................................................104
STX KuB
Read Data from Gen2 Tag Section ...........................................106
STX KuF
Send RFID Device Firmware Version ......................................... 106
STX KuJ
Write Data to Gen 2 Tag Section .............................................. 106
STX KuR
Read Data from RFID Tag .......................................................107
STX KuW
Write Data to RFID Tag ..........................................................108
STX KV
Verifier Enable/Disable ...........................................................108
STX Ky
Download Plug-in File .............................................................109
STX KZ
Immediately Set Parameter ....................................................109
iii
6
Label Formatting Command Functions ...................................... 111
Introduction .........................................................................................111
:
Set Cut by Amount ................................................................111
A
Set Format Attribute ..............................................................112
B
Bar Code Magnification ...........................................................113
C
Set Column Offset Amount ...................................................... 113
c
Set Cut by Amount ................................................................114
D
Set Dot Size Width and Height................................................. 114
E
Terminate Label Formatting Mode and Print Label ......................115
e
Recall Printer Configuration ..................................................... 115
F
Advanced Format Attributes .................................................... 115
G
Place Data in Global Register ................................................... 116
H
Enter Heat Setting .................................................................116
J
Justification ..........................................................................117
M
Select Mirror Mode .................................................................117
m
Set Metric Mode ....................................................................118
n
Set Inch (Imperial) Mode ........................................................ 118
P
Set Print Speed ..................................................................... 118
p
Set Backfeed Speed ............................................................... 119
Q
Set Quantity of Labels to Print ................................................. 119
R
Set Row Offset Amount ..........................................................120
r
Recall Stored Label Format ..................................................... 120
S
Set Feed Speed .....................................................................122
s
Store Label Format in Module .................................................. 122
T
Set Field Data Line Terminator ................................................ 123
t
Add or subtract date time from the printer date ......................... 123
U
Mark Previous Field as a String Replacement Field ...................... 124
X
Terminate Label Formatting Mode ............................................125
y
Select Font Symbol Set ..........................................................125
z
Zero (Ø) Conversion to “0” ..................................................... 126
+ (>)(()
Make Last Field Entered Increment .......................................... 126
– (<)())
Make Last Field Entered Decrement.......................................... 127
^
Set Count by Amount .............................................................128
Special Label Formatting Command Functions ...........................................129
STX D
Print adjusted date ................................................................129
STX S
Recall Global Data and Place in Field ........................................130
STX T
Print Time and Date ...............................................................130
iv
7
Font Loading Command Functions ............................................ 133
Introduction .........................................................................................133
8
*c###D
Assign Font ID Number .......................................................... 133
)s###W
Font Descriptor .....................................................................134
*c###E
Character Code .....................................................................134
(s#W
Character Download Data .......................................................134
Generating Label Formats ........................................................ 135
Introduction .........................................................................................135
Format Record Commands......................................................................135
Generating Records ...............................................................................136
The Structure of a Record .......................................................................136
Advanced Format Attributes....................................................................149
Appendix A .................................................................................... 153
ASCII Control Chart ...............................................................................153
Appendix B .................................................................................... 155
Sample Programs ..................................................................................155
VB Application to Send Raw Data via Printer Driver ....................................159
Appendix C .................................................................................... 165
Available Fonts – Sizes, References, and Samples ...................................... 165
Appendix D .................................................................................... 171
Reset Codes .........................................................................................171
Appendix E .................................................................................... 173
Single Byte Symbol Sets ........................................................................173
Appendix F .................................................................................... 185
Bar Code Summary Data ........................................................................185
Bar Code Default Widths and Heights .......................................................188
Appendix G .................................................................................... 191
Bar Code Details ...................................................................................191
Appendix H .................................................................................... 237
Single and Double Byte Character Font Mapping ........................................ 237
v
Appendix I ..................................................................................... 239
Symbol Sets and Character Maps ............................................................239
Double-Byte Symbols, Chinese, Kanji, and Korean ..................................... 242
Appendix J ..................................................................................... 243
General Purpose Input Output (GPIO) Port Applications .............................. 243
Appendix K .................................................................................... 245
Maximum Field & Character Values ..........................................................245
Print Resolutions and Maximum Width & Record Column Values ................... 245
Column, Present, & Row Adjust Fine Tune Range .......................................246
Memory Module Identifiers and Allocations ................................................ 246
Appendix L..................................................................................... 247
Speed Ranges.......................................................................................247
Appendix M .................................................................................... 249
Commands by Function ..........................................................................249
Appendix N .................................................................................... 251
Image Loading ......................................................................................251
Appendix O .................................................................................... 253
UPC-A and EAN-13: Variable Price/Weight Bar Codes ................................. 253
Appendix P .................................................................................... 255
International Language Print Capability (ILPC) Programming Examples .........255
Appendix Q .................................................................................... 265
Plug and Play IDs ..................................................................................265
Appendix R .................................................................................... 267
Line Mode 267
Appendix S .................................................................................... 271
RFID Overview ......................................................................................271
Appendix T .................................................................................... 277
WiFi Region Country Codes ..................................................................... 277
Appendix U .................................................................................... 283
Bar Code Symbology Information Resources .............................................283
Glossary ........................................................................................ 285
vi
Overview
1
Overview
Who Should Use this Manual
This manual is intended for programmers who wish to create their own label production
software.
The Scope of this Manual
This manual, arranged alphabetically by command, explains Datamax-O’Neil Programming
Language (DPL) and its related uses in the writing, loading and storing of programs for the
control and production of label formats (designs) for the following printers at, or above, the
listed firmware version below:
Printer
E-Class MARK III Pro/Pro+
Firmware Version
Serial# 4xxxxxxx or greater or Firmware
Version 9.04_0001 or greater
All
I-Class Mark II
All
RL3 & RL4
All
E-Class Mark III Basic and Advanced Models
Model distinctions, including configurations and equipment types be indicated in this text to
differentiate command compatibility. The appendices of this manual also contain details that
cannot be ignored; the use of any command will require checking for possible exclusionary
conditions.

• See the <STX>KC command for information regarding attainment of the printer’s firmware
version; and then, if necessary, upgrade that firmware. Upgrades are available at
http://www.datamax-oneil.com.
• Programming information for older Class Series printers Class Series II Programmer’s
Manual (part number 88-2341-01). All manuals can be downloaded from our web site at
http://www.datamax-oneil.com.
• References to “Menu Settings” refer either to the set-up menu or to the system menu of
the printer; consult to the appropriate Operator’s Manual for details.
• Where applicable, printer responses to a host device will depend upon the communication
port, port settings, and cabling.
1
Overview
General Conventions
These are some of the conventions followed in this manual:

On the header of each page, the name of the section.

On the footer of each page, the page number and the title of the manual.

Names of other manuals referenced are in Italics.

Notes are added to bring your attention to important considerations, tips or helpful
suggestions.

Boldface is also used to bring your attention to important information.

This manual refers to IBM-PC based keyboard command characters for access to the
ASCII character set. Systems based on different formats (e.g., Apple’s Macintosh )
should use the appropriate keyboard command to access the desired ASCII
character. See Appendix A for the ASCII character set.
Computer Entry and Display Conventions
Command syntax and samples are formatted as follows:

The Courier font in boldface indicates the DPL command syntax, and Italics are
used to indicate the command syntax parameters.

Regular Courier font indicates sample commands, files and printer responses.

Square brackets ([ ]) indicate that the item is optional.

<CR> is used to identify the line termination character. Other strings placed
between < > in this manual represent the character of the same ASCII name, and
are single-byte hexadecimal values (e.g., <STX>, <CR>, and <0x0D> equal 02, 0D,
and 0D, respectively).

Hexadecimal values are often displayed in “C” programming language conventions
(e.g., 0x02 = 02 hex, 0x41 = 41 hex, etc.)
Important Safety Instructions
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the
user to the presence of important operating and maintenance instructions.
Special Instructions

The green check box is intended to alert the user to conventions used within this
text or to notable operating details of the printer.
2
Overview
Typical Data Flow Sequence
The typical data flow sequence is summarized in the following bullets and detailed in the
table below. Printer Commands data is transmitted to the printer as shown in the table from
left to right, top to bottom.







Status commands
Configuration commands
Download commands
Label format
Status commands
Label reprint commands
Memory cleanup
Typical commands used in the various stages shown above are listed in the tables that
follow.
Status Commands
Commands are available for retrieving stored label formats, updating data, and adding
new data. These techniques are used for increasing throughput; see <STX>G, Label Recall
Command “r”, and Label Save Command “s”.
Printer Commands
Description
<SOH>A
“Status” commands: Get
Status, Request Memory
Module Storage
Information…
<STX>WG
Notes
Optional,
bidirectional
communication
required for these
commands.
See <STX>Kc to
reduce configuration
commands
transferred
RAM (temporary) or
Flash (semipermanent)
memory.
<STX>O220
<STX>n
<STX>V0
“Configuration”
commands, download
image…
<SOH>D
<STX>IApImagename<CR>image data...data
<CR>
“Download” commands,
image, fonts…
<STX>L
D11
Begin label
Label Header record
Label Formatting Data
record –
Object type, orientation,
position, data
Label Quantity
Label Terminate record
Existing label
formats may be
recalled. Label
header records are
not required.
<SOH>A
Status command
Optional,
bidirectional
communication
required for these
commands.
<STX>U01new data for field 01
<STX>E0005
<STX>G
<STX>xImagename<CR>
<STX>zA
Reprint with New Data
Records
Used for fast
reprints.
Memory cleanup
Typically used for
temporary storage.
131100000500050Typical text field 01
Q0001
E
3
Overview
Configuration Commands
The following table lists some commands useful in controlling printer configuration.
These commands are generally effective only for the current power-up session; toggling
power restores the default configuration. See <STX>Kc for changes to the default powerup configuration. Changing the default power-up configuration and saving objects in
printer Flash memory can reduce the data transmitted for each label and therefore
improve throughput.
Configuration
Command
<STX>A
Name
Function
Set Date and Time
<STX>c
Set Continuous Paper Length
<STX>e
Set Edge Sensor
<STX>Kf
Set Present Distance
<STX>Kc
Configuration Set
<STX>F
Send Form Feed
<STX>M
Set Maximum Label Length
<STX>m
Set to Metric Mode
<STX>n
Set to Inch Mode
<STX>S
Set Feed Rate
<STX>V
Software Switch
Sets Date and Time.
Must be 0000 for gap media; not used
for reflective media.
Sets sensing for gap or registration hole
type stock.
Determines label stop position, head
relative. <STX>f edge sensor relative
equivalent command, older models.
Determines default power-up
configuration.
Sets the stop position of the printed
label.
Length to search for next gap or
reflective mark; not used with
continuous media.
Subsequent measurements interpreted
in metric (most units, mm/10). Label
equivalent command can be used.
Subsequent measurements interpreted
in inches (most units in/100) label
equivalent command can be used.
Sets blank label movement speed.
Enables optional hardware, cutter, and
present sensor.
Download Commands
Download
Command
Name
Function
<STX>I
Download Image
<STX>i
Download Scalable Font
<ESC>
Download Bitmapped Font
4
Downloads Image to selected memory
module.
Downloads Scalable Font to selected
memory module.
Downloads Bitmapped Font to selected
memory module.
Overview
Label Header Commands
These commands determine how the label formatting occurs, the print quality and
quantity. They are typically issued immediately following the <STX>L start of the label
format. The Format Attribute (A) and the Offset (C, R) commands can be changed at
any point between format records to achieve desired effects.
Label Header Command
Name
A
Set Format Attribute
C
Column Offset
D
Set Width and Dot Size
H
Set Heat Setting
M
Set Mirror Mode
P
Set Print Speed
P
Set Backup Speed
Q
Set Quantity
R
Set Row Offset
S
Set Feed Speed
5
Overview
6
Control Code Command Functions
2
Control Code Command Functions
Introduction
The printer requires a special “attention-getter” character in order to receive a command
sequence, informing the printer that it is about to receive a command and the type of
command it will be. Control Commands, System-Level Commands, and Font Loading
Commands have their own unique attention-getter, followed by a command character that
directs printer action.
Attention-Getters
The attention-getters (e.g., “SOH”) are standard ASCII control labels that represent a one
character control code (i.e., ^A or Ctrl A). Appendix A contains the entire ASCII Control
Code Chart.
Attention-Getter
ASCII Character
Decimal Value
HEX Value
Immediate Commands
SOH
1
01
System-Level Commands
STX
2
02
Font Loading Commands
ESC
27
1B
Easy Control Codes
DPL has been enhanced to accept a 3-character SOH and STX sequence. Easy Control Codes
are always enabled, whether in Standard, Alternate, Alternate 2, or Custom Control Code
Mode. Two types of sequences have been created to meet any application’s requirements.
Use these sequences where you normally would use a single SOH or STX character.
These sequences will not function when the printer input mode is selected to “auto”.
Control Character
3 “%” Character
Sequence
3 “^”Character
Sequence
Command Type
SOH
%01
^01
Control
STX
%02
^02
System
7
Control Code Command Functions
Alternate Control Code Modes
For systems unable to transmit certain control codes, Alternate Control Code Modes are
available. Configuring the printer to operate in an Alternate Control Code Mode (selected via
the Setup Menu, the <STX>Kc command or, where applicable, the <STX>KD command)
requires the substitution of Standard Control Characters with Alternate Control Characters in
what is otherwise a normal data stream.
Control
Character
Standard
Alternate
Alternate 2
SOH
0x01
0x5E
0x5E
STX
0x02
0x7E
0x7E
CR
ESC
“Count By”
[1]
Custom
Command
Type
Control
System
User Defined
Line Termination
0x0D
0x0D
0x7C
0x1B
0x1B
0x1B
Font Loading
0x5E
0x40
0x40
Label Formatting
[1]
See Label Formatting Commands, ^ set count by amount.

Throughout this manual <SOH>, <STX>, <CR>, <ESC>, and ^ will be used to indicate control
codes. The actual values will depend on whether standard or alternate control codes are
enabled for the particular application.
Alternate Line Terminator Example: Alternate Control Codes provide for substitution of
the line terminator, as well as the control characters listed above. For example using
Alternate 2, the line terminator <CR> (0x0D) is replaced by | (0x7C). The following is a
sample label format data stream for a printer configured for Alternate-2 Control Codes:
~L|1911A10001000101234560|X|~UT01ABCDE|~G|
8
Immediate Command Functions
3
Immediate Command Functions
Introduction
When the printer receives an Immediate Command, its current operation will be
momentarily interrupted to respond to the command. Immediate Commands may be issued
before or after System-Level commands; however, they may not be issued among Label
Formatting Commands or during font or image downloading. Immediate Commands consist
of:
1. Attention-Getter, 0x01 or 0x5E; see Control Code Command Functions.
2. Command Character
SOH #
Reset
This command resets the printer. Resetting the printer returns all settings to default and
clears both the communications and printing buffers. The command also clears DRAM
memory.
Syntax:
<SOH>#
Printer Response:
The printer will reset.
<XON> T (The T may come before the <XON>)
SOH *
Reset
This command forces a soft reset of the microprocessor. The printer is initialized to the
same state as a power cycle.
Syntax:
<SOH>*
Printer Response:
The printer will reset.
<XON> R (The R may come before the <XON>)
9
Immediate Command Functions
SOH A
Send ASCII Status String
This command allows the host computer to check the current printer status. The printer
returns a string of eight characters, followed by a carriage return. Each character (see
below) indicates an associated condition, either true (Y) or false (N). Byte 1 is
transmitted first. See <SOH>F.
Syntax:
<SOH>A
Sample:
<SOH>A
Printer Response:
abcdefgh<CR>
Where:
Possible
Values
SOH a
Interpretation
Transmit
Sequence
a
-
Y/N
Y
= Interpreter busy (imaging)
1
b
-
Y/N
Y
= Paper out or fault
2
c
-
Y/N
Y
= Ribbon out or fault
3
d
-
Y/N
Y
= Printing batch
4
e
-
Y/N
Y
= Busy printing
5
f
-
Y/N
Y
= Printer paused
6
g
-
Y/N
Y
= Label presented
7
h
-
Y/N
Y
= (Internal) Rewinder out or fault
8
Send ASCII Extended Status String
This command allows the host computer to check an extended current printer status.
The printer returns a string of seventeen characters, followed by a carriage return. Most
characters (see below) indicate an associated condition, either true (Y) or false (N). Byte
1 is transmitted first. See <SOH>F.
Syntax:
<SOH>a
Sample:
<SOH>a
abcdefgh:ijklmnop:qrstuvwx<CR>
Printer Response:
The printer response size may grow as new requirements are defined. The response will
always be backward compatible and terminated with a <CR>. The user should not
assume a fixed length response.
10
Immediate Command Functions
Where:
Possible
Values
a
Y/N
b
Y/N
c
Y/N
d
Y/N
e
Y/N
f
Y/N
g
Y/N
h
Y/N
:
i
Y/N
j
Y/N
k
Y/N
l
Y/N
m
Y/N
n
Y/N
o
Y/N
p
Y/N
:
q
Y/N
r
Y/N
s
Y/N
t
Y/N
u
Y/N
v
Y/N
w
Y/N
x
Y/N
<CR>
SOH B
Interpretation
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
:
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
:
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Interpreter busy (imaging)
Paper out or fault
Ribbon out or fault
Printing batch
Busy printing
Printer paused
Label presented
Rewinder out or fault
Always :
Cutter Fault
Paper Out
Ribbon Saver Fault
Print Head Up
Top of Form Fault
Ribbon Low
N (reserved for future)
N (reserved for future)
Always :
Ready (no data or signal)
Waitng for Signal
Waitng for Data
Com1 has data not parsed
N (reserved for future)
N (reserved for future)
N (reserved for future)
N (reserved for future)
Transmit
Sequence
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
Toggle Pause
This command toggles the printer’s paused state between “On” and “Off.” (This is the
same function achieved by pressing the PAUSE Key.)
Syntax:
<SOH>B
Sample:
<SOH>B
Printer Response:
This command will illuminate the Paused/Stop Indicator and/or
indicate PAUSED on the LCD or graphics display panel, suspend
printing, and wait until one of the following occurs:
•
•
The <SOH>B command is sent to the printer.
The PAUSE Key is pressed.
Upon which the printer will turn the Paused/Stop Indicator “Off”
and/or remove PAUSED from the LCD or graphics display, then
resume operation from the point of interruption. (If the Receive
Buffer is not full, an <XON> character will be transmitted from
the printer.)
11
Immediate Command Functions
SOH C
Stop/Cancel
This command performs the same function as pressing the STOP/CANCEL Key (i.e., it
clears the current format from the print buffer, pauses the printer, and illuminates the
Paused/Stop Indicator). (The pause condition is terminated as described under <SOH>B.)
Syntax:
<SOH>C
Sample:
<SOH>C
Printer Response:
The print buffer is cleared and the Paused/Stop Indicator is
illuminated (and/or PAUSED is displayed on the LCD or graphics
display) as operations are suspended, until one of the following
occurs:
•
•
The <SOH>B command is sent to the printer; or
The PAUSE Key is pressed.
Upon which the printer will turn the Paused/Stop Indicator
“Off” and/or remove PAUSED from the LCD or graphics
display. (If the Receive Buffer is not full, an <XON> character
will be transmitted from the printer.)
SOH D
SOH Shutdown
This command is ignored by the printer.
SOH E
Send Batch Remaining Quantity
This command causes the printer to return a four-digit number indicating the quantity of
labels that remain to be printed in the current batch, followed by a carriage return.
Communications latency may cause this value to be higher than actual on some printers.
Syntax:
<SOH>E
Printer response:
nnnn<CR>
Where:
nnnn
- Are four decimal digits, 0-9999.
12
Immediate Command Functions
SOH e
Send Batch Printed Quantity
This command causes the printer to return a four-digit number indicating the quantity of
labels that have been printed in the current batch, followed by a carriage return.
Communications latency may cause this value to be lower than actual on some printers.
Syntax:
<SOH>e
Printer response:
nnnn<CR>
Where:
nnnn
SOH F
- Are four decimal digits, 0-9999.
Send Status Byte
This command instructs the printer to send a single status byte where each bit (1 or 0)
represents one of the printer’s status flags, followed by a carriage return (see below). If
an option is unavailable for the printer, the single bit will always be zero. See <SOH>A.
Syntax:
<SOH>F
Response format:
X<CR>
Where:
“X” is 0 through 0xef with bits as indicated in the “Condition”
column below:
*
Bit*
Value
Condition
8
1 or 0
(Internal) Rewinder out or fault
7
1 or 0
Label presented
6
1 or 0
Printer paused
5
1 or 0
Busy printing
4
1 or 0
Printing batch
3
1 or 0
Ribbon out or Fault
2
1 or 0
Paper out or Fault
1
1 or 0
Command interpreter busy (imaging)
One is the least significant bit.
13
Immediate Command Functions
14
System-Level Command Functions
4
System-Level Command Functions
Introduction
The most commonly used commands are the System-Level Commands. These are used to
load and store graphics information, in addition to printer control. System-Level Commands
are used to override default parameter values (fixed and selectable) and may be used
before or after Immediate Commands but cannot be issued among Label Formatting
Commands. System-Level Commands consist of:
1. Attention-Getter, 0x02 or 0x7E; see Control Code Command Functions.
2. Command Character
3. Parameters (if any).
STX A
Set Time and Date
This command sets the time and date. The initial setting of the date will be stored in the
printer’s internal inch counter. This date can be verified by printing a Configuration
Label.
Syntax:
<STX>AwmmddyyyyhhMMjjj
Where:
w
1 digit for day of week; 1 = Monday; 7 = Sunday
mm
2 digits for month
dd
2 digits for day
yyyy
4 digits for year
hh
2 digits for hour in 24 hour format
MM
2 digits for minutes
jjj
3 digits for Julian date / constant; see notes below.
Sample:
<STX>A1020319960855034
Printed response:
Mon. Feb 3, 1996, 8:55AM, 034

• When set to 000, the Julian date is automatically calculated; otherwise, the Julian
date will print as entered, without daily increments. If factory defaults are restored
the actual Julian date will also be restored.
• Printers without the Real Time Clock option lose the set time/date when power is
removed.
• Response format is variable; see the Special Label Formatting Command <STX>T.
15
System-Level Command Functions
STX a
Enable Feedback Characters
This command enables the feedback ASCII hex characters to be returned from the
printer following specific events after each completed batch of labels when using serial
communications. The default value is ”OFF”.
Syntax:
<STX>a
Printer response:
Event dependent. (Also see Appendix D for error codes.)
Where:
STX B
Event
Return Characters
Invalid character
0x07 ( BEL )
Label printed
0x1E ( RS )
End of batch
0x1F ( US )
Get Printer Time and Date Information
This command instructs the printer to retrieve its internal time and date information.
Syntax:
<STX>B
Sample:
<STX>B
Response format:
wmmddyyyyhhMMjjj<CR>
Where:
w
1 digit for day of week; 1 = Monday
mm
2 digits for month
dd
2 digits for day
yyyy
4 digits for year
hh
2 digits for hour in 24 hour format
MM
2 digits for minutes
jjj
3 digits for Julian date / constant*
* See <STX>A for details and restrictions.
Response sample:
1020319960855034<CR>
16
System-Level Command Functions
STX c
Set Continuous Paper Length
This command sets the label size for applications using continuous media. It disables the
top-of-form function performed by the Media Sensor. The sensor, however, continues to
monitor paper-out conditions. See <STX>M.
Syntax:
<STX>cnnnn
Where:
nnnn
Sample:
<STX>c0100

- Specifies the length of the media feed for each label
format, in inches/100 or millimeters/10 (see <STX>m).
The sample above sets a label length of 100, which equals 1.00
inch (assuming Imperial Mode is selected).
This command must be reset to zero for edge or reflective sensing operation.
STX E
Set Quantity for Stored Label
This command sets the number of labels for printing using the format currently in the
print buffer. (The printer automatically stores the most recent format received in the
buffer until the printer is reset or power is removed.) When used in conjunction with the
<STX>G command, this will print the format.
Syntax:
<STX>Ennnnn<CR>
Where:
nnnnn
- A five-digit quantity, including leading zeros.
<CR>
- 0x0d terminates the name.
Sample:
<STX>E00025<CR>
<STX>G
Printer response:
25 labels of the current format in memory will be printed.

If no <CR> terminates the command, a four-digit quantity (nnnn) can be entered; and,
specifying 9999 will cause continuous printing.
17
System-Level Command Functions
STX e
Select Edge Sensor
This command enables transmissive (see-through) sensing for top-of-form detection of
die-cut and holed (notched) media. This sensor will detect a minimum gap of 0.1 inches
(2.5 mm) between labels (see the Operator’s Manual for media requirements). This is
the default setting.
Syntax:

<STX>e
This command is ignored when <STX>cnnnn is issued with a non-zero value for nnnn.
STX F
Form Feed
This commands the printer to form feed to the next start of print.
Syntax:
<STX>F
Printer response:
The printer will form feed.
STX f
Set Form Stop Position (Backfeed Command)
This sets the stop position of the printed label, allowing the label to stop at a point past
the start-of-print position. When the next label format is sent, the printer motor
reverses direction to retract the media to the start-of-print position. If quantities of more
than one label are requested, the printer will operate without backfeeding. Backfeed will
then only occur when printing has stopped for a few seconds.
D-O recommend not using the <stx>Kf command instead of this command.
legacy command.
Syntax:
<STX>fnnn
Where:
nnn
Sample:
<STX>f230
This is a
- Is a three-digit distance from the Media Sensor, in
inches/100 or mm/10. This distance is independent of
the start-of-print position (<STX>O), yet it must be
greater than the start-of-print position to take effect.
The sample above sets a stop position distance of 230 (2.3 inches
from the Media Sensor’s eye).
18
System-Level Command Functions
STX G
Print Last Label Format
This command prints a previously formatted label and restarts a canceled batch job
following the last processed label. This is used when there is a label format in the buffer.
The <STX>E command is used to enter the quantity. (Without the <STX>E command, one
label will print.)
Syntax:
<STX>G
STX I
Input Image Data
This command must precede image downloading from the host to the printer. The data
that immediately follows the command string will be image data.

The native format for storing downloaded PCX and BMP images is RLE-2, which results
in a better compression ratio for less module space usage when downloading gray-scale
images and images with large black or white areas.
Syntax:
<STX>Iabfnn…n<CR>data
Where:
a
- Memory Module Bank Select (see Appendix K).
b
- Data Type (optional), A or omit:
b Value:
A
omit
f
- Format Designator:
f Designator:
F
B
b
I
i
P
p
Sample:
Image Data Value Range:
ASCII Characters 0-9, A-F, (7 bit)
00-FF, (8 bit)
Format Type:
7-bit D-O image load file
.BMP 8-bit format, flipped, black
and white (B&W)
.BMP 8-bit format, B&W
.IMG 8-bit format, flipped, B&W
.IMG 8-bit format, B&W
.PCX 8-bit format, flipped, B&W
.PCX 8-bit format, B&W
nn…n
<CR>
- Up to 16 characters used as an image name.
- 0x0d terminates the name.
data
- Image data
<SOH>D
<STX>IDpTest <CR>
data...data <CR>
The sample above instructs the printer to (1) receive an 8-bit PCX
image sent by the host in an 8-bit data format, (2) name the
image “Test”, and (3) store it in Module D (with a .dim file
extension).
19
System-Level Command Functions
STX i
Scalable Font Downloading
The command structure for downloading TrueType (.TTF) scalable fonts (files may be
single-byte or double-byte character systems) is as follows:
Syntax:
<STX>imtnnName<CR>xx…xdata…
Where:
m
- The designator of the module where the font is to be
saved; see Appendix K.
t
- Type of scalable font being downloaded:
T = TrueType
nn
- Two-digit font reference ID. Valid range is 03-99,
9A-9Z, 9a-9z (base 62 numbers).
Name
- The title, up to 15 characters, for this font.
<CR>
- 0x0d terminates the Name.
xx…x
- Eight-digit size of the font data, number of bytes,
hexadecimal, padded with leading zeros.
data
- The scalable font data.
Sample:
<STX>iDT52Tree Frog<CR>000087C2data...
The sample above downloads a TrueType font to Module D, and
assigns it the Font ID of 52 with the name “Tree Frog” and file
extension .dtt. The size of the font data is 0x87C2 bytes long.
STX J
Set Pause for Each Label
This command causes the printer to pause after printing each label. It is intended for
use with the peel mechanism or tear bar when the Present Sensor option is not installed.
After removing the printed label, the PAUSE Key must be pushed in order to print the
next label. (The printer must be reset to clear the <STX>J command.)
Syntax:
STX K
<STX>J
Extended System-Level Commands
This is an expansion of the System-Level Command structure; see Extended SystemLevel Commands for more information.
20
System-Level Command Functions
STX k
Test Communication Port
This command instructs the printer to transmit the Y character from the printer’s port
that received this command. (Failure to receive Y could indicate an interfacing problem.)
Syntax:
<STX>k
Printer response:
Y
STX L
Enter Label Formatting Command Mode
This command switches the printer to the Label Formatting Command Mode, where the
printer expects to receive only Record Structures and Label Formatting Commands.
Immediate, System-Level, and Font Loading commands will be ignored until the label
formatting mode is terminated with E, s, or X, (see Label Formatting Commands for
additional information).
Syntax:
STX M
<STX>L
Set Maximum Label Length
This command instructs the printer move media this distance in search of the top-ofform (label edge, notch, black mark, etc.) before declaring a paper fault. A paper fault
condition can occur if this setting is too close (within 0.1 inch [2.54 mm]) to the physical
length of the label. Therefore, it is a good practice to set this command to 2.5 to 3 times
the actual label length used. The minimum value should be at least 5” (127 mm).
Syntax:
<STX>Mnnnn
Where:
nnnn
Sample:
<STX>M0500
- Is a four-digit length, 0000-9999, in/100 or mm/10.
Maximum setting is 9999 (99.99 inches or 2540
mm). The default setting is 16 inches/ 406.4 mm.
The sample above sets a maximum travel distance of 5 inches
(unless the printer is in metric mode; see <STX>m).
STX m
Set Printer to Metric Mode
This command sets the printer to interpret measurements as metric values (e.g.,
<STX>c0100 will equal 10.0 mm). The default is Imperial (see <STX>n).
Syntax:
<STX>m
21
System-Level Command Functions
STX n
Set Printer to Imperial Mode
This command sets the printer to interpret measurements as inch values (e.g.,
<STX>c0100 will equal 1.00 inch), and is the default mode.
Syntax:
STX O
<STX>n
Set Start of Print (SOP) Position
This command sets the point to begin printing relative to the top-of-form (the label’s
edge as detected by the Media Sensor). The printer will feed from the top-of-form to the
value specified in this command to begin printing.
This value operates independently of the <STX>f command.
D-O recommend not using the row adjust feature instead of this command.
legacy command.
Syntax:
<STX>Onnnn
Where:
nnnn
This is a
- Is a four-digit offset value in inches/100 or mm/10.
The “zero” setting is the default value, and settings
below 50 are adjusted back to the default value.
The default setting is “Off” and the printer assumes
the natural SOP position.
Sample:
<STX>O0210
The sample above will begin printing 0.1 inch closer to the leading
edge of the label if the 220 (Allegro) SOP Emulation was selected,
or 1.0 inch farther away from the leading edge if 110 (ProdPlus)
SOP Emulation was selected.
STX o
Cycle Cutter
This command will cause the optional cutter mechanism to immediately perform a cut
after all previously received commands are executed. The cutter must be installed,
enabled and the interlock(s) closed for operation.
Syntax:
<STX>o
22
System-Level Command Functions
STX P
Set Hex Dump Mode
This command instructs the printer to assume Hex Dump Mode. Instead of a formatted
product, data sent following this command will be printed in its raw ASCII format. To
capture all data, labels should be at least four inches (102 mm) long and as wide as the
maximum print width. This command has the same effect as turning “On” the printer
while depressing the FEED Key (return normal operation by manual reset).
Syntax:
<STX>P
Printer response is
data dependent
(layout may vary):
STX p
Controlled Pause
This command will cause the printer to pause only after all previously received
commands are executed, often useful between label batches. (This command will not
clear the pause condition; see <SOH>B).
Syntax:
<STX>p
STX Q
Clear All Modules
This command instructs the printer to clear all Flash and DRAM modules (except as
noted); see the corresponding Operator’s Manual for applicable module options. All
stored data will be destroyed.
Syntax:

<STX>Q
Will not affect Module Y or the ILPC Font module.
23
System-Level Command Functions
STX q
Clear Module
This command clears the selected Flash or DRAM module. During normal operations if a
module becomes corrupted (identifiable when the printer responds with a “No Modules
Available” message to a <STX>W command) it must be cleared. All stored data will be
destroyed.
Syntax:
<STX>qa
Where:
a
Sample:
<STX>qA

- Memory module designator; see Appendix K.
Will not affect Module Y or the ILPC Font module.
STX R
Ribbon Saver Control
This command enables the operation of the optional Ribbon Saver. It is the only
command used to control the Ribbon Saver. Its operation is continuous when enabled.
The printer must be set to thermal transfer (ribbon) printing mode then, during
operation, the Ribbon Saver engages automatically, lifting when the minimum amount of
label white space is exceeded.
Syntax:
<STX>Rx
Where:
x
Sample:
<STX>RY
- Y - Enabled (Default = Menu selection.)
N - Disabled
The sample above will turn the ribbon saver on.

This command is ignored on non-equipped printers.
STX r
Select Reflective Sensor
This command enables reflective (black mark) sensing for top-of-form detection of rolled
butt-cut, and fan-fold or tag stocks with reflective marks on the underside. This Media
Sensor will detect a minimum mark of 0.1 inches (2.54 mm) between labels (see the
Operator’s Manual for media requirements). The end of the black mark determines the
top of form. Use the <STX>O command to adjust the print position.
Syntax:
<STX>r
Default setting:
Edge sensing
24
System-Level Command Functions
STX S
Set Feed Speed
This command controls the output rate of the media when the FEED Key is pressed.
Syntax:
<STX>Sn
Where:
n
STX T
- Is a letter value (see Appendix L).
Print Quality Label
This command instructs the printer to produce a Print Quality label, a format comprised
of different patterns and bar codes useful in printer setup. To capture all printed
information, use the labels as wide as the maximum print width (see Appendix K) and at
least four inches (102 mm) long.
Syntax:
<STX>T
Printer response
(dot patterns may
vary):
STX t
Test DRAM Memory Module
This command tests the DRAM module. The printer returns a one-line message stating
the module condition (no message is returned if a module is unavailable). The printer
must have Feedback Characters enabled for this command to function. Feedback
Characters can be enabled via the menu (see the Operator’s Manual for additional
information).
3
Syntax:
<STX>t
Response format:
Module D: xxxxK
Where:
xxxx
- Module size in Kbytes.
results
- Test results given as “Good” or “Bad”.
RAM Tested results <CR>
25
System-Level Command Functions
STX U
Label Format String Replacement Field
This command places new label data into format fields to build a label. Two options are
available: Exact Length and Truncated Length.
To easily keep track of fields, place all of the fields to be updated with the command at
the beginning of the label format. A maximum of 99 format fields can be updated. Fields
are numbered consecutively 01 to 99 in the order received.
Exact Length Replacement Field Functions – The new data string must equal the
original string length and contain valid data. When the dynamic data is shorter than the
length of the originally defined data field, then field will be padded with blanks (or zero
when the Format Record header specifies a numeric bar code).
Syntax:
<STX>Unnss…s<CR>
Where:
nn
- Is the format field number, 2 digits.
ss…s
- Is the new string data, followed by a <CR>
Exact Length
Sample:
<STX>L
1A1100001000100data field 1<CR>
161100001100110data field 2<CR>
161100001200120data field 3<CR>
Q0001
E
<STX>U01123<CR>
<STX>U02New data F2<CR>
<STX>E0002
<STX>G
The sample above produces three labels. The first is formatted
with the commands between <STX>L and E. The next two labels
print with the replacement data contained in the <STX>U
commands (see <STX>E and <STX>G). The bar code is the same
length: 3 digits and nine spaces.
Truncated Length Replacement Field Functions – A variant of the <STX>U command
includes the truncate option “T”, where dynamic data shorter than the originally defined
field length will not be padded and the original maximum field length is maintained for
subsequent replacements.
Syntax:
<STX>UTnnss…s<CR>
Where:
nn
- Is the format field number, 2 digits.
T
- Truncate option
ss…s
- Is the new string data, followed by a <CR>.
26
System-Level Command Functions
Truncated Sample:
<STX>L
1A1100001000100data field 1<CR>
161100001100110data field 2<CR>
161100001200120data field 3<CR>
Q0001
E
<STX>UT01123<CR>
<STX>U02New data F2<CR>
<STX>E0002
<STX>G
The sample above produces three labels. The first is formatted
with the commands between <STX>L and E. The next two labels
print with the replacement data contained in the <STX>U
commands (see <STX>E and <STX>G). The bar code is shortened;
it only has three digits (and no spaces).
STX V
Software Switch Settings
This command controls the printer options, where the appropriate value allows the
option(s) to be “On” or “Off.” Each option has a corresponding bit whose value is “1”
when enabled. The tables below indicate the bit assignments and corresponding
command value needed to enable the desired option(s). Printer options are set by
entering selections through the menu. The software setting command allows two of
these option settings to be modified without returning to the menu.
Syntax:
<STX>Vn
Where:
n
Sample:
<STX>V5
- Is a single digit ASCII numeric value from 0-F. The
value of n is used to override the power-up option
settings. Reset or power-up returns the printer to the
original settings.
The sample above corresponds to setting Bits 0 and 2, creating a
command value of 5. When applied, this enables the Present
Sensor and Cutter options.
Bit Assignment
0
1
2
3
Printer Option
Cutter
N/A
Present Sensor
N/A
Use the bit assignment table above to determine the command value n in the binary
table below (e.g., the command value 5 sets the bits 0 and 2 to “1”).
n Value
0
1
4
5
Command Values for Bits Assigned
Bit
3
2
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
27
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
System-Level Command Functions
STX v
Request Firmware Version
This command causes the printer to send its version string (same as printed on the
configuration label). The version may be different from printer to printer.
Syntax:
<STX>v
Printer Response:
VER: 9.02_0004 01/01/2008<CR>
STX W
Request Memory Module Information
This command requests a memory module directory listing. Results may vary depending
on printer class, model, or firmware version.
Syntax:
<STX>W[b][c]a
Where:
b
s optional – list file size also
c
e optional – list file extension also
a
- Data type:
F
G
L
C
X
N
M
f
p
*
Sample:
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Downloaded fonts
Graphics (Image)
Label formats
Configuration files
Menu language files
Plug-ins
Miscellaneous type files
Resident fonts
Entire module contents
All types
<STX>WF
Printer response:
MODULE: D<CR>
S50 92244ttf50<CR>
AVAILABLE BYTES: 945152<CR>
MODULE: G<CR>
AVAILABLE BYTES: 852480<CR>
MODULE: X<CR>
AVAILABLE BYTES: 852480<CR>
MODULE: Y<CR>
AVAILABLE BYTES: 852480<CR>
28
System-Level Command Functions
STX w
Test Flash Memory Module
This command tests the Flash module. The time for each test will vary from 20 to 120
seconds, depending upon the size of the module. All stored data will be destroyed. If
no module is present, there will be no printer response.
Syntax:
<STX>wa
Where:
a
Response format:
Module A: xxxxK results
Where:
A
- Module tested.
xxxx
- Module size in Kbytes.
results
- Test results given as “Good” or “Bad”.
STX X
- Module designator; see Appendix K.
Set Default Module
This command, typically used prior to the loading of PCL-4 bitmapped fonts (see Font
Loading Commands), is designed to allow the user to select between modules when
downloading information. The default module is one of the following:
1. The first alpha designator of the existing modules if item 2 has not occurred.
2. The module selected by this command.
Syntax:
<STX>Xa
Where:
a
Sample:
<STX>XB
- Module designator; See Appendix K.
The sample above sets “B” as the default module.
29
System-Level Command Functions
STX x
Delete File from Module
This command removes a specific file from the specified module. The file name is
removed from the module directory and thus the file cannot be accessed. The actual
storage space occupied by the file is not released. To reclaim deleted file storage space
use <STX>z to pack the module.
Syntax:
<STX>xmtnn…n<CR>
Where:
m
- Module designator; see Appendix K.
t
- The file type identification code:
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
G
L
F
S
C
X
N
M
u
nn…n
Image file
Label format file
Downloaded bitmapped font file
Downloaded scalable font file
Configuration file
Language file
Plug-in file
Miscellaneous file type
Unknown type – must use extension if
applicable
- The file to delete, where:
• Font (bitmapped), three character font identifier;
• Font (scalable), two character font identifier;
• Graphic name, up to sixteen alphanumeric
characters; or,
• Label format name, up to sixteen alphanumeric
characters.
Sample:
<STX>xDS50<CR>
The sample above deletes a downloaded scalable font with ID 50
from Module D.
30
System-Level Command Functions
STX Y
Output Sensor Values
This command causes a sensor value response. When <STX>Y is received, the printer will
respond with the digitally converted values of the internal analog sensors (see below).
To repeat the display of values, send the printer a “SPACE” character (20 hexadecimal);
or, send <ESC> to terminate this function.
The printer must have Feedback Characters enabled for this command to function.
(Feedback Mode [Characters] can be enabled via command or menu setting; see the
<STX>KcFM command or the Operator’s Manual for additional information).
Syntax:
<STX>Y
Printer response:
Thermistor ADC: 0048 Reflective ADC: 0000
Transmissive ADC: 0000 24 Volt ADC: 0217 Contrast ADC:
0093 TOF Adjust ADC: 0170 Ribbon ADC: 0125 Battery
Level: Good <CR>
Where:
Battery level:

Good indicates a sufficient battery charge;
Low indicates an insufficient charge.
• Equipped sensors vary with printer, model, and options;
• Some readings require printer-controlled paper movement to produce a meaningful
value; and,
• Media Sensor readings require the appropriate sensor selection, transmissive
(<STX>e) or reflective (<STX>r), and label stock placed in the sensor.
STX y
Select Font Symbol Set
This command selects the scalable font symbol set. The selected symbol set remains
active until another symbol set is selected. See the <STX>KS command and Appendices
E, I, and H for more information. Option dependent and not all symbol sets can be used
with all fonts.
Syntax:
<STX>ySxx
Where:
S
- Byte-size designation; see Appendix H:
S = Single byte symbol sets.
U = Double byte symbol sets.
xx
- Symbol set selection.
Sample:
<STX>ySPM
The sample above selects the PC-850 multilingual set.
31
System-Level Command Functions
STX Z
Print Configuration Label
This command causes the printer to produce a Database Configuration Label. To capture
all printed information, use the labels as wide as the maximum print width (see
Appendix K) and at least four inches (102 mm) long.
Syntax:
<STX>Z
Printer response:
MODE:
CONFIGURATION
DISABLED
TUE 09:09 AM 10FEB2009
PRINTER KEY:
BACKUP DELAY (1/50s):
0
4212-HE25-060224-090
FONT EMULATION:
STANDARD FONTS
APPLICATION VERSION:
83-2541-11H3 11.083 12/22/2008
LABEL STORE:
STATE & FIELDS
MCL Version: 1.00.06-072
BOOT LOADER:
MENU LANGUAGE:
ENGLISH
83-2539-11A 11.01 10/02/2007
FAULT HANDLING:
LEVEL:
UNLOCKED:
CG TIMES
STANDARD
FPGA:
VOID DISTANCE:
HP10
0.50 in.
iPH:
RETRY COUNT:
5x-00289 #163
1
MACM:
BACKFEED ON CLEAR:
00-0d-70-03-8b-b9
DISABLED
MACO:
NOT SET
COMMUNICATIONS
MACR:
00-90-c9-01-D0-64
SERIAL PORT A:
BAUD RATE:
SYSTEM INFORMATION
9600 BPS
PRINT BUFFER SIZE:
PROTOCOL:
FLASH SIZE:
PARITY:
RAM TEST:
DATA BITS:
BOTH
100 in.
NONE
8 MB
8
PASS

Printed information will vary according to printer, model, firmware version, and options.
STX z
Pack Module
Ignored.
This command causes the printer to reclaim all storage space associated with all deleted
files on the specified module (see <STX>X and <STX>x).
Syntax:
<STX>zm
Where:
m

- The module identification character; see Appendix K.
ignored
32
Extended System-Level Command Functions
5
Extended System-Level
Command Functions
Introduction
Issued in the same context as System-Level Commands, the Extended System-Level
Commands expand certain System-Level Commands to provide an extra degree of printer
control.
STX K}E
Empty Sensor Calibration
This command causes the printer to determine and save the calibration value for an
empty media sensor condition. This calibration function should be performed when no
material is installed in the media sensor. Depending upon the printer model, different
front panel LED flash sequences and printer responses (below) will indicate calibration
progress and outcome; see the corresponding printer operator manual for LED flash
sequences details.
Printer Response
Alternate
REMOVE STOCK[CR]
N/A
ENTER TO CONTINUE[CR]
N/A
PASSED CALIBRATION[CR]
FAILED CALIBRATION[CR]
33
Extended System-Level Command Functions
STX K}M
Manual Media Calibration
This command causes the printer to save the sampled calibration values as an operator
places different portions of label stock within the media sensor. Depending upon the
printer model, different front panel LED flash sequences and printer responses (below)
will indicate calibration progress and outcome; see the corresponding printer operator
manual for LED flash sequences details. Sending <ESC> to the printer instead of <CR>
will terminate the process and leave the TOF Sensor values unchanged.
Printer Response
Alternate
LOAD STOCK[CR]
ENTER TO CONTINUE[CR]
N/A
LOAD MARK[CR]
ENTER TO CONTINUE[CR]
LOAD GAP[CR]
REMOVE STOCK[CR]
ENTER TO CONTINUE[CR]
N/A
PASSED CALIBRATION[CR]
FAILED CALIBRATION[CR]
STX K}Q
Quick Media Calibration
This command causes the printer to move media, sample, and then save sensor samples
as calibration values. This calibration function should be performed with media installed
over the TOF sensor in the printer. Depending upon the printer model, different front
panel LED flash sequences and printer responses (below) will indicate calibration
progress and outcome; see the corresponding printer operator manual for LED flash
sequences details.
Printer Response
Alternate
FAILED CALIBRATION[CR]
ADJUST GAIN SETTING[CR]
N/A
PASSED CALIBRATION[CR]
FAILED CALIBRATION[CR]
34
Extended System-Level Command Functions
STX KaR
Read Data from RFID Tag
(Direct Mode – Generic Read/Write Interface)
This command instructs the RFID device to read data from the tag and then place that
data into a replaceable field. It is expected that the tag transponder will be within the
read / write distance of the RFID programming device; otherwise, “Void” will be printed
in the text or bar code label field.
Syntax:
<STX>KaRAaaabbbcdee<CR>
Where:
A
- Optional – for data in the ASCII format.
aaa
- The number of bytes to read.
bbb
- HF - Starting block number (000  maximum block
number, which is dependent upon the
transponder manufacturer).
UHF – Should be 000.
c
- Command 1. Reserved. Should be 0.
d
- Command 2. Reserved. Should be 0.
ee
- Field number in which to place the data (must be 01,
02, 03, etc.) matching the order of Label Formatting
command U.

Sample:
The 00 value will send read data to the host with no
printing.
<STX>L
1911A1802000010TEXT
U
X
<STX>KaR0000010001
<STX>G
The sample above creates a replaceable text field (01), recalls data
from the RFID tag block zero (reading only one block), and prints
the data in the location specified by the replaceable field. Since
there are two digits per each hex value, replaceable fields should be
twice as long than if using ASCII data (e.g., the character “A” would
be returned as “41”).
35
Extended System-Level Command Functions
STX KaW Write Data to RFID Tag
(Direct Mode – Generic Read/Write Interface)
This command instructs the RFID device to write data to the tag. It is expected that the
tag transponder will be within the read / write distance of the RFID programming device;
otherwise, a warning will occur and a warning message (Read / Write Fail) will be
displayed.
Syntax:
Where:
<STX>KaWAaaabbbcdee…e<CR>
Aaaa
- Optional – for data in the ASCII format, followed by
the byte count (000-999).
bbb
- HF – Starting block number (000  maximum block
number, which is dependent upon the
transponder manufacturer).
UHF – Should be 000.
c
- Command 1. Reserved for Future (should be 0)
d
- Command 2. Reserved for Future (should be 0)
ee…e
- Data to be encoded on RFID tag (HF – the last used
block will be null-padded, if necessary).

Sample:
UHF ASCII formats must be 8 or 12 characters; and,
UHF Hexadecimal formats must be 16 or 24
character pairs.
<STX>KaW0000054455354[CR]
The sample above writes the data “TEST” at block zero.
STX Kb
Backfeed Time Delay
This command controls the time a printed label is allowed to remain “presented” before
being retracted to the start of print position.
Syntax:
<STX>Kbnnn<CR>
Where:
nnn
- Seconds/10 (0 to 255)
36
Extended System-Level Command Functions
STX KC
Get Configuration
This command returns the configuration of the printer. The form of the returned data is
similar to that of a printed Configuration Label. This command should be parsed by
KEYWORDS, not character positions. Each line is terminated by a CR (0x0d) & LF
(0x0a).
Syntax:
<STX>KC<CR>
Printer response:
PRINTER INFORMATION[CR ]
[LF ] TUE 10:07AM
18JUN2013[CR ]
[LF ] PRINTER KEY:[CR ]
[LF ] 4310-VN10-900067846[CR ]
[LF ] APPLICATION
VERSION:[CR ]
[LF ] I4310e 10.03_0035 0002
May 25 2013[CR ]
[LF ] BOOT1 VERSION:[CR ]
[LF ] ver: 1.10 0002[CR ]
[LF ] BOOT1 PN:[CR ]
[LF ] 83-2848-01A[CR ]
[LF ] BOOT2 VERSION:[CR ]
[LF ] ver: 2.06 0002[CR ]
[LF ] BOOT2 PN:[CR ]
[LF ] 83-2856-01B[CR ]
[LF ] PLUGIN MODULES:[CR ]
[LF ] Y: ??-2860-01B[CR ]
[LF ] UNLOCKED:[CR ]
[LF ] CG Times[CR ]
[LF ] CG TRIUM[CR ]
[LF ] FPGA:[CR ]
[LF ] IB04[CR ]
[LF ] Printer DPI:[CR ]
[LF ] 300[CR ]
[LF ] iPH:[CR ]
[LF ] 11-00036 #164[CR ]
[LF ]SYSTEM
INFORMATION[CR ]
[LF ] PRINT BUFFER SIZE:[CR ]
[LF ] 100[CR ]
[LF ] FLASH SIZE:[CR ]
[LF ] 64 MB[CR ]
[LF ] RAM TEST:[CR ]
[LF ] PASS[CR ]
[LF ] OPTIONAL
LANGUAGES:[CR ]
[LF ] FRANCAIS[CR ]
[LF ] ITALIANO[CR ]
[LF ] DEUTSCH[CR ]
[LF ] ESPA[xD1]OL[CR ]
[LF ] CONFIGURATION
FILE:[CR ]
[LF ] [CR ]
[LF ]MEDIA SETTINGS[CR ]
[LF ] MEDIA TYPE:[CR ]
[LF ] Direct Thermal[CR ]
[LF ] SENSOR TYPE:[CR ]
[LF ] Continuous[CR ]
[LF ] LABEL LENGTH:[CR ]
[LF ] 4.00 in.[CR ]
[LF ] MAXIMUM LABEL
LENGTH:[CR ]
[LF ] 12.00 in.[CR ]
[LF ] LABEL WIDTH:[CR ]
[LF ] 4.16 in.[CR ]
[LF ] PAPER OUT
DISTANCE:[CR ]
[LF ] 0.25 in.[CR ]
[LF ]SENSOR
CALIBRATION[CR ]
[LF ] PAPER SENSOR
LEVEL:[CR ]
[LF ] 195[CR ]
[LF ] REFL PAPER LEVEL:[CR ]
[LF ] 105[CR ]
[LF ] GAP SENSOR LEVEL:[CR
]
[LF ] 95[CR ]
[LF ] MARK SENSOR
LEVEL:[CR ]
[LF ] 190[CR ]
[LF ] EMPTY SENSOR
LEVEL:[CR ]
[LF ] 11[CR ]
[LF ] TRAN SENSOR GAIN:[CR
]
[LF ] 8[CR ]
[LF ] REFL SENSOR GAIN:[CR ]
[LF ] 23[CR ]
[LF ] PRESENT SENSOR
GAIN:[CR ]
[LF ] 23[CR ]
[LF ] CLEAN HEAD
SCHEDULE:[CR ]
[LF ] 0 in. (* 1000)[CR ]
[LF ] CLEAN HEAD
COUNTER:[CR ]
[LF ] 2094 in.[CR ]
[LF ]PRINT CONTROL[CR ]
[LF ] HEAT:[CR ]
[LF ] 10[CR ]
[LF ] PRINT SPEED:[CR ]
[LF ] 8.0 in/sec[CR ]
[LF ] FEED SPEED:[CR ]
[LF ] 8.0 in/sec[CR ]
37
[LF ] REVERSE SPEED:[CR ]
[LF ] 4.0 in/sec[CR ]
[LF ] SLEW SPEED:[CR ]
[LF ] 8.0 in/sec[CR ]
[LF ] ROW OFFSET:[CR ]
[LF ] 0.00 in.[CR ]
[LF ] COLUMN OFFSET:[CR ]
[LF ] 0.00 in.[CR ]
[LF ] PRESENT DISTANCE:[CR
]
[LF ] Auto[CR ]
[LF ] TOF PRECEDENCE:[CR ]
[LF ] Disabled[CR ]
[LF ]CUSTOM
ADJUSTMENTS[CR ]
[LF ] DARKNESS:[CR ]
[LF ] 32[CR ]
[LF ] CONTRAST:[CR ]
[LF ] 32[CR ]
[LF ] ROW ADJUST:[CR ]
[LF ] 0 Dots[CR ]
[LF ] COLUMN ADJUST:[CR ]
[LF ] 0 Dots[CR ]
[LF ] PRESENT ADJUST:[CR ]
[LF ] 0 Dots[CR ]
[LF ]PRINTER OPTIONS[CR ]
[LF ] MODULES:[CR ]
[LF ] D: Formatted[CR ]
[LF ] G: Formatted[CR ]
[LF ] X: Formatted[CR ]
[LF ] Y: Formatted[CR ]
[LF ] PRESENT SENSOR:[CR ]
[LF ] Not Installed[CR ]
[LF ] CUTTER:[CR ]
[LF ] Not Installed[CR ]
[LF ]SYSTEM SETTINGS[CR ]
[LF ] DEFAULT MODULE:[CR ]
[LF ] D[CR ]
[LF ] INTERNAL MODULE:[CR ]
[LF ] 1024 KB[CR ]
[LF ] SCALEABLE FONT
CACHE:[CR ]
[LF ] 511 KB[CR ]
[LF ] SINGLE BYTE
SYMBOLS:[CR ]
[LF ] PC-850
MULTILINGUAL[CR ]
[LF ] DOUBLE BYTE
SYMBOLS:[CR ]
Extended System-Level Command Functions
[LF ] Unicode[CR ]
[LF ] FORMAT
ATTRIBUTES:[CR ]
[LF ] XOR[CR ]
[LF ] SCL FONT BOLD
FACTOR:[CR ]
[LF ] 8[CR ]
[LF ] LABEL ROTATION:[CR ]
[LF ] Enabled[CR ]
[LF ] IMAGING MODE:[CR ]
[LF ] Multiple Label[CR ]
[LF ] PAUSE MODE:[CR ]
[LF ] Disabled[CR ]
[LF ] PEEL MODE:[CR ]
[LF ] Disabled[CR ]
[LF ] UNITS OF MEASURE:[CR
]
[LF ] Imperial[CR ]
[LF ] INPUT MODE:[CR ]
[LF ] Auto[CR ]
[LF ] DPI EMULATION:[CR ]
[LF ] Disabled[CR ]
[LF ] COLUMN
EMULATION:[CR ]
[LF ] 0 Dots[CR ]
[LF ] ROW EMULATION:[CR ]
[LF ] 0 Dots[CR ]
[LF ] SOP EMULATION:[CR ]
[LF ] Disabled[CR ]
[LF ]BACK AFTER PRINT [CR ]
[LF ]MODE:[CR ]
[LF ] Disabled[CR ]
[LF ]BACKUP DELAY
(1/50S):[CR ]
[LF ] Disabled[CR ]
[LF ] FONT EMULATION:[CR ]
[LF ] Standard Fonts[CR ]
[LF ] LABEL STORE:[CR ]
[LF ] State & Fields[CR ]
[LF ]FAULT HANDLING[CR ]
[LF ] LEVEL:[CR ]
[LF ] Standard[CR ]
[LF ] VOID DISTANCE:[CR ]
[LF ] 0.50 in.[CR ]
[LF ] RETRY COUNT:[CR ]
[LF ] 1[CR ]
[LF ]BACKFEED ON
CLEAR:[CR ]
[LF ] Disabled[CR ]
[LF ]COMMUNICATIONS[CR ]
[LF ] SERIAL PORT A[CR ]
[LF ] BAUD RATE:[CR ]
[LF ] 9600 bps[CR ]
[LF ] DATA BITS:[CR ]
[LF ] 8[CR ]
[LF ] STOP BITS:[CR ]
[LF ] 1[CR ]
[LF ] PARITY:[CR ]
[LF ] None[CR ]
[LF ] PROTOCOL:[CR ]
[LF ] Both[CR ]
[LF ] PARALLEL PORT A[CR ]
[LF ] PORT DIRECTION:[CR ]
[LF ] Bi-Directional[CR ]
[LF ] USB PORT[CR ]
[LF ] USB DEVICE CLASS:[CR ]
[LF ] Printer[CR ]
[LF ]Network[CR ]
[LF ] General[CR ]
[LF ] Wired Ethernet On:[CR ]
[LF ] Yes[CR ]
[LF ] Wireless Ethernet On:[CR ]
[LF ] No[CR ]
[LF ] WEB Pages On:[CR ]
[LF ] Yes[CR ]
[LF ] TCP Printing On:[CR ]
[LF ] Yes[CR ]
[LF ] LPD Printing On:[CR ]
[LF ] Yes[CR ]
[LF ] Gratuitous ARP Period:[CR
]
[LF ] 1[CR ]
[LF ] Wired Ethernet[CR ]
[LF ] PHY Mode:[CR ]
[LF ] Auto-Negotiate[CR ]
[LF ] MAC Addr:[CR ]
[LF ] 00:0D:70:12:55:44[CR ]
[LF ] IP Address Method:[CR ]
[LF ] DHCP[CR ]
[LF ] Static IP Addr:[CR ]
[LF ] 192.168.10.26[CR ]
[LF ] Static Subnet Mask:[CR ]
[LF ] 255.255.255.0[CR ]
[LF ] Static Gateway:[CR ]
[LF ] 192.168.10.26[CR ]
[LF ] NetBIOS On:[CR ]
[LF ] No[CR ]
[LF ] NetBIOS Name:[CR ]
[LF ] [CR ]
[LF ] Use Static WINS:[CR ]
[LF ] No[CR ]
[LF ] Static WINS P Srv:[CR ]
[LF ] 0.0.0.0[CR ]
[LF ] Static WINS S Srv:[CR ]
[LF ] 0.0.0.0[CR ]
[LF ] TCP Print Port:[CR ]
[LF ] 9100[CR ]
[LF ] TCP Print Timeout:[CR ]
[LF ] 30 secs[CR ]
[LF ] LPD Print Port:[CR ]
[LF ] 515[CR ]
[LF ] UDP Mgnmt Port:[CR ]
[LF ] 9200[CR ]
[LF ] Wireless Ethernet[CR ]
[LF ] IP Address Method:[CR ]
[LF ] DHCP[CR ]
[LF ] Static IP Addr:[CR ]
[LF ] 0.0.0.0[CR ]
[LF ] Static Subnet Mask:[CR ]
[LF ] 0.0.0.0[CR ]
[LF ] Static Gateway:[CR ]
[LF ] 0.0.0.0[CR ]
[LF ] NetBIOS On:[CR ]
[LF ] No[CR ]
38
[LF ] NetBIOS Name:[CR ]
[LF ] [CR ]
[LF ] Use Static WINS:[CR ]
[LF ] No[CR ]
[LF ] Static WINS P Srv:[CR ]
[LF ] 0.0.0.0[CR ]
[LF ] Static WINS S Srv:[CR ]
[LF ] 0.0.0.0[CR ]
[LF ] Use Static DNS:[CR ]
[LF ] No[CR ]
[LF ] Static DNS P Srv:[CR ]
[LF ] 0.0.0.0[CR ]
[LF ] Static DNS S Srv:[CR ]
[LF ] 0.0.0.0[CR ]
[LF ] TCP Print Port:[CR ]
[LF ] 9100[CR ]
[LF ] TCP Print Timeout:[CR ]
[LF ] 30 secs[CR ]
[LF ] LPD Print Port:[CR ]
[LF ] 515[CR ]
[LF ] UDP Mgnmt Port:[CR ]
[LF ] 9200[CR ]
[LF ] WIFI Network Type:[CR ]
[LF ] Infrastructure[CR ]
[LF ] SSID:[CR ]
[LF ] D-O[CR ]
[LF ] Authentication Type:[CR ]
[LF ] None[CR ]
[LF ] EAP Type:[CR ]
[LF ] PEAP[CR ]
[LF ] Phase 2 Type:[CR ]
[LF ] EAP-MSCHAPV2[CR ]
[LF ] User Name:[CR ]
[LF ] [CR ]
[LF ] Group Cipher:[CR ]
[LF ] None[CR ]
[LF ] WEP Data Encrypt:[CR ]
[LF ] Un-Encrypted[CR ]
[LF ] WEP AP Authen:[CR ]
[LF ] OPEN[CR ]
[LF ] WEP Key Used:[CR ]
[LF ] 1[CR ]
[LF ] Reg. Domain:[CR ]
[LF ] 0 secs[CR ]
[LF ] Radio Mode:[CR ]
[LF ] 802.11b/g[CR ]
[LF ] Avalanche[CR ]
[LF ] Enabled:[CR ]
[LF ] No[CR ]
[LF ] Agent IP Addr:[CR ]
[LF ] 0.0.0.0[CR ]
[LF ] TCP Port:[CR ]
[LF ] 1777[CR ]
[LF ] Connect Type:[CR ]
[LF ] [CR ]
[LF ] Update Mode:[CR ]
[LF ] [CR ]
[LF ] Update Intrvl:[CR ]
[LF ] 6[CR ]
[LF ] Print Status:[CR ]
[LF ] Yes[CR ]
[LF ] Printer Name:[CR ]
Extended System-Level Command Functions
[LF ] [CR ]
[LF ] Printer Model:[CR ]
[LF ] [CR ]
[LF ] WLS FW Upgrade[CR ]
[LF ] Update Type:[CR ]
[LF ] [CR ]
[LF ] CFG File:[CR ]
[LF ] /DO/config.cfg[CR ]
[LF ] TFTP Srv IP:[CR ]
[LF ] 0.0.0.0[CR ]
[LF ] TFTP Port:[CR ]
[LF ] 69[CR ]
[LF ] Use Beeper:[CR ]
[LF ] Yes[CR ]
[LF ] Display Mode:[CR ]
[LF ] Yes[CR ]
[LF ]HOST SETTINGS[CR ]
[LF ] HOST TIMEOUT:[CR ]
[LF ] 10 secs[CR ]
[LF ]CONTROL CODES:[CR ]
[LF ] Standard Codes[CR ]
[LF ]FEEDBACK
CHARACTERS:[CR ]
[LF ] Disabled[CR ]

[LF ]ESC SEQUENCES:[CR ]
[LF ] Enabled[CR ]
[LF ]HEAT COMMAND:[CR ]
[LF ] Enabled[CR ]
[LF ]SPEED COMMANDS:[CR ]
[LF ] Enabled[CR ]
[LF ]TOF SENSING
COMMANDS:[CR ]
[LF ] Enabled[CR ]
[LF ]SYMBOL SET
COMMAND:[CR ]
[LF ] Enabled[CR ]
[LF ]CNTRL-CODES
(DATA):[CR ]
[LF ] Disabled[CR ]
[LF ]STX-V SW SETTINGS:[CR
]
[LF ] Disabled[CR ]
[LF ]MAX LENGTH
COMMAND:[CR ]
[LF ] Disabled[CR ]
[LF ]PROCESS SOH
(DATA):[CR ]
[LF ] Disabled[CR ]
[LF ]MEDIA COUNTERS[CR ]
[LF ] ABSOLUTE
COUNTER:[CR ]
[LF ] 1707[CR ]
[LF ] 03/05/2013[CR ]
[LF ] RESETTABLE
COUNTER:[CR ]
[LF ] 1707[CR ]
[LF ] 03/05/2013[CR ]
[LF ]DIAGNOSTICS[CR ]
[LF ] HEX DUMP MODE:[CR ]
[LF ] Disabled[CR ]
[LF ] PRINT TEST
RATE(MIN):[CR ]
[LF ] 0[CR ]
[LF ] SENSOR READINGS:[CR ]
[LF ] Refl: Disabled[CR ]
[LF ] Tran: 198[CR ]
[LF ] Present: 0[CR ]
[LF ] TPH Thr: 109[CR ]
[LF ] 24 VDC: 178[CR ]
[LF ] Ribbon: 205[CR ]
[LF ][CR ]
[LF ]END OF LIST[CR ]
The format of the displayed information will vary with printer, model, firmware version,
and equipped options.
39
Extended System-Level Command Functions
STX Kc
Configuration Set
This command specifies the Power-up Configuration parameter values for the printer and
is equivalent to using other system commands followed by the <SOH>U. This command
is intended for easily configuring a custom setup, but NOT for dynamic
configuration changes. Configuration commands are examined for differences
relative to the current configuration, and have no impact when no differences exist.
Printers will reset upon completion of a command stream containing parameter value
changes. In any case, no commands should be sent to the printer until this reset is
complete. Other command highlights include the following:
•
These parameter values are equivalent to changing the respective menu settings and
do not affect the factory default settings of the printer.
•
If separated by a semi-colon (;), multiple parameter values may be sent in a single
command stream; see sample below.
•
All values are stored in Flash memory and remain in effect until new values are
received or until factory defaults are restored.
•
If system commands are sent that override the Power-up Configuration value(s), the
Power-up Configuration value(s) will be restored the next time the printer is powered
“On” or is reset.
•
These parameters are the same as those found in the Menu System (displayequipped models). The respective functions are documented in the appropriate
Operator’s Manual. Not all commands are effective on all printers.

Illegal or out of range parameter values may have unpredictable results. In addition,
media sensing scaling values, TOF Bias, etc. may not be effective on other same-type
printers due to hardware tolerances.
Syntax:
<STX>Kcaa1val1[;aaIvalI][;aanvaln]<CR>
Where:
aa1, aaI, aan
- Are two letter parameter names.
val1, valI, valn
- Are parameter values, with ranges
appropriate for the associated parameter.
Sample:
<STX>KcPA120;CL600;STC<CR>
The sample above sets the Present Adjust to 120 dots, and the
Sensor Type to Continuous with a label length of six inches.
The following tablessummarize (alphabetically by name) different Configuration Set
command parameters, value ranges, command equivalents and applicability. If no
command equivalent is given, or where clarification is required, descriptions immediately
follow the table.
40
Extended System-Level Command Functions
Configuration Set Commands
Parameter
Pneumonic
Value /
Range
Units /
Interpretation
Command
Equivalent
Alignment Length
AL
0 – 999
1/100 inch
N/A
Avalanche
AV
Backup After Print
BA
Y, N
Y = Enabled,
N = Disabled
N/A
Backup Delay
BD
0 – 255
1/50 second
N/A
Backup Label
BL
0, 3, 4
0 = Disabled,
3 = Active Low,
4 = Active High
N/A
BS or bS
alpha character
Model specific ranges; see Appendix L.
pa
<STX>Kc
Parameter Name
Backup (Reverse) Speed
Blue Tooth
BT
British Pound
BP
Y, N
Y = Enabled,
N = Disabled
N/A
Buzzer Enable
BZ
Y, N
Y = Enabled,
N = Disabled
N/A
N/A
41
Extended System-Level Command Functions
<STX>Kc
Parameter Name
Parameter
Pneumonic
Value /
Range
Units /
Interpretation
Command
Equivalent
Column Adjust Fine Tune
CF
+ / – dots
Resolution specific;
see Appendix K.
N/A
Column Offset
CO
0 – 9999
1/100 in.
Cnnnn
Y, N
Y = Enabled,
N = Disabled
Comm Heat Commands
CH
Y = Enabled,
N = Disabled
Y, N
Comm Speed Commands
CS
Comm TOF Commands
CT
Configuration Builder
CU
Continuous Label Length
CL
N/A
1 = Enabled,
0 = Disabled
1, 0
1 = Enabled,
0 = Disabled
1, 0
N/A
Y, N
Y = Enabled,
N = Disabled
N/A
0 – 9999
1/100 in.
<STX>c
42
Extended System-Level Command Functions
<STX>Kc
Parameter Name
Control Codes
Parameter
Pneumonic
Value /
Range
Units /
Interpretation
CC
S, 1, 2
S = Standard,
1 = Alternate,
2 = Alternate-2
CE
Darkness
N/A
A or Y = Auto,
E = Enabled,
N or D = Disabled
A/Y, E, N/D
Cutter Equipped
Command
Equivalent
<STX>V
A, E/Y, N
A = Auto,
E or Y = Enabled,
N = Disabled
DK
1 – 64
N/A
N/A
Default Module
DM
D, G
A, B
Module Letter
<STX>X
Delay Rate
(Test Labels)
DR
0 – 120
Seconds
N/A
Disable Symbol Set
Selection
NS
Y, N
Y = Enabled,
N = Disabled
N/A
Display Mode
GD
S, E
S = Standard,
E = Enhanced
N/A
Double Byte Symbol Set
DS
2-Byte alpha
character
AA – ZZ, printer resident symbol set
<STX>y,
ySxx
DPI Emulation
DE
152, 200, 300,
400, 600
Dots per inch
N/A
43
Extended System-Level Command Functions
Parameter
Pneumonic
Value /
Range
Units /
Interpretation
Command
Equivalent
Empty Sensor Level
EV
0 – 255
N/A
N/A
End Character
EN
D
N/A
N/A
End Of Print
EP
1, 2, 3, 4
1 = Low Pulse,
2 = High Pulse,
3 = Active Low,
4 = Active High
N/A
ESC Sequences
ES
Y, N
Y = Enabled,
N = Disabled
N/A
Fault Handling
FH
L, D, R, B
See Command
N/A
SS or sS
Alpha character
Model specific ranges;
see Appendix L.
Sa
FM
Y, N
Y = Enabled,
N = Disabled
<STX>a
<STX>Kc
Parameter Name
Feed Speed
Feedback Mode
44
Extended System-Level Command Functions
Parameter
Pneumonic
Value /
Range
Units /
Interpretation
Command
Equivalent
Font Emulation
FE
0, 1, 2
0 = No Substitution
1 = Sub CG Times SA0
2 = Sub User S50
N/A
Format Attributes
FA
X, O, T
X = XOR,
O = Opaque,
T = Transparent
An
Gain Reflective Value
GR
0 – 31
N/A
N/A
Gap / Mark Value
GM
0 – 255
N/A
N/A
N/A
<STX>Kc
Parameter Name
GPIO Equipped
GE
A, V, N, 2
A = Applicator,
V = Verifier,
N = Disabled,
A = Applicator2
GPIO Error Pause
GP
E, D
E = Enabled,
D = Disabled
N/A
N/A
N/A
GPIO Slew
GS
0–4
0 = Standard,
1 = Low Pulse,
2 = High Pulse,
3 = Active Low,
4 = Active High
Head Bias
HB
L, R, C
L = Leftmost dot is zero,
R = Rightmost dot is zero
C=Center
45
Extended System-Level Command Functions
Parameter
Pneumonic
Value /
Range
Units /
Interpretation
Command
Equivalent
Head Cleaning
HC
0 – 9999
Inches (or centimeters) multiplied by 1000
N/A
Heat
HE
0 – 30
N/A
Hnn
Host Timeout
HT
1 – 60
Seconds
N/A
Y, N
Y = Enabled,
N = Disabled
<STX>Kc
Parameter Name
N/A
Ignore Control Codes
IC
Ignore Distances
IE
1, 0
1 = Enabled,
0 = Disabled
N/A
Imaging Mode
IL
M, S
M = Multiple label,
S = Single label
N/A
1 = Enabled,
0 = Disabled
1, 0
46
Extended System-Level Command Functions
Parameter
Pneumonic
Value /
Range
Units /
Interpretation
0 = DPL,
1 = Line,
3 = PL-Z,
5 = PL-I,
7 = PL-B,
8 = PL-E,
9 = Auto,
10 = CPCL,
11 = EasyPrint
Command
Equivalent
Input Mode
EM
0, 1, 3, 7, 9
Internal Module
IM
100 – up to max.
available; see
Appendix K
Kbytes
N/A
Label Alignment
LA
N, A, Y
See Command
N/A
Label Rotation
LR
Y, N
Y = Rotate 180
N = None
N/A
Label Store
LM
F, S
F = Fields,
S = States & Fields
N/A
Label Width
LW
0075 – head
width; see
Appendix K
1/100 inch
<STX>KW
Language Select
LS
String
Language Name
N/A
<STX>Kc
Parameter Name
47
N/A
Extended System-Level Command Functions
<STX>Kc
Parameter Name
Parameter
Pneumonic
Value /
Range
N, A, P, L
Units /
Interpretation
Command
Equivalent
N = None,
A = Allegro,
P = Prodigy,
L = Prodigy Plus,
M = Prodigy Max
X = XL
N/A
Legacy Emulation
LE
Mark Value
MV
0 – 255
N/A
N/A
Maximum Length Ignore
SM
0, 1
0=
Normal processing,
1 = Ignore
N/A
Maximum Length
ML
0 – 9999
1/100 inch
<STX>M
Media Type
MT
D, T
D = Direct,
T = Thermal Transfer
N/A
Menu Mode
MM
U, A
U = User,
A = Advanced
N/A
Module Command
MCC
See Command
N/A
Y = Enabled,
N = Disabled
N/A
N, A, P, L, M
Z, G
B
Network Configuration
(wired and wireless)
NE
No Reprint
NR
Y, N
48
Extended System-Level Command Functions
Parameter
Pneumonic
Value /
Range
Units /
Interpretation
Command
Equivalent
Option Feedback
OF
D, Rx, S
See Command
N/A
Paper Empty
PO
0 – 9999
1/100 inch
N/A
Paper Value
PV
0 – 255
N/A
N/A
Parallel Direction
PP
xz
See Command
N/A
Password Set
PW
A – Z,
0–9
Four characters
(or, if security is enabled then eight
characters).
N/A
Pause Mode
PM
Y, N
Y = Enabled,
N = Disabled
<STX>J
Peel Mode
PE
Y, N
Y = Enabled,
N = Disabled
N/A
Present Adjust Fine Tune
PJ
+ / – dots
Dots (model specific),
see Appendix K.
N/A
<STX>Kc
Parameter Name
49
Extended System-Level Command Functions
Parameter
Pneumonic
Value /
Range
Units /
Interpretation
Command
Equivalent
Present Distance
PD
0 – 400
1/100 inch
<STX>Kf
Present Sensor Equipped
PS
A/Y, E, N/D
A or Y = Auto,
E = Enabled,
N or D = Disabled
<STX>V
Print Contrast
PC
0 – 64
N/A
N/A
Printer Level
PL
000000 – FFFFFF
Hex Codes
N/A
Print Speed
pS
Alpha character
Model specific ranges; see Appendix L.
Pa
Query Configuration
QQ
Q, K
N/A
N/A
Reflective Paper Value
RV
0 – 255
N/A
N/A
Retract Delay
RW
1 – 255
Specified value times
ten milliseconds
N/A
Rewinder Adjust
RR
-xx, +yy
Applied torque, where -30 to +15 is the valid
range.
N/A
<STX>Kc
Parameter Name
50
Extended System-Level Command Functions
Parameter
Pneumonic
Value /
Range
Units /
Interpretation
Command
Equivalent
Rewinder Equipped
RM
A/Y, E, N/D
A or Y = Auto,
E = Enabled,
N or D = Disabled
N/A
RFID Configuration
RI
A, B, D, E, L, M,
N, P, R, S, T, U,
V, W
See Command
N/A
Ribbon Low Diameter
RL
100 – 200
1/100 in.
N/A
Ribbon Low Pause
RP
Y, N
Y = Enabled,
N = Disabled
N/A
Ribbon Low Signal
RS
3, 4
3 = Active Low,
4 = Active High
N/A
Row Adjust Fine Tune
RF
+ / – dots
Resolution specific; see Appendix K.
N/A
Row Offset
RO
0 – 9999
1/100 in.
Rnnnn
SA
0 – 255
(128 nominal)
N/A,
see Row Adjust Fine Tune
<STX>O
A, L, P, D
A = Allegro,
L = Prodigy Plus,
P = Prodigy,
D = Disable
N/A
<STX>Kc
Parameter Name
SOP Adjust
[1]
SOP Emulation
SE
51
Extended System-Level Command Functions
Parameter
Pneumonic
Value /
Range
Units /
Interpretation
Command
Equivalent
Save As Filename
SF
Alphanumeric
string
Up to 16 characters
N/A
Scalable Font Bolding
FB
1 – 36
N/A
N/A
Scalable Font Cache
SC
100 – 8192
Kbytes
N/A
Scanner Configuration
SN
C, H, M,
D, B, V
See Command
N/A
Security Lock
Sl
N, Y, T
See Command
N/A
Sensor Gain Value
SG
0 – 32
N/A
N/A
Sensor Type
ST
G, C, R
G = Gap (edge),
C = Continuous,
R = Reflective
<STX>e,<STX>r,<STX>c
Alternate Gap Type (RL3
& RL4 Only)
GA
E, D
E = Enable
D = Disabled
<STX>Kc
Parameter Name
52
N/A
Extended System-Level Command Functions
Parameter
Pneumonic
Value /
Range
Units /
Interpretation
Command
Equivalent
Serial Port
SP
xyz
See Command
N/A
Single Byte Symbol Set
AS
2-Byte alpha
character
AA – ZZ, printer resident symbol set
<STX>y, ySxx
Slew Speed
FS
Alpha character
Model specific ranges; see Appendix L.
<STX>KZSx
Software Switch
SV
Y, N
Y = Processed
N = Ignored
N/A
Start of Print
EQ
3, 4
3 = Active Low,
4 = Active High
N/A
Stop Location
SL
A, H, P,
C, T, N
See Command
N/A
TOF Precedence
TP
Y, N
Y = Enabled,
N = Disabled
N/A
User Label Mode
UD
Y, N
Y = Enabled,
N = Disabled
N/A
Unit of Measure
UM
M, I
M = Metric,
I = Imperial
<STX>m, <STX>n
Plug and Play ID Type
UN
Y, N
Y = Unique
N = Static
N/A
User Terminator
UT
ON
N/A
N/A
<STX>Kc
Parameter Name
53
Extended System-Level Command Functions
<STX>Kc Parameter Overviews
(AL) Alignment Length – This command, critical for small labels when Label
Alignment is set to YES, allows a length (measured from leading edge to leading
edge of two successive labels) to be entered. The measured length must be provided
to the nearest hundredth of an inch. For very small labels, errors of 0.01” can result
in noticeable print variations on the labels between the media sensor and the print
head. The number of labels that can be fit between the Media Sensor and the print
head will magnify any error in label alignment length. Errors in measurement are
more favorable on the low side rather than the high side.
(AS) Single Byte Symbol Set – This command allows for a default single-byte
symbol set. See <STX>y or ySxx for command details.
(AV)Avalanche Enabled Parameters – This command allows the printer to be
configured for the Avalanche utility..
Syntax:
<stx>KcAV[nnn1,vvvv1:nnn2,vvvv2:…,nnnn,vvvvn:];
Where:
Configuration Item – Value pairs
nnni,vvvvi:
Decimal Item Numbers from 1 to 9999
nnni
,
Decimal Item Number Delimiter
Item Value (syntax defined later)
vvvvi
:
Item Value Delimitermimitd
Example – Turn the Avalanche Enabler on:
<stx>KcAV[1,1:2,’192.168.99.1’:4,’Ava.Do.local’:8,b:9,10]
Enable Avalanche Enabler, Agent IP address is 192.168.99.1, Agent DNS name is
Ava.Do.local, Update model is both, and Update Interval is very 10 minutes.
Bluetooth parameters are defined by the following table:
Item
Number
Name
Available
to User
(Y/N)
Y
Value Type
Description
Unsigned
short
Flag to indicate that the Avalanche
Enabler is running or not
1 : Avalanche Enabler is running
0: Avalanche Enable is NOT
running (default).
The IP address of the Avalanche
Agent.
The TCP/IP port number. Default
value is 1777
1
Avalanche Enabler
Active
2
Agent IP Address
Y
String
3
Agent Port Number
Y
Unsigned
short
54
Extended System-Level Command Functions
Item
Number
Name
Available
to User
(Y/N)
Y
Value Type
Description
String
The DNS name of the Avalanche
Agent. Ex:
“AvaAgentName.DO.local”.
During the wireless update
process, Agent DNS Name will be
used to resolve to Agent IP
address. If Printer fails to obtain
the Agent IP address from the
Agent DNS Name, the Agent IP
Address (item number 2) will be
used as target address for printer
to connect to Avalanche Agent.
Type of connectivity from
Avalanche Enabler (printer) to the
Avalanche Agent.
0: None
1: TCP/IP (default)
This is the printer name that will
be displayed in the Wavelink
Management Console to represent
a printer.
Model of a printer.
4
Agent DNS Name
(max 255 chars)
5
Connectivity Type
Y
Unsigned
short
6
Printer Name (
max63 chars)
Y
String
7
Y
String
8
Printer Model (max
15 chars)
Update Mode
Y
Char
9
Update Interval
Y
Unsigned
short
Print Update Status
Result
Y
Char
10
55
Flag to indicate the Update Mode
for the Avalanche Enabler:
‘n’: None, No update even
Avalanched Enable Active is set
‘s’: Run the update process when
the printer is startup.
‘i’: Run the update process for
every Update Interval.
‘b’:Run the update process when
printer is started up and for every
Update Interval after that.
The value for an Update Interval
(in minutes).
Default is 6 minutes.
When the Update Method is set to
‘i’ (for interval) or ‘b’ (for both),
Printer will contacts the Avalanche
Agent for every Update Interval
(minutes) and execute the update
software package.
Printer will print the result of the
software update process, such as
“Avalanche Upgrade Stastus:
Upgrade complete ( <Name of the
Update Software Package>).
‘y’: Print the status of the update
result’
‘n’: Do not printer the status of
the update result (default)
Extended System-Level Command Functions
(BA) Backup After Print – This command determines the timing of the label back
up positioning when the present distance is set and the GPIO option or Present
Sensor option (including Peel and Present) is enabled. When enabled, the printer
immediately backs up the label after the applicator-issued start of print signal is
received or the label is removed, resulting in faster throughput. If disabled, the
printer will not initiate repositioning until the next label is ready to print (may help
prevent the curling of the label edge).
(BD) Backup Delay – This command sets a time delay for the retraction of a
presented label in one-fiftieth (1/50) of a second increments.
(BL) Backup Label – This command determines the timing of reverse label motion
when the GPIO option is installed and enabled; see Appendix J for details.
(BP) British Pound – This command, when enabled, will automatically switch from
the Number symbol (#) found at 0x23 (default PC-850 Multilingual Symbol Set) to
the British Pound symbol (£) at 0x9C.
(BS or bS) Backup Speed – This command controls the rate of label movement
during backup positioning for start of print, cutting or present distance; see Appendix
C for available speed ranges.
56
Extended System-Level Command Functions
(BT) Bluetooth Parameters – This command configures the Bluetooth
Communication parameters.
Syntax:
<stx>KcBT[nnn1,vvvv1:nnn2,vvvv2:…,nnnn,vvvvn:];
Where:
nnni,vvvvi:
nnni
,
vvvvi
:
Configuration Item – Value pairs
Decimal Item Numbers from 1 to 9999
Decimal Item Number Delimiter
Item Value (syntax defined later)
Item Value Delimitermimitd
Example – Discoverable on, service name is “smartchoice”, Bluetooth name is
“bestprinter”.
<stx>KcBT[1,’bestprinter’:2,’smartchoice’:3,1]
Bluetooth parameters are defined by the following table:
Item
Number
Name
Available
to User
(Y/N)
Y
Value Type
Description
String
Bluetooth Device Name
(Friendly Name) 1 to 32
characters. Default ‘DatamaxOneil’
Bluetooth Service name – 1 to
32 characters. Default
‘Datamax-Oneil’
Discoverable: yes or no;
Default YES.
0=no
1=yes
Connectable: yes or no;
Default is NO
0=no
1=yes
Bondable: yes or no; Default is
NO.
0=no
1=yes
Authentication on or off.
Default OFF.
0=no
1=yes
Encryption on or off. Default
OFF
0=no
1=yes
1
Bluetooth Name
2
Bluetooth Service
Name
Y
String
3
Discoverable or Not
Y
Boolean
4
Connectable or Not
Y
Boolean
5
Bondable or Not
Y
Boolean
6
Authentication on
Y
Boolean
7
Encryption on
Y
Boolean
57
Extended System-Level Command Functions
Item
Number
Name
Available
to User
(Y/N)
Y
Value Type
Description
String
String up to 16 characters.
Valid characters are
alpha/numeric. Default – not
used.
0=no
1=yes
0 to 65535. Default is 60
(Read and Write)
0 to 65535. Default is 60 (
Read and Write)
12 hexadecimal characters
(similar to MAC address) (Read
Only)
8
Passkey
9
Inactive Disc Time
Y
Int
10
Power Down Time
Y
Int
11
Bluetooth Address
Y
String
(BZ) Buzzer Enable – This command controls the audible signaling device that
acknowledges User Interface entries and, if enabled, sounds printer warning and
fault conditions.
(CC) Control Codes – This command, depending upon printer type, allows a change
to the prefix of the software commands interpreted by the printer:
Value
Units /
Interpretation
S
Standard Codes
Hex 01 = SOH command; Hex 02 = STX command; countby = ^; Hex 1B = ESC; Hex 0x0D = Carriage Return
1
Alternate Codes
Hex 5E = SOH command; Hex 7E = STX command; countby = @; Hex 1B = ESC; Hex 0x0D = Carriage Return
2
Alternate Codes 2
Hex 5E = SOH command; Hex 7E = STX command; countby = @; Hex 1B = ESC; Hex 0x7C = Carriage Return
Control Code Definition
(CE) Cutter Equipped – This command allows the printer to sense the cutter option.
“A” - automatically senses device presence; if undetected, no error is generated. “E” enables the device, where its presence must be detected; otherwise, a fault is
generated. “N” - disables device detection. One of these values is returned in
response to <STX>KcQQQ. Note that alternate values are accepted for backward
compatibility as follows: “Y” is equivalent to “A”.
(CF) Column Adjust Fine Tune – This command fine-tunes the Column Offset
setting by shifting both the horizontal start of print position and the Label Width
termination point to the right in dots (see Appendix K) to compensate for slight
mechanical differences sometimes evident when multiple printers share label
formats.
58
Extended System-Level Command Functions
(CH) Communicated Heat Commands – This command causes the printer to
ignore DPL Heat commands. Ignore by setting value to N. Process by setting value
to Y (default). When set to ignore Heat commands values are controlled via the
menu setting.
(CL) Continuous Label Length – See <STX>c for command details.
(CO) Column Offset – See Cnnnn for command details.
(CS) Communicated Speed Commands – This command causes the printer to
ignore DPL speed commands. Ignore by setting value to N. Process by setting value
to Y (default). When set to ignore speed values are controlled via the menu setting.
(CT) Communicated TOF Commands – This command causes the printer to
ignore DPL TOF (Gap, Continuous, and Reflective) commands. Ignore by setting
value to N. Process by setting value to Y (default). When set to DPL TOF values are
controlled via the menu setting.
59
Extended System-Level Command Functions
(CU) Configuration Upgrade Package Parameters – This command allows an
upgrade package to be created.
Syntax:
<stx>KcCU[nnn1,vvvv1:nnn2,vvvv2:…,nnnn,vvvvn:];
Where:
nnni,vvvvi:
nnni
,
vvvvi
:
Configuration Item – Value pairs
Decimal Item Numbers from 1 to 9999
Decimal Item Number Delimiter
Item Value (syntax defined later)
Item Value Delimitermimitd
Example – Discoverable on, service name is “smartchoice”, Bluetooth name is
“bestprinter”.
<stx>KcCU[1,1:2,’/DO/Denali.cfg’:3,’192.168.99.1’:4,69:5,’2011/04/26_1623’]
Configuration Upgrade Package parameters are defined by the following table:
Item
Number
Name
Available
to User
(Y/N)
Y
Value Type
Unsigned short
Description
1
Wireless Upgrade
Type
2
Configuration File
Y
String
3
4
TFTP IP address
TFTP Port
Y
Y
String
Unsigned short
5
Upgrade Package
Version
Wireless Upgrade
Beeper
Y
String
1-TFTP
2-Avalanche Wavelink
3-MSP
255 – Disable
Configuration file name (*.cfg)
for an Upgrade Package, 256
chars max.
IP address of TFTP server.
Port Number of TFTP Server,
default 69
Read only.
Y
Char
0: Off; 1: On (Default).
6
(DE) DPI Emulation – This command allows printers with higher resolutions to
emulate lower print resolutions, as follows:
•
600 DPI can emulate 300 and 203 DPI resolutions; and,
•
•
400 DPI can emulate a 203 DPI resolution; and,
300 DPI can emulate a 152 DPI resolution.
(DK) Darkness – This command adjusts the length of the print head strobe to finetune the HEAT setting.
60
Extended System-Level Command Functions
(DM) Default Module – See <STX>X for command details.
(DR) Delay Rate – This command sets the number of minutes to delay between
multiple batch printings of Quick Test Labels. This command is provided as a
diagnostic tool.
(DS) Double Byte Symbol Set – See <STX>y or ySxx for command details.
(EM) Input Mode – This command determines the data processing mode:
Value
Interpretation
Input Mode Interpretation
0
DPL
Character strings are parsed for standard DPL processing.
1
Line
No parsing occurs; instead, each carriage return (<CR>)
terminated data line is printed according to a stored template
(see Appendix S).
Character strings are parsed for PL-Z processing, applicable
only if the appropriate firmware is installed, as indicated by a
“Z” in the version string.
3
PL-Z
5
PL-I
7
PL-B

For RFID, the hardware option, tag type and size
should be preselected, and a tag calibration performed.
Also, if possible, driver / software options to use
“Printer Defaults” should be chosen to minimize
potential conflicts.
Character strings are parsed for PL-B processing, applicable
only if the appropriate firmware is installed, as indicated by a
“B” in the version string.
61
Extended System-Level Command Functions
Value
Interpretation
8
PL-E
Input Mode Interpretation
Character strings are automatically parsed and processed
according to the identified language.
9
Auto
10
CPCL
11
O’Neil EZ Print

A clean file is required, where extra leading characters
may cause the language to be unrecognizable;
otherwise, the appropriate Input Mode must be
selected.
(EN) End Character – This command terminates a <STX>Kc string.
(EP) End of Print – This command defines the signal output used to signify the End
of Print (EOP) process:
Value
Units
End of Print Interpretation
1
Low Pulse
Outputs a low pulse (approximately 30 milliseconds long)
following printing.
2
High Pulse
Outputs a high pulse (approximately 30 milliseconds long)
following printing.
3
Active Low
Outputs a logic low (zero) following printing.
4
Active High
Outputs a logic high (one) following printing.
62
Extended System-Level Command Functions
(EQ) Start of Print – This command defines the type of signal input required to
control the Start of Print (SOP) process:
Value
Units
Start of Print Interpretation
3
Active Low
SOP signal must go low for at least 50 milliseconds to initiate
printing.
4
Active High
SOP signal must go high for at least 50 milliseconds to
initiate printing.
(ES) ESC Sequences – This command allows data containing invalid ESC control
code sequences to be processed (helpful because some systems send a “banner” to
the printer). When set to “Disabled,” ESC sequences are ignored and the data is
processed. Bitmapped font downloads are disabled in this mode.
(EV) Empty Sensor Level – This command sets threshold value for the “Empty”
media sensor parameter.
(FA) Format Attribute – See the “An” command for details (Label Formatting
Command Functions).
(FB) Scalable Font Bolding – This command sets a bolding factor to fine tune
scalable fonts, where one causes the least amount of bolding and thirty-six the most
(default value is 8).
(FE) Font Emulation –This command allows font substitution for all internal fonts,
allowing a new default font to be defined without changing the host DPL data
streams. Selecting a default font that supports a desired character set could match
with third party software to print native characters without modifying the PC drivers.
In other words, match the PC font with the Printer Font then no interpretation would
be required by driver or printer. Depending on host drivers, the user may have to
disable Symbol Set commands and modify the Default Symbol set.
63
Extended System-Level Command Functions
(FH) Fault Handling – This command determines the level of user intervention and
the disposition of the label being printed when a fault condition (ribbon out, media
out, etc.) occurs.
Value
Units /
Interpretation
Selection / Definition
0 = No Reprint
Printing stops and a fault message is displayed. After the
problem is corrected, the FEED Key must be pressed to
clear the fault. The label in process is not reprinted.
1 = Standard
Printing stops and a fault message is displayed. After the
problem is corrected, the FEED Key must be pressed to
clear the fault. The label in process is reprinted.
Depending upon the RETRY COUNT, one of the following
actions when faulted:
• If the Retry Count has not been exceeded, “VOID” is
printed on the label in process and reprinting occurs
automatically;
• If the Retry Count has been exceeded, printing stops and
L
2 = Void and
Retry
a fault message is displayed. After the problem is
corrected, the FEED Key must be pressed to clear the
fault. The label in process is reprinted; or,
• If the CANCEL Key is pressed, the operator now has the
option of canceling the reprint. To allow reprinting, press
the ESCAPE Key; or, to cancel reprinting, press the
ENTER Key (and, the entire label batch will be cancelled
by pressing the ENTER Key again).

VOID will not be printed when insufficient text space
exists (see VOID DISTANCE, below) or if the fault
occurs after the label reaches its Present Distance
at, or above, the TOF.
(continued)
64
Extended System-Level Command Functions
Value
Units /
Interpretation
Selection / Definition
Increases throughput when bar codes reside near the
trailing edge of the label (in the direction of FEED).

3 = Delayed
Scan Fault
• If unreadable, the fault will occur after the next
label prints.
• The label immediately following a faulted label is
not scanned for errors.
L
• VOID AND RETRY and REPRINT are automatically
disabled; the job can only be cancelled.
4 = Void Retry
& Cont.
VOID is printed on a faulted label, with reprint attempts
occurring automatically, until the RETRY COUNT has been
exceeded and then that label will be skipped (discarded)
and printing will continue to the next label in queue.
D
Void Distance
(.10 - 2.00)
Sets the distance (.10 - 2.00) to backup the faulted label to
print “VOID” on its trailing edge, which also indirectly
establishes the font size of the void message.
R
Retry Count
(0 – 3)
Establishes the number of times a reprint will be attempted
when using the RFID or Scanner option; if the last label
printed in this count has been voided, a fault will be
declared.
B
Enable / Disable
Y, N
Retract from presented distance prior to feed-clear motion.
This option is intended for use with applicator equipment
that may require certain GPIO signals for proper operation.
Example: <STX>KcFHD112<CR>
The example above configures the printer to back up and print a one-inch tall “VOID”
message on a faulted label; if two successive faults occur during the printing of that
label, then the FEED Key must be pressed to clear the fault.
(FM) Feedback Mode – See <STX>a for command details.
(FS) Slew Speed - This command controls the rate of label movement between
printing areas when the GPIO port is used; see Appendix L for ranges.
(GA) Alternate Gap Type – This command selects one of two Gap Sensing
algorithms. This parameter is valid for the RL3 / RL4 when Sensor Type is set to
Gap. Defaults to Disabled or Alternate not selected.
(GD) Display Mode – This command controls the size of displayed menu
characters, where Enhanced makes them larger.
65
Extended System-Level Command Functions
(GE) GPIO Equipped – This command is used to interface the printer to external
controlling devices (see Appendix J):
Value
Units /
Interpretation
A
Applicator
N
Disabled
V
Verifier
2
Applicator2
GPIO Enable Definition
Enables the standard applicator mode, de-asserting DRDY
as soon as last label starts printing, allowing FEED any
time, and not de-asserting DRDY when PAUSED.
Disables the GPIO Port.
Enables the GPIO Port for a bar code verifier.
Enables the alternate applicator mode, where Data Ready
(DRDY) is extended to overlap the End Of Print (EOP) signal
by about 1 msec when printing the last label; and, where
PAUSE or FAULT de-asserts the DRDY signal and inhibits
the FEED operation.
(GM) Gap / Mark Value – This command sets threshold value for the media
sensor’s “gap” or “mark” parameter.
(GP) GPIO Error Pause – This command enables or disables the printer from
sending a service required fault to the GPIO output (Applicator Interface CCA, Type 2
only).
(GR) Gain Reflective Value – This command sets the sensitivity of the reflective
media sensor.
(GS) GPIO Slew – This command sets the GPIO slew function and control:
Value
Slew Interpretation
0
Standard (Active Low)
1
Low Pulse *
2
High Pulse *
3
Slews while low (Active Low)
4
Slews while high (Active High)
* Pulse must be at least 60 milliseconds in length; functions as if pressing the Feed Key,
clearing alarms and advancing media.
66
Extended System-Level Command Functions
(HC) Head Cleaning – This command controls the print head cleaning routine. The
entered value specifies the inch (or centimeter) count to reach before prompting a
print head cleaning. If the number specified is exceeded three times, the printer will
fault until cleaning is initiated.

The number specified is multiplied by one thousand, and zero disables this function.
(HE) Heat – See Hnn for command details.
(HT) Host Timeout – This command controls the number of seconds a
communications port must be idle before the printer will process data from a
different port or use a different parsing method. The value is also used to “timeout”
an image / label format download (i.e., if, at any time, data flow stops before a
complete label format is received, the data will be ignored).
(IC) Ignore Control Codes – This command allows the user to remove control
codes (< 20 Hex) in the data field. The selected line terminator is processed. When
enabled, DPL Control Code (SOH, STX, CR, ESC, and ^) characters are removed
from the data string. (Note that some fonts do have printable characters in this
range and they will not be printed when enabled.)
(IE) Ignore Distances – This command, when enabled, prevents <STX>O
processing that will change the start of print position.
67
Extended System-Level Command Functions
(IL) Imaging Mode – This command instructs the printer whether to pre-image the
label format:
Value
M
S
Units /
Interpretation
Imaging Mode Definition
Multiple Label
The printer images multiple labels as memory
permits, achieving the fastest throughput; however,
if time-stamping, the time will reflect the moment
the label is imaged rather than when actually
printed.
Single Label
The printer images the next label only after the
previous label has been successfully printed. Single
processing provides time-stamps that are more
accurate, but it slows label throughput time.
(IM) Internal Module – This command sets the number of 1K blocks allocated for
Module D.
(LE) Legacy Emulation – This command enables the <STX>O and <STX>f print
positioning commands to allow backward compatibility with label formats that were
designed for the Allegro® Prodigy®, and Prodigy Plus® (If the printer is DisplayEquipped, also Prodigy Max® emulation).

Use causes the printer to ignore Label commands A, M, n, and T.
(LR) Label Rotation – This command sets label rotation, allowing formats to be
flipped 180 degrees.
(LS) Language Select – This command selects the language for the menu system
messages and configuration label. Only languages that are resident will be available.

Language name limited to a twenty character maximum.
(LM) Label Store – This command selects the level of stored format recall to
include the label-formatting command fields, or the label-formatting command fields
and the printer state.
68
Extended System-Level Command Functions
(LW) Label Width – This command sets the maximum limit for the printable width.
Objects extending beyond this limit will NOT print; see Appendix K.
(MCC) Module Command – This command adjusts the size of Flash module on the
optional Expansion Card according to the table below (see Appendix K for
appropriate module details):
Value
Module Command Units / Interpretation
Zxx
Where xx =
Size: 1 – 7 Mbytes. This is the amount to be allocated to
Module Z; any remaining memory will be allocated to Module F.
Gxx
Where xx =
Size: 1 – 56, in 128 Kbytes blocks. This is the amount to be
allocated to Module G; any remaining memory will be allocated
to Module X.
(ML) Maximum (Label) Length – See <STX>M for command details.
(MM) Menu Mode – This command sets the menu access level of the printer –
where User is a basic listing of menu settings and controls.
(MT) Media Type – This command selects the printing method: Direct Thermal for
use with heat sensitive media or Thermal Transfer for use with media requiring a
ribbon to create an image.
(MV) Mark Value – This command sets threshold value for the reflective media
sensor’s “mark” parameter.
69
Extended System-Level Command Functions
(NE) Network Configuration – The enhanced configuration two character
identifier for the New Network Configuration Parameters will be ‘NE’ for Network
Ethernet. No Item-Value pairs will be defined for ‘NE’ but there will be the following
Sub-Groups:
General Network Configuration Parameters – Identifier ‘G’
802.3 Wired Ethernet Configuration Parameters – Identifier ‘EW’
802.11 Wireless Ethernet (WIFI) Configuration Parameters – Identifier
‘WIFI[DO1’
The configuration data stream for the new network configuration parameters will thus have
the following structure:
NE[G[…]EW[…]WIFI[DO1[…]]];
Example :
"KcNE[G[24,4:]WIFI[DO1[21,N:22,'192.168.081.001':23,'255.255.000.000':24,'
192.168.081.004':40,P:41,'MFG_ENG_S2':42,2:47,'1234567890':]]];"
General Configuration Parameters – Identifier ‘G’
The ‘G’ sub-group contains network configuration parameters that apply ‘globally’
or ‘generally’ to any ethernet interface used. No sub-groups are currently defined
for the ‘G’ sub-group of configuration parameters, only item-value pairs. The
‘Item-Value’ pairs within the ‘G’ sub-group are defined by the following table:
#
1
Name
Primary Interface
Value Type
Char
2
Network Password
String
3
4
5
6
SNMP Enable
Telnet Enable
FTP Enable
HTTP Enable
Boolean
Boolean
Boolean
Boolean
7
LPD Enable
Boolean
8
9
10
NetBIOS Enable
Netcenter Enable
Gratuitous ARP Period
Boolean
Boolean
Decimal
24
WIFI Type
Decimal
70
Description
Indicates the primary or used ethernet
interface type. Interface types are Wired
Ethernet (802.3) and Wireless Ethernet
(802.11). It is called ‘Primary’ since, in the
future if multiple ethernet interfaces would
be supported, it would be the PRIMARY
interface used.
‘E’=Wired Ethernet
‘W’=WIFI
‘B’=Bluetooth
‘N’=None
Provides the network password used for
WEB and TELNET sessions.
Enables or Disables the SNMP services.
Enables or Disables the TELNET services.
Enables or Disables the FTP Server.
Enables or Disables the HTTP (WEB Pages)
Server.
Enables or Disables the LPD (Line Printer
Daemon) services.
Enables or Disables the NetBIOS services.
Enables or Disables the Netcenter services.
Value of the Gratuitous ARP Period in
seconds. 0 = Disabled.
WIFI Module type DO1=4. Values are 0
– none or 4. Values 1,2 &3 are legacy
values.
Extended System-Level Command Functions
802.3 – Wired Ethernet Configuration Parameters – Identifier ‘EW’
The ‘WE’ sub-group contains network configuration parameters that apply only to
the Wired Ethernet (802.3 Specification) ethernet interface. No sub-groups are
currently defined for the ‘WE’ sub-group of configuration parameters, only itemvalue pairs. The ‘Item-Value’ pairs within the ‘WE’ sub-group are defined by the
following table:
#
Name
Value
Type
Char
1
DHCP Enable
2
5
Static Printer IP
Address
Static Printer Subnet
Mask
Static Printer Default
Gateway or Router
PHY Mode
Decimal
9
Printer TCP Port
Decimal
3
4
11
String
String
String
15
Static Primary WINS
Server IP Address
Static Secondary WINS
Server IP Address
Static Primary DNS
Server IP Address
Static Secondary DNS
Server IP Address
SNMP TRAP IP Address
String
16
SNMP Server Address
String
17
18
20
NetBIOS Enable
NetBIOS Name
UDP Port
21
Inactivity Timeout
Value
22
MAC Address (Read
Only)
String
12
13
14
String
String
String
String
Boolean
String
String
71
Description
Indicates if the DHCP Protocol is to be used
to automatically obtain all required network
addresses. Formally known as IP
Discovery.
‘N’=Static
‘B’=BootP
‘Y’=DHCP
Note: For Wired Ethernet BootP is
considered as same as DHCP.
Static IP Address for the Printer in dotted
decimal notation.
Static Subnet Mask for the Printer in dotted
decimal notation.
Static Default Gateway (Router) IP Address
in dotted decimal notation.
Defines the ethernet PHY Mode (Auto,
10BaseT HD, etc.)
Auto-Negotiate = 0
10BaseT Half Duplex = 1
10BaseT Full Duplex = 2
100BaseT Half Duplex = 3
100BaseT Full Duplex = 4
Value of the TCP Port for Print Services.
Stationarey Printers - Default is 9100;
Portable Printers – Default is 515
Static Primary WINS Server IP Address in
dotted decimal notation.
Static Secondary WINS Server IP Address
in dotted decimal notation.
Static Primary DNS Server IP Address in
dotted decimal notation.
Static Secondary DNS Server IP Address in
dotted decimal notation.
(future) SNMP TRAP IP Address in dotted
decimal notation.
(future) SNMP Server IP Address in dotted
decimal notation.
Enables or Disables the NetBIOS services.
NetBIOS Name for the Printer.
UDP Port number to use for printing;
default 515
Enter number of seconds of inactivity to
wait before disconnect
MAC address in ‘112233445566’ format
Extended System-Level Command Functions
802.11 – Wireless Ethernet - WIFI Configuration Parameters – Identifier
‘WIFI’
The ‘WIFI’ sub-group contains network configuration parameters that apply only
to the Wireless Ethernet (802.11 Specification) ethernet interface. Four (4) subgroups are currently defined for the ‘WIFI’ sub-group of configuration parameters
and are as follows:
DO Embedded – Identifier ‘DO1’
The previous subgroups which are not supported:
General WIFI Configuration Parameters – Identifier ‘G’
DPAC Version 1 – Identifier ‘DV1’
DPAC Version 2 (Veyron) – Identifier ‘DV2’
SILEX Version 1 – Identifier ‘SV1’
D-O Embedded WIFI Configuration Parameters – Identifier ‘DO1’
The ‘D01’ WIFI sub-group contains the configuration parameters that are specific
to the D-O WIFI solution that is based on the Green Hills / DeviceScape 802.11
software. The ‘Item-Value’ pairs within the ‘DO1’ sub-group of the ‘WIFI’ subgroup are defined by the following tables:
72
Extended System-Level Command Functions
DNS Settings
#
Ezprint
1
CTC:SDNS:Y|N
Name
Enable Static DNS
2
CTC:DNS1:***.***.***.***
Preferred DNS Server
3
CTC:DNS2:***.***.***.***
Secondary DNS Server
4
CTC:DSUF:<DNS Suffix>
DNS Suffix
Network Settings
#
Ezprint
20
CTC:I2:<value>
Name
Inactive Timeout
Value Type
String – 1
char long
IP4 string
format
IP4 string
format
String
Value Type
Unsigned
short
Unsigned
char
21
CTC:D:N|B|Y
IP address method
22
CTC:I:xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
Active IP address (READ ONLY)
String
23
CTC:M:xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
Active Subnet mask (READ
ONLY)
String
73
Description
Using Static DNS or not. Default value is “N”.
IP address for preferred DNS server
IP address for secondary DNS server
64 characters string + 1 NULL terminated character
Description
Current connection will terminated if no network traffic
after a specific interval. Default value is 30 seconds
N: use static IP address
B: BootB enable
Y:DHCP enable
This field is holding the value of the current active IP
address. As the result of the query request:
1. If “IP address method” is set to “use static IP
address”, this field will hold the value of “Static IP
address”.
2. Otherwise, it will hold the value of the current active
IP address.
This field is using for reporting only. In order to set the
value for static IP address, use item number 32.
This field is holding the value of current active Subnet mask
address.
As the result of the query request:
1. If “IP address method” is set to “use static Subnet
mask address”, this field will hold the value of “Static
Subnet mask address”.
2. Otherwise, it will hold the value of the current active
Subnet mask address.
This field is using for reporting only. In order to set the
value for static Subnet mask address, use item number 33.
Extended System-Level Command Functions
Network Settings
#
Ezprint
24
CTC:G:xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
Name
Active Gateway address (READ
ONLY)
Value Type
String
String
String- 1
char long
String – 1
char long
Unsigned
short
Unsigned
short
Unsigned
char
Binary Data
25
26
CTC:N:<value>
CTC:RDNS:Y|N
Printer DNS name
Register To DNS
27
CTC:UDNS:Y|N
Use DNS Suffix
28
CTC:P3:<value>
UDP port
29
CTC:P:<value>
TCP port
30
CTC:CR:N|Y
Enable Connection Status
31
CTC:DOP:<value>
DHCP User Class Option
32
Static IP Address
String
33
Static Subnet mask
String
34
Static Gateway
String
35
LPD Port
36
LPD Enable
Unsigned
short
Boolean
74
Description
This field is holding the value of current active Gateway
address.
As the result of the query request:
1. If “IP address method” is set to “use static Subnet
mask address”, this field will hold the value of “Static
Gateway address”.
2. Otherwise, it will hold the value of the current active
Gateway address.
This field is using for reporting only. In order to set the
value for static Gate address, use item number 34.
64 characters + 1 NULL terminated charater
Register Printer Name (~ Station Name) to DNS server.
Default value is “Y”
Using the DNS suffix for a fully qualification name when
referring to the DNS name. Default value is “N”
Default is 515
TCP port number. Default is 515
Y: enable of reporting connection status
N: disable of reporting connection status
This is the data for the User Class Option for DHCP. Max.
length is 257 bytes.
Printer statics IP address. Use this field to set or get the
value of printer static IP address.
Printer statics Subnetmask address. Use this field to set or
get the value of printer static Subnet mask address.
Printer static gateway address. Use this field to set or get
the value of printer static Gateway address.
Default 515
Enables or Disables the LPD (Line Printer Daemon) services.
Extended System-Level Command Functions
WIFI Settings
#
Ezprint
40
CTC:T:H|P
Name
Network Type
Value Type
Unsigned
char
String
Enumeratio
n type or
unsigned
short
41
42
CTC:E:<value>
CTC:NA:<value>
ESSID
Network Authentication Type
43
CTC:ET:<value>
EAP Type
Unsigned
char
44
CTC:P2M:<value>
Phase 2 Method
Unsigned
char
45
CTC:LU:<value>
User Name
String
46
CTC:LH:<value>
User Password
String
47
CTC:LU2:<value>
Pass Phrase
String
48
CTC:W:1|2
WEP data encryption
49
CTC:S:0|5|13
WEP AP authentication
Unsigned
char
Unsigned
char
50
CTC:K:1|2|3|4
WEP Key Selected
Unsigned
char
75
Description
H: AdHoc
P:Infrastructure
128 characters + 1 NULL terminated string
NET_AUTH_TYPE_NONE =0
NET_AUTH_TYPE_LEAP=1
NET_AUTH_TYPE_WPA_PSK=2 (WPA Personal)
NET_AUTH_TYPE_WPA=3 (WPA Enterprise)
NET_AUTH_TYPE_WPA_LEAP = 4 (obsolete)
NET_AUTH_TYPE_WPA2_PSK=5 (WPA2 Personal)
NET_AUTH_TYPE_WPA2=6 (WPA2 Enterprise)
NET_AUTH_TYPE_HOST_BASED_EAP=7
EAP-LEAP (17)
EAP-TTLS (21)
EAP-PEAP (25)
EAP-FAST (43)
Inner authentication:
0: None
EAP-GTC: 1 (Default)
EAP-MSCHAPV2: 2
EAP-MD5: 3
GTC: 4
MSCHAPV2: 5
MSCHAP: 6
CHAP: 7
EAP-TLS: 8
128 characters + 1 NULL terminated char; Write ONLY
attribute!
128 characters + 1 NULL terminated char; Write ONLY
attribute!
63 characters + 1 NULL terminated char; Write ONLY
attribute!
1: Enable WEP data encryption
2: Allow WEP unencrypted traffic (Default)
Indicate the AP authentication method via WEP. The value
specifies the WEP key length.
0: Open
5: uses Shared Key 40- bit WEP key
13: uses Shared Key 128-bit WEP key
Indicates which WEP key is currently selected for WEP AP
authentication, if specify.
Extended System-Level Command Functions
WIFI Settings
#
Ezprint
51
CTC:K1:<key value>
WEP Key1
Name
Value Type
String
52
CTC:K2:<key value>
WEP Key2
String
53
CTC:K3:<key value>
WEP Key3
String
54
CTC:K4:<key value>
WEP Key4
String
55
CTC:Q:Y|N
Show Signal Strength
56
CTC:P2:Y|N
Power Saving Mode
57
CTC:GC:
Group Cipher
Unsigned
char
Unsigned
char
Unsigned
short
String
58
MAC Address
59
Regulatory Domain
60
Radio Physical Mode
61
LPD Enable
Unsigned
short
Unsigned
char
Boolean
76
Description
10 hexadecimal for 40-bit WEP key or 26 hexadecimal for
128-bit WEP key. Upon on the returning from query, this
field will contains “0”, ”5”, or “13” to specify the length of
WEP key.
10 hexadecimal for 40-bit WEP key or 26 hexadecimal for
128-bit WEP key. Upon on the returning from query, this
field will contains “0”, ”5”, or “13” to specify the length of
WEP key.
10 hexadecimal for 40-bit WEP key or 26 hexadecimal for
128-bit WEP key. Upon on the returning from query, this
field will contains “0”, ”5”, or “13” to specify the length of
WEP key.
10 hexadecimal for 40-bit WEP key or 26 hexadecimal for
128-bit WEP key. Upon on the returning from query, this
field will contains “0”, ”5”, or “13” to specify the length of
WEP key.
Y: Show signal strength
N: Do not show signal strength (Default)
Y: enable Power Save Mode (Default)
N: disable Power Save Mode
For now, it sets as 4 as SWC_CIPHER_WEP104
MAC address of the Radio Module, String in format
“XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX”
Regulatory Domain Country Code for International Setting;
Default = 0 (World Wide Roaming), per ISO 3166
1: 802.11 a only
2: 802.11 b/g
3: 802.11 a/b/g
4: 802.11 b only
5: 802.11 g only
Enables or Disables the LPD (Line Printer Daemon) services.
Extended System-Level Command Functions
(NR) No Reprint – This command controls the label reprint function following the
correction of a fault condition. Upon detection of a fault (ribbon out, paper out, etc.),
printing stops and a fault indicator is illuminated. After the problem is corrected, the
FEED Key must be pressed to clear the fault and resume normal operation. When
enabled, the label in process is not reprinted.
(NS) Disable Symbol Set Selection – This command prevents the <STX>y and y
commands from changing the default single-byte symbol set. When enabled, DPL
Symbol Set commands are ignored.

When enabled, the only way to change the current symbol set is with the <STX>KcAS
command.
(OF) Option Feedback Mode – This command configures the printer to output the
status of the RFID or Scanner option to the active port, as follows.
Value
Option Feedback Mode Units / Interpretation
D
D, Rx, S
=
Rx =
S
=
Disable
RFID Enable, where x is the response format:
A = ASCII
H = Hexadecimal
Scanner Enable
Once enabled, the printer will report information about the results of the last label
printed. One response per label is returned to the host (this includes each voided and
retried label). The format and contents of the returned information is as follows:
77
Extended System-Level Command Functions
Response format: <A;B;C;D;E;F>[CR]
Where:
A
- Device type:
R = RFID
S = Scanner
B
- Resulting status:
C = entire label complete
F = faulted (failed) label
U = unknown
C
- The number of expected reads for bar codes or tags,
given in two characters.
D
- The number of good reads for bar codes or tags, given in
two characters.
E
- The printer’s internal Job Identifier and Sub Job
Identifier, given in four characters each.
F
- The data read, delimited with semicolons (;) if multiple
reads.
RFID response sample differences: Since RFID commands vary in operation, the
data returned also differs. Write commands return entire tag data; Write/Verify
commands return the data written; and, Read commands return data and length
requested in the specified format. (See Appendix S for a listing of commands.)
Write response example:
<R;C;00;00;0013:0001>[CR]
Write/Verify hexadecimal response example:
<R;C;01;01;0012:0001;446174616D61782077726974657320524649442062657374>
[CR]
Read hexadecimal response example:
<R;C;01;01;0013:0001;446174616D61782077726974657320524649442062657374>
[CR]
Write/Verify ASCII response example:
<R;C;01;01;0012:0001; Datamax writes RFID best >[CR]
Read ASCII response example:
<R;C;01;01;0013:0001; Datamax writes RFID best >[CR]
Scanner response samples:
A successfully read label example:
<S;C;03;03;0002:0001;DATA1;DATA2;DATA3>[CR]
A failed label, successfully retried:
<S;F;02;01;0002:0001;DATA1>[CR]
<S;C;02;02;0002:0001;DATA1;DATA2>[CR]
78
Extended System-Level Command Functions
(PC) Print Contrast – This command adjusts the relative print edge (gray)
component of the print quality, which allows fine-tuning for specific media/ribbon
mix.
(PD) Present Distance – This command sets the label stop position past the start
of print. When the next label format is received, the printer will automatically
backfeed to the start position. If the present distance is set to zero, the printer will
operate without reversing. (See Stop Location, below).
(PE) Peel Mode – This command, when enabled, specifies that a Feed operation be
prevented when the label is presented and not removed, or if the printer is to wait
for the GPIO start of print signal.
(PJ) Present Adjust Fine Tune – This command fine-tunes the Present Distance
setting in dots to compensate for slight mechanical differences sometimes evident if
multiple printers share label formats.
(PL) Printer Level – This command is used to upgrade the software feature level of
the printer.
(PM) Pause Mode – See <STX>J for command details.
79
Extended System-Level Command Functions
(PO) Paper Empty – This command sets the length of travel before an out of stock
condition is declared.
(PP) Parallel Direction – This command controls the parallel port communications
settings:
Value
Parallel Direction Units / Interpretation
x = Port ID
xz
z = Direction: U (unidirectional – one-way communication); or,
B (bidirectional – IEEE 1284 back-channel operation).
(PS) Present Sensor Equipped – This command allows the printer to sense the
present sensor option. A (or Y) - automatically senses device presence; if
undetected, no error will be generated. E - enables the device, where its presence
must be detected; otherwise, a fault is generated. N or D - disables device detection.
See <STX>V for command details.
(pS) Print Speed – See Label Formatting Command Function P for details.
(PT) Tear Position – This command sets the label stopping location at the tear
plate on the printer’s cover.
80
Extended System-Level Command Functions
(PV) Paper Value – This command sets threshold value for the media sensor’s
“paper” parameter.
(PW) Password Set – This command modifies the numeric password required to
access the menu when security is enabled. If security is enabled, enter the new
password followed by the old password (with no spaces) in this form: XXXXXXXX

To be activated, the default password (0000) must be changed.
(QQ) Configuration Query – This command requires a parameter of either K or Q.
K causes the printer to respond with the Printer Key, used for generating Upgrade
Codes. A parameter value of Q causes the printer to respond with the current
configuration settings. The <STX>Kc response command stream format is sent to the
host computer via the same port as the query containing all parameters controlled
by the <STX>Kc command, and may be used for restoring the printer’s configuration
or for configuring other printers.
(RE) Ribbon Saver Equipped – This command allows the printer to sense the
ribbon saver option. A (or Y) - automatically senses device presence; if undetected,
no error is generated. E - enables the device, where its presence must be detected;
otherwise, a fault is generated. N or D - disables device detection. See <STX>R for
command details.
(RF) Row Adjust Fine Tune – This command shifts the vertical start of print
position in dots (see Appendix K) upward or downward.
81
Extended System-Level Command Functions
(RI) RFID Configuration – This command configures the optional RFID interface module, as follows:
Value
Units / Interpretation
AIhh
where hh:
2-Chararacter Hex ID
ALn
and where n:
E = Enable,
D = Disable
RFID Configuration Definition / Function
Sets the Application Family Identifier (AFI), HF only.
Allows locking the AFI after writing (HF only).
Disables padding or truncating of data (EPC only).
D = Disable
Bn
where n:

Nulls are represented as “00”.
For Hex EPC data a 96-bit tag size is 24 characters and 64-bit is 16.
For ASCII EPC data a 96-bit tag size is 12 characters and 64-bit is 8.
1 = Leading
If the data is less than the selected EPC tag data size, nulls will be added to the
front (left); or, if too much data is given, the data will be cut.
2 = Trailing
If the data is less than the selected EPC tag data size, nulls will be added to the
back (right); or, if too much data is given, the data will be cut.
DIhh
where hh:
2-Chararacter Hex ID
DLn
and where n:
E = Enable,
D = Disable
Allows locking the DSFID after writing (HF only).
En
where n:
E = Enable,
D = Disable
Allows erasures of the tag on error (HF only).
Lhh
where hh:
2-Chararacter Hex ID
D = Disable
Mn
where n:
H = HF
Sets the Data Storage Format Identifier (DSFID), HF only.
Sets the Lock Code (Alien UHF only).
Disables the RFID module. (“N” is also a valid disabler.)
Enables the RFID module for HF (Securakey).
U = UHF
Enables the RFID module for UHF Class 1 (Alien).
M = UHF
Enables the RFID module for UHF Multiprotocol.
(continued)
82
Extended System-Level Command Functions
Value
Units / Interpretation
RFID Configuration Definition / Function
Nn
where n:
64 = 64-bit
96 = 96-bit
Pxxx
where xxx:
3-Digit Value
Rn
where n:
0–9
Shh
where hh:
2-Chararacter Hex ID
Sets the Electronic Article Surveillance (EAS) set, representing the
manufacturer’s code (HF only).
where n:
0
1
2
3
4
=
=
=
=
=
ISO 15693,
Texas Instruments,
Philips,
ST Micro LRI 512,
ST Micro LRI 64
Establishes the tag type (HF only).
Un
where n:
0
1
2
3
6
7
8
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
EPC 0
EPC 0+ Matrics
EPC 0+ Impinj
EPC 1
UCODE EPC 1.19
EM 4022/4222
Gen 2
Sets the UHF tag type (Multiprotocol UHF only).
Vn
where n:
-4 to +4
Wn
where n:
E = Enable,
D = Disable
Tn
Sets the UHF tag data size (Multiprotocol UHF only).
Sets the tag encoding position: A value of 0.00 causes the print position to be
used; or, a value greater than 0 causes the presented position to be used.
(Subject to change.)
Sets the number of retries for RFID functions.
Adjusts the power, in dBmn (Multiprotocol UHF only).
Allows locking the tag after writing.
Example: <STX>KcRIMH;RIA11E;RID22E;RIS04;RIR3;RIWE;RIEE;RIP000<CR>
The above example sets the printer to HF, protect after write AFI 11, protect after write DFSID 22, set EAS Bit (Mfg. Code
0x04), allow 3 tries for each read or write attempt, lock after writing, erase the tag if there is an error, and use a position of
0.00.
83
Extended System-Level Command Functions
(RL) Ribbon Low Diameter – This command sets the threshold for a low ribbon
indication, where nnnn is the diameter in hundredths of inches.
(RM) Rewinder Equipped – This command allows the printer to sense the powered
internal rewind option. A (or Y) - automatically senses device presence; if
undetected, no error is generated. E - enables the device, where its presence must
be detected; otherwise, a fault is generated. N or D - disables device detection.
(RO) Row Offset – See Rnnnn (in Label Formatting Command Functions) for
command details.
(RP) Ribbon Low Pause - This command (when enabled) pauses the printer when
a Ribbon Low Diameter warning is declared; the PAUSE Button must be pressed to
continue printing.
(RR) Rewinder Adjust – This command changes the torque applied by the
powered rewinder, in percentage points of the nominal force, to minimize TOF
registration drift (sometimes evident when using small or narrow media).
(RS) Ribbon Low Signal – This command sets the signal output type for the
Ribbon Low Diameter condition when using the optional GPIO (see Appendix J).
(RV) Reflective Paper Value – This command sets the threshold value for the
reflective media sensor’s paper parameter.
(RW) Retract Delay – This command sets a time delay for the retraction of a
presented label, where the time specified is multiplied by ten milliseconds.
84
Extended System-Level Command Functions
(SA) SOP Adjust – This command sets the start of print (SOP) location, relative to
the top of form. See <STX>O for command details. The EX2 accepts this command for
backward compatibility only, limited in range (28-228).
(SC) Scalable Cache – This command sets the number of 1K blocks allocated for
the scaleable font engine. Available memory dependent upon model; see Appendix
K.
(SE) SOP Emulation – This command enables the <STX>O and <STX>f print
positioning commands to allow backward compatibility with label formats designed
for other printers.
(SF) Save As Filename – This command, which may be sent separately or included
as the last command in an <STX>Kc command string, saves the effective printer
configuration to a file in Flash memory with a .dcm file extension.
(SG) Sensor Gain Value – This command sets the control of the voltage to the LED
emitter of the Media Sensor.
85
Extended System-Level Command Functions
(Sl) Security Lock – This command provides the ability to password-protect the
User Interface, as follows:
Value
Security Function
Nxxxx
Where xxxx is the current password, this disables Menu protection.
Yxxxx
Where xxxx is a new password, this enables Menu protection and sets a new
password.
Txxxx
Where xxxx is a new password, this enables Menu protection, disables Test
functions, and sets a new password.

To be activated, the default password (0000) must be changed.
(SL) Stop Location – This command sets the label stopping (and in certain cases
the starting) location, as follows:
Value
Stop Location
A
Automatically sets the stop location. Installed options will be “auto-sensed”
and the appropriate stop position will automatically be set. Host commands
are ignored.
H
Sets stop position according to options installed. If no options are installed the
printer sets stop location to the next label’s start of print. Host commands will
override. The stop location (present distance) may be controlled dynamically
by the host using the <STX>f or <STX>Kf commands. This selection has the
same effect as <STX>KD Ignore Host Distance bit value 0.
P
Sets the stop location at approximately two millimeters behind the peel bar
edge, a nominal peel position. The Present Sensor status and this setting are
independent.
C
Sets the stop location to a nominal cut position. For die-cut media, the
position is just following the end of the label. The cutter status and this setting
are independent.
T
Sets the stop location at the tear bar.
N
Sets the stop location to the start of the next label, equivalent to setting the
<STX>KD Ignore Host Distance bit value 1.
86
Extended System-Level Command Functions
(SM) Maximum (Label) Length Ignore – This command controls recognition of
the <STX>M command.
(SN) Scanner Configuration – This command configures the linear scanner, as
follows:
Values
Scanner Configuration Range / Interpretation
Bar Code Type – Specifies the bar code, using two digits, followed by “Y” (to
enable) or “N” (to disable) the code, where:
B
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14

=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
CODE 39
IATA
CODABAR
INTERLEAVED 2 OF 5
INDUSTRIAL 2 OF 5
CODE 93
CODE 128
MSI/PLESSEY
EAN(13/8)
EAN(13/8)+2
EAN(13/8)+5
UPC(A/E)
UPC(A/E)+2
UPC(A/E)+5
To maximize throughput and decoding integrity, enable only those
symbologies that will be read.
Bar Code Count – Specifies the number of codes to be read, where:
00 – 99 (00 = Auto [variable] mode, counting those codes present)
C

Do not use Auto Mode with bitmapped codes or codes with certain
addendums; see Appendix F.
Min Readable Height – Sets the vertical distance of the code that must have
identical reads to pass, where:
H
1
2
3
4
5
0

=
=
=
=
=
=
1/16
2/16
3/16
1/4
1/2
Disabled (defaults to Redundancy Level, 2x)
The specified distance should not exceed 50% of the measured bar
code height.
Mode – Enables detection of the scanner by the printer, where:
M
A = Auto (automatically senses presence); Y is also a valid enabler.
E = Enabled (if not detected a fault is generated).
D = Disabled (the scanner is disabled); (N is also a valid disabler.)
(continued)
87
Extended System-Level Command Functions
Values
Scanner Configuration Range / Interpretation
Redundancy Level – An alternative data integrity method, where the selected
level sets the number of consecutive, identical decodes required to pass the
bar code. If differing values are read, the count is restarted, where:
V
0 = Auto Mode
1 = read code 1X
2 = read code 2X
3 = read code 3X
4 = read code 4X
5 = read code 5X
6 = read code 6X
7 = read code 8X
8 = read code 10X
9 = read code 12X
A = read code 15X
B = read code 20X
C = read code 25X
D = read code 30X
E = read code 35X
F = read code 40X
G = read code 45X

Depending upon the print speed, higher Redundancy Levels may
cause erroneous failures when scanning multiple or small bar codes.
Example: <STX>KcSNC00H4MAB12YV0<CR>
The example above sets the printer to sense the scanner automatically, to read a
variable number of UPC bar codes, and to pass only those codes where a ¼ inch
zone has identical reads.
88
Extended System-Level Command Functions
(SP) Serial Port – This command configures the serial communication port(s) as
follows:
Value
xyz
Serial Port Range / Interpretation
Where:
x = Port Identifier:
A - Serial A
y = Function:
P - Handshaking
Protocol
B - Serial B
z = Setting
B - both
H - hardware
N - none
S – software
p - Parity
E - even
N - none
O – odd
D - Data Length
7 - eight bits
8 - seven bits
S - Stop Bits
1 - one bit
2 - two bits
xyzz
Where:
x = Port Identifier:
A - Serial A
y = Function:
B - Baud Rate
B - Serial B
zz = Setting:
12 - 1200
24 - 2400
48 - 4800
96 - 9600
19 - 19200
28 - 28800
38 - 38400
57 - 57600
15 - 115200
Example: <STX>KcSPAPB;SPApN;SPAD8;SPAS1;SPAB19<CR>
The example above configures Serial Port A to use hardware and software
handshaking, an eight-bit word, with no parity and one stop bit at 19,200 bits per
second.
89
Extended System-Level Command Functions
(SS or sS) Feed Speed – This command controls the rate of label movement
between printing areas; see Appendix L.
(ST) Sensor Type – G for edge / gap, R for (reflective / black mark) or C for
continuous.
(SV) Switch Settings – This command controls recognition of the software switch
setting command <STX>V.
(TB) TOF Bias – This command controls the low-level voltage difference level to
recognize a label “gap” or “mark”.
(TD) TOF Delta – This command controls the low-level voltage difference level to
recognize a label “gap” or “mark”.
(TG) TOF Gain – This command controls the voltage to the LED emitter of the
Media Sensor.
(TN) No Paper Min – This command sets the media sensor level for the Out of
Stock (OOS) condition.
(TP) TOF Precedence – This command instructs the firmware to stop printing at
the first top of form mark it detects. The default (“No”) prints all of the data
(traversing the top of form as necessary) then slews to the next TOF.
90
Extended System-Level Command Functions
(UD) User Label Mode – This command places the printer in standalone operation,
which provides menu-driven processes to print user defined files, including .dlb,
.dpl, .prn, .txt formats.
(UM) Units of Measure – See <STX>m (metric) or <STX>n (imperial) for command
details.
(UN) Plug and Play ID Type – This command controls the type of Plug and Play ID
supplied; where Y is for unique and N for static.
(UT) User Terminator – This command allows word wrapping of long character
strings of commands to the next line in a file, for the purposes of readability only. In
the <STX>Kc string, the command UTON must fall somewhere before the first line
terminator. The last command needs to be END, followed by a line terminator (see
the <STX>KcEN command for details).
(VE) Verifier Equipped – This command enables the GPIO for a bar code verifier
(see Appendix J). A (or Y) - automatically senses device presence; if undetected, no
error is generated. E - enables the device, where its presence must be detected;
otherwise, a fault is generated. N or D - disables device detection.
(VT) Verifier Type – This command is reserved for future use.
91
Extended System-Level Command Functions
STX KD
Database Configuration
This command, stored in Flash memory for future power-ups, controls the printer’s
environment and operates as a pseudo DIP switch. The <STX>Kc command is
recommended for use over <STX>KD.
Syntax:
<STX>KDwxyz<CR>
Where:
w, x, y, and z are binary values with respective bit settings as
defined in the following table. (Bit 0 is least significant.)
Sample:
<STX>[email protected]@@<CR>
The sample above configures 9600 baud, 8-bit words, no parity,
with direct thermal printing, gap sensing, standard control
characters, and a cutter.

• Ignore Host Distance (see below) disregards <STX>O and <STX>f commands (in case
host software sends values that may be inappropriate). Use the <STX>KD command or
the Setup Menu to enable this feature.
<STX>KD
Parameter
Bit
Number
0–2
w
3
4&5
6
7
0
1
2
3
x
4
5
6
7
0&1
2
y
3–5
6
7
0&1
2
z
3–5
6
7
[1]
Selects the values of
Function
Value(s)
0 = 9600, 1 = 600, 2 = 2400,
3 = 19200, 4 = 4800, 5 = 38400,
6 = 1200, 7 = 9600 Test Mode
0 = 8 bits, no parity;
Word Length and Parity
1 = 7 bits, even parity
Unused
Set to 0
Always 1
Set to 1
Always 0
Set to 0
Print Method
0 = direct thermal, 1 = thermal transfer
Present Sensor
0 = not equipped, 1 = equipped
Control Character[1]
0 = standard, 1 = Alternate characters
Cutter
0 = disabled, 1 = enabled
0 = disabled,
Ignore Host Distance
1 = enabled (see note above)
0 = disabled,
[1]
Alt-2 Control Codes
1 = Alternate-2 characters
Always 1
Set to 1
Always 0
Set to 0
Sensor Type
0 = gap, 1 = reflective, 2 = continuous
Linerless
0 = not equipped, 1 = equipped
Unused
Set to 0
Always 1
Set to 1
Always 0
Set to 0
Reserved
Set to 0
Reserved
Set to 0
Unused
Set to 0
Always 1
Set to 1
Always 0
Set to 0
the control characters; see Control Code Command Functions.
BAUD Rate / Set Test Mode
92
Extended System-Level Command Functions
STX Kd
Set File as Factory Default
This command selects the specified file name as the “factory default” configuration. After
execution, subsequent “Select Factory Default” commands will configure the printer to
this file’s configuration using one of the following methods:
•
<STX>KF command;
•
Power-up the printer while pressing the PAUSE and CANCEL Keys; or,
•
Via the menu SYSTEM SETTINGS / SET FACTORY DEFAULTS entry.
Syntax:
<STX>KdName<CR>
Where:
Name
- The name, up to 16 characters, of the file.
<CR>
- 0x0d terminates the name.
Sample:
<STX>KdPlant1<CR>
The sample above selects the configuration file Plant1 as the
default factory configuration.
STX KE
Character Encoding
This command is provided primarily as a means for users of 7-bit communication and to
embed control characters and extended ASCII characters in their data streams. Any
character in the DPL data stream may be substituted with a delimited two-character
ASCII hexadecimal numeric equivalent. The command allows the delimiting character to
be selected, and the encoding to be enabled or disabled. When character encoding is
enabled, the printer will decode any ASCII hexadecimal numeric pairs following the
delimiter as single-byte values. Character encoding is used where control characters
cannot be transmitted or where control characters within data may prematurely
terminate a label format record. Although the delimiter may be changed at any time
(except within a label format definition), there cannot be more than one defined
delimiter, and character encoding must be disabled with <STX>KEN prior to re-enabling
regardless of any change in the delimiter.
Syntax:
<STX>KEex<CR>
Where:
e
- Y – character encoding enabled
N – character encoding disabled
x
- Delimiter: one ASCII character (Do not include when e = N)
Sample:
<STX>KEN
<STX>KEY\
<STX>L<CR>
1u0000001200120[)>\1E\01\1D\...\04\<CR>
E<CR>
93
Extended System-Level Command Functions
The sample above disables, and then enables character encoding
with the backslash (\) as the delimiter. A UPS MaxiCode will be
formatted using a data string interpreted as follows: [)>RS01GS...
E
OT<CR> then formatting is terminated.
Character Encoding Syntax: This syntax requires at least two hexadecimal ASCII
digits (0-9, A-F) delimited by the character specified in the <STX>KE command. The
number of hexadecimal digits between the delimiter pair must be even; see notes below.
Syntax:
xaa[bbcc…nn]x
Where:
x
- One byte delimiter, 0 to ff16, leading and trailing.
aa
- 2 bytes, ASCII, hexadecimal encoded, range each
character – 0-9, A-F
bb
- 2 bytes, ASCII, hexadecimal encoded, range each
character – 0-9, A-F (optional)
cc
- 2 bytes, ASCII, hexadecimal encoded, range each
character – 0-9, A-F (optional)
nn
- 2 bytes, ASCII, hexadecimal encoded, range each byte –
0-9, A-F (optional)

• A delimiter pair with no ASCII hexadecimal pairs between (e.g., \\) will be
interpreted as one byte whose value is that of the delimiting character, allowing the
assigned delimiter to be interpreted as itself rather than as the delimiter.
• A delimited string that contains either a non-valid hexadecimal character (e.g., FX) or
an odd number of bytes will be treated as an illegal string and, therefore, not
correctly decoded.
Character Encoding Examples: In the following partial datastreams it is assumed that
character encoding is enabled and that the selected delimiter, a backslash (\), has been
transmitted to the printer (i.e., <STX>KEY\). In each example, the printer has not
received an unpaired delimiter prior the example.
Partial Sample Data Stream
Interpretation
AB\\CE
5 bytes AB\CE with values 4116, 4216, 5C16, 4316, 4416
\ABCDEF\
3 bytes with values AB16, CD16, and EF16
1A\1A\1A
5 bytes 1A<SUB>1A with values 3116, 4116, 1A16,
3116, 4116. <SUB> represents a single-byte ASCII
control character with value 1A16
Alternate Control Codes with an Alternate Line Terminator: Character Encoding
can also be used with the Alternate Control Character set. Alternate Control Characters
are enabled, depending upon the model, via a Setup Menu or the <STX>KD / <STX>Kc
commands; see Control Code Command Functions.
94
Extended System-Level Command Functions
STX KF
Select Factory Defaults
This command restores the configuration of the printer to the factory default settings.
These settings may be default values or the values previously specified by a
configuration file (see <STX>Kd).
Syntax:
<STX>KFn<CR>
Where:
n
- A = restore firmware settings including emulations
1 = restore firmware settings including network,
excluding emulations
2 = restores the factory settings (and, if saved, restoring
the Factory Setting File)
3 = restores settings excluding network and emulations
4 = reserved
5= reserved
6= reserved
7= restores network settings.
8 =restores settings excluding calibrations, emulations
and network
9 =restores calibration settings

STX Kf
Calibration will be required.
Set Present Distance
This command specifies an additional amount to advance the label after printing. This
command has the same effect as the <STX>f command, but specifies a distance to
advance relative to the start of print (<STX>O command) of the next label.
Display-Equipped Models: SOP Emulation selection has no effect on this command.
Syntax:
<STX>Kfnnnn<CR>
Where:
nnnn - A four-digit present distance in inches/100 or mm/10.
Sample:
<STX>Kf0100
The sample above represents a one-inch label advance unless in
metric mode (see <STX>m).
95
Extended System-Level Command Functions
STX KH
Dot Check
This command specifies dot check operations for the printhead elements.
Syntax:
<STX>KHx<CR>
Where:
x
- Specifies the operation, where:
P = Performs dot check;
A = Returns the most recent dot check and dot
resistance results; and,
B = Returns the most recent dot check failed dot
results.
Sample:
<STX>KHP<CR>
The sample above performs dot check with DOTCHECK and a
progress bar displayed.
Sample:
<STX>KHA<CR>
The sample above returns results from the last dot check for
every element and its resistance up to 1350 ohms [with out of
range (bad or suspect) values indicates as ******], the number
of dots tested, the total number of bad or suspect dots detected
and, the minimum, maximum, and average resistance
and variance:
DOTCHECK RESULTS
DOTS TESTED GOOD 830 OF 832
DOT OHMS
0 1148
1 1148
2 1140
.
.
.
142 1199
143 *****
144 *****
145 1050
.
.
.
830 1116
831 1116
832 1116
TOTAL BAD DOTS:
MIN MAX AVG VAR
921 1640 1125 719
96
2
Extended System-Level Command Functions
Sample:
<STX>KHB<CR>
The sample above returns results from the last dot check for
the number of elements tested, the number of the bad or
suspect dot(s), the total number of bad or suspect dots, and the
minimum, maximum, and average resistance and variance:
DOTCHECK RESULTS
DOTS TESTED GOOD 830 OF 832
BAD DOT LIST
143
144
TOTAL BAD DOTS:
MIN
921

MAX
1640
2
AVG VAR
1125 719
The process normally adds a few seconds to the power-up sequence; however, if the
printhead is invalid or extremely damaged, it could take a minute to complete.
97
Extended System-Level Command Functions
STX KI
GPIO Input
Future - This command configures the GPIO input channels of the Applicator Interface
Card; see Appendix J for details.
Syntax:
<STX>KIffnspwww<CR>
Where:
ff
- 2 character function name abbreviation (e.g., PS [Print
Start], I1 [User Input 1], etc).
n
- Pin number, where 1 – 8 is the valid range.
s
- Signal type, where: L = Level; P = Positive Pulse;
and N = Negative Pulse
p
- Polarity, where: 0 = Active Low; and 1 = Active High
www
- 3 character filter pulse width, in milliseconds.
STX Kn
NIC Reset
This command resets the NIC to factory defaults.
Syntax:
<STX>Knx
Where:
x
- Specifies the action, where:
F = Returns the NIC to the factory default settings; or,
RH = Reports settings.
RP = Prints reports
Default Values
Wired Ethernet*
Default Values
Wireless Ethernet
IP
192.168.010.026
192.168.010.001
Subnet Mask
255.255.255.000
255.255.255.000
Gateway
000.000.000.000
000.000.000.000
Address
* Prior to introduction of the Wireless Ethernet, 192.0.0.192
was the IP default value and the Subnet Mask was 0.0.0.0.
98
Extended System-Level Command Functions
STX KO
GPIO Output
Future - This command configures the GPIO outputs of the Applicator Interface Card;
see Appendix J for details.
Syntax:
<STX>KOffnsptd0pw0td1pw1<CR>
Where:
ff
-
2 character function name abbreviation (e.g., LC [Label
Complete], LM [Label Movement], etc).
n
-
Pin number, where 1 – 8 is the valid range.
s
-
Signal type, where: L = Level; P = Positive Pulse; and N
= Negative Pulse
p
-
Polarity, where: 0 = Active Low; and 1 = Active High
td0
-
3 character delay time from function condition “true” to
output signal.
pw0
-
3 character pulse width corresponding to the function
condition becoming “true”. (Ignored for level-type
signals.)
td0
-
3 character delay time from function condition “false” to
output signal.
pw0
-
3 character pulse width corresponding to the function
condition becoming “false”. (Ignored for level-type
signals.)
99
Extended System-Level Command Functions
STX Kp
Module Protection
This command controls memory module protection. When “protected”, a module will
ignore format, downloads and delete commands. This command can be useful to add
data to reserved modules (see Appendix K for a listing of the memory modules). There
are two module types: RAM (volatile) and Flash (non-volatile).
•
RAM - When protected and if power is cycled or if the printer is reset, the module
state resets to unprotected.
•
Flash - When protected, the module can be temporarily unprotected; however, if
power is cycled or if the printer is reset, the module state resets to protected.
Syntax:
<STX>Kpmf
Where:
m
- Module ID – Range A to Z (See Appendix K).
f
- Flag specifying Enable or Disable protection, where:
0 = disable protection; and,
1 = enable protection.
Sample:
<STX>KpY0
The sample above disables protection for Module Y; graphics may
now be downloaded to the module and, on subsequent resets,
these graphics will be protected.
100
Extended System-Level Command Functions
STX Kr
Resettable Counter Reset
This command resets the internal counters. Follow this command with an <SOH>U
command to retain the reset or the counters will revert to the previous values after
cycling power.
Syntax:
STX KtA
<STX>Kr<CR>
Write Application Family Identifier (AFI) to Tag
(Direct Mode – HF [13.56 MHz] ISO15693 Tag Interface)
This command writes the AFI data to the tag.
Syntax:
<STX>KtAabcc
Where:
a
- The number of retry attempts, 0-9.
b
- Lock the Application Family Identifier (AFI) after writing:
0 = No Protection
1 = Write Protect
cc
- Two character AFI value representing one byte.
Sample:
<STX>KtA91C3[CR]
The sample above writes 0xC3 AFI byte, locking value, retrying
nine times if necessary.
STX KtD
Write Data Storage Format Identifier (DSFID) to Tag
(Direct Mode – HF [13.56 MHz] ISO15693 Tag Interface)
This command writes the DSFID data to the tag.
Syntax:
<STX>KtDabcc
Where:
a
- The number of retry attempts, 0-9.
b
- Lock the Data Storage Format Identifier (DSFID) after
writing:
0 = No Protection
1 = Write Protect
cc
- Two character DFSID value representing one byte.
Sample:
<STX>KtD91C3[CR]
The sample above writes 0xC3 DSFID byte, locking value, retrying
nine times if necessary.
101
Extended System-Level Command Functions
STX KtE
Write Electronic Article Surveillance (EAS) Bit
(Direct Mode – HF [13.56 MHz] ISO15693 Tag Interface)
This command writes the EAS bit for Philips ISO tags.
Syntax:
<STX>KtEabcc
Where:
a
- The number of retry attempts, 0-9.
b
- Electronic Article Surveillance (EAS) option:
0 = Set EAS
1 = Reset EAS
2 = Test EAS
cc
- Two character Manufacturer’s Code, representing one
byte.
Sample:
<STX>KtE9004[CR]
The sample above writes the EAS bit for Philips (0x04), retrying
nine times if necessary.
STX KtH
Read and Feedback Tag Information to Host
(Direct Mode – HF [13.56 MHz] ISO15693 Tag Interface)
This command returns the tag info to host.

This command only works when the Data Flag for the tag is 0x0F (i.e., when the tag
contains DSFID, AFI, VICC and IC data).
Syntax:
<STX>KtH
Sample Feedback:
DATA FLAG: 0x0F
TAG ID: E004010000751412
DSFID: 0xE3
AFI: 0x01
NUM BLK: 0x1B
BLK SIZ: 0x03
IC REF: 0x01
102
Extended System-Level Command Functions
STX KtR
Read Data from RFID Tag
(Direct Mode – HF [13.56 MHz] ISO15693 Tag Interface)
This command instructs the RFID device to read data from the tag and then put that
data into a replaceable field. It is expected that the tag transponder will be within the
read / write distance of the RFID programming device; otherwise, “Void” will be printed
in the text or bar code label field(s).
Syntax:
<STX>KtRUn1…n16Haaabbbcdee<CR>
Where:
Un1…n16 - (Optional) Where n1…n16 is the Unique Identifier (UID)
in hexadecimal format. Must be sixteen characters
long.
H
- (Optional) Hexadecimal data – “H” may be added
directly after “R” to return a two character hex value of
the data. Since there are two digits per hex value,
replaceable fields should be twice as long than if using
ASCII data (e.g., the character “A” would be returned
as “41”).
aaa
- Starting block number (000  maximum block
number). Transponder dependent.
bbb
- The number of blocks to read (001  maximum block
number). Transponder dependent.
c
- The number of retry attempts, 0-9.
d
- Reserved. Should be 0.
ee
- Field number in which to place the data (must be 01,
02, 03, etc.) matching the order of Label Formatting
command, U.

Sample:
A 00 value will send tag data to the host with no printing.
<STX>L
1911A1802000010TEXT
U
X
<STX>KtRUE00700ABCDEF1234H0000015001
<STX>G
The sample above creates a replaceable text field (01), recalls
data from the RFID tag block zero (reading only one block, which
is attempted nine times), and prints the data in the location
specified by replaceable field.

When using addressed commands and the tag with the specified UID cannot be found, a
standard RFID read/write fault will be issued.
103
Extended System-Level Command Functions
STX KtU
Read Unique Serial Number from RFID Tag
(Direct Mode – HF [13.56 MHz] ISO15693 Tag Interface)
This command instructs the RFID device to read the unique serial number data from the
tag and then place that data into a replaceable field. It is expected that the tag
transponder will be within the read / write distance of the RFID programming device;
otherwise, “Void” will be printed in the text or bar code label field(s).

This is a sixteen character alphanumeric value; the replaceable field must have an
adequate length.
Syntax:
<STX>KtUabcc<CR>
Where:
a
- The number of retry attempts, 0-9.
b
- Reserved. Should be 0.
cc
- Field number in which to place the data (must be 01,
02, 03, etc.) matching the order of Label Formatting
command, U.

STX KtW
A 00 value will send the ID to the host with no printing.
Write Data to RFID Tag
(Direct Mode – HF [13.56 MHz] ISO15693 Tag Interface)
This command instructs the RFID device to write data to the tag. It is expected that the
tag transponder will be within the read / write distance of the RFID programming device;
otherwise, a warning will occur and a warning message (Read / Write Fail) will be
displayed.
Syntax:
<STX>KtWUn1…n16Bncncncaaabcdee…e<CR>
104
Extended System-Level Command Functions
Where:
Sample 1:
Un1…n16
- (Optional) Where n1…n16 is the Unique Identifier
(UID) in hexadecimal format, sixteen characters in
length.
Bncncnc
- (Optional) Where ncncnc is the data byte count, to
allow non-printable characters (i.e., characters with
hex values less than 0x20) to be encoded.
aaa
- Starting block number (000  maximum block
number). Transponder dependent.
b
- The number of retry attempts, 0-9.
c
- Lock block after writing:
0 = No Protection
1 = Write Protect
d
- Reserved. Should be 0.
ee…e
- Data to be encoded on RFID tag.
<STX>KtWB004000900<0x00><0x01><0x02><0x03>[CR]
Sample 1, above, programs the hex values 0x00, 0x01, 0x02,
0x03 in block zero.
Sample 2:
<STX>KtWUE00700ABCDEF1234B004000510TEST[CR]
Sample 2, above, programs the data “TEST” to the tag with UID
“E00700ABCDEF1234” at block zero then write-protects block zero
(attempting to write five additional times if necessary). When
write protecting (locking) with UID, the separate lock command
will also use the addressed mode and the supplied UID.

When using addressed commands and the tag with the specified UID cannot be found, a
standard RFID read/write fault will be issued.
105
Extended System-Level Command Functions
STX KuB
Read Data from Gen2 Tag Section
This command reads a specific block address of a Gen2 tag.
Syntax:
<STX>KuBaaabbb
Where:
aaa
- Block address number, where: 000 is kill/access
section; 001 is EPC section; 002 is Tag ID; and, 003 is
user memory.
bbb
- Data offset in word length.
Sample:
<STX>KuB001002
The sample above reads the block address 1 at offset word 2,
which is location of the EPC data.
STX KuF
Send RFID Device Firmware Version
This command instructs the RFID device to return the firmware version.
Syntax:
<STX>KuF<CR>
Printer response:
DEVICE VERSION: XXX.XXX.XXX[CR]
STX KuJ
Write Data to Gen 2 Tag Section
This command writes a specific block address of a Gen2 tag.
Syntax:
<STX>KuJaaabbb<data>
Where:
aaa
- Block address number, where: 000 is kill/access
section; 001 is EPC section; 002 is Tag ID; or, 003 is
user memory.
bbb
- Data offset in word length
<data>
- Hexadecimal data (must be length of multiples of 4)
Sample:
<STX>KuJ001002112233445566778899AABBCC
The sample above writes data “112233445566778899AABBCC” to
block address 1 at offset word 2, which is the EPC data.
106
Extended System-Level Command Functions
STX KuR
Read Data from RFID Tag
(Direct Mode – UHF Interface – Hexadecimal Data Only)
This command instructs the RFID device to read data from the tag and then place that
data into a replaceable field. It is expected that the tag transponder is within the read /
write distance of the RFID programming device; otherwise, “Void” will be printed in the
text or bar code label field(s).
Syntax:
<STX>KuRaa<CR>
Where:
aa
- Field number in which to place the data (must be 01,
02, 03, etc.) matching the order of Label Formatting
command, U.

Sample:
A 00 value will send the ID to the host with no
printing.
<STX>L
D11
1911A1801000100 xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
U
1A31050002000200 xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
U
X
<STX>KuR01
<STX>Kur02
<STX>G
The sample above creates a replaceable text field (01) and bar
code field (02) and then recalls the data from the tag and places it
into the specified fields.

Data should be at least 16 or 24 characters in length.
107
Extended System-Level Command Functions
STX KuW Write Data to RFID Tag
(Direct Mode – UHF Interface – Hexadecimal Data Only)
This command instructs the RFID device to write data to the tag. It is expected that the
tag transponder will be within the read / write distance of the RFID programming device;
otherwise, a warning will occur and a warning message (Read / Write Fail) will be
displayed.
Syntax:
<STX>KuWabcc…c<CR>
Where:
a
- The number of attempts to locate, erase and program
the tag (1 – 9).
b
- Reserved. Should be 0.
cc…c
- Data to be encoded in the ASCII format. Must be
sixteen characters in length. The valid characters are
0-9, A-F.

Sample:
Must be 16 or 24 characters long.
<STX>KuW10ABCDEF0102030405[CR]
The sample above programs the data
<0xAB><0xCD><0xEF><0x01><0x02><0x03><0x04><0x05> to the
tag, attempting to write one additional time if necessary.
STX KV
Verifier Enable/Disable
This command allows a verifier to be enabled and disabled.
Syntax:
<STX>KVa<CR>
Where:
a

- Y = verifier enable
N = verifier disable
This command will result in a system reset for the EX2.
108
Extended System-Level Command Functions
STX Ky
Download Plug-in File
This command allows to download a plug-in file to the specified module from the host to
the printer. The data that immediately follows the command string will be plug-in data.
This command is internal to D-O only.
Syntax:
<STX>KymNamedata
Where:
m
- Valid Module ID – Range A to Z
Name
- Up to 16 characters used as plug-in file name.
data
- Plug-in data
Sample:
<STX>KyXPlugin1data...data <CR>
The sample above instructs the printer to (1) receive Plug-in file
data sent by the host, (2) name the image “Plugin1”, and (3)
store it in Module X (with a .dim file extension).
STX KZ
Immediately Set Parameter
This command immediately sets the specified parameter.
Syntax:
<STX>KZax<CR>
Where:
a
- Valid parameter identifier, as follows:
F = Feed Speed
P = Print Speed
S = Slew Speed
H = Heat Setting
x
- Speed Parameter Range – A to e (see Appendix L).
-orxx
Sample:
- Heat Parameter Range – A two-digit value (00-30);
see the “H” Label Formatting Command.
<STX>KZH22
The sample above causes the file currently being executed to
assume a Heat Value of 22.
109
Extended System-Level Command Functions
110
Label Formatting Command Functions
Label Formatting
Command Functions
6
Introduction
The <STX>L command switches the printer from the System-Level Processor to the Label
Formatting Processor. All commands following the <STX>L are interpreted as label
formatting commands, and can be used to override default parameter values. Selectable
parameter value defaults may be also reassigned via the Setup Menu, as defined in the
corresponding Operator’s Manual. Label formats that contain no commands overriding
printer default values will assume those defaults.
:
Set Cut by Amount
This command allows a predetermined number of labels to be printed before a cut is
initiated. This feature is useful when it is necessary to print an uncut strip of labels.
Between 1 and 9999 labels may be printed before a cut is made. The amount must be
smaller than the quantity of labels printed.
Syntax:
:nnnn
Where:
nnnn
Sample:
<STX>L<CR>
:0005<CR>
141100001000100SAMPLE LABEL<CR>
Q0021<CR>
E<CR>
- Is a four digit decimal number indicating the number
of labels to be printed before a cut is performed.
The sample above instructs the printer to make a cut after 5, 10,
and 20 labels have been printed. Label 21 will be cut at the start
of a subsequent label format (batch) unless a default (cut by
amount) greater than one has been entered.

The cutter must be enabled with all mechanism interlocks closed for operation.
111
Label Formatting Command Functions
A
Set Format Attribute
This command specifies the type of format operation and remains in effect until another
format command is specified or another label format has begun (<STX>L). Each label
format defaults to Attribute 1 (XOR Mode).
Syntax:
An
Where:
n
Sample:
<STX>L
A3
141100001000100DATAMAX<CR>
141100001100110DATAMAX<CR>
E
- Is attribute mode 1, 2, 3, or 5; see table below. The
default is 1.
The sample above sets the printer to Opaque Mode and produces
one label.
n
Attribute
1
XOR
Mode
2
Transparent
Mode
3
Opaque
Mode
Interacting text is obliterated by the text
formatted last. Each character cell is treated
as opaque. This mode is effective only in
rotation 1. See Record Structure Types.
Inverse
Mode
This mode allows inverse (white on black)
printing (e.g., a proportionally sized border
and background are printed similar to
photographic negative). If text or image fields
overlap in this mode, the effect will be similar
to the XOR mode.
5
Description
In this mode, the region where text strings,
images or bar codes intersect will not be
printed. (An odd number of overlapping
objects will print.)
This is the default mode; the intersecting
regions of text strings, images, and bar codes
will print, allowing the user to print fields atop
one another.
112
Example
Label Formatting Command Functions
B
Bar Code Magnification
This command provides a mechanism to specify bar codes greater than 36 dots (0 - 9, A
- Z in the field record). The value is reset to 1 at the start of every label and stays
active for the entire label or set to a new value.
Syntax:
Bnn
Where:
nn
Sample:
<STX>L<CR>
D11
B01
1a9305000100030ABCD<CR>
B03
1a3105000700030ABCD<CR>
Q0001
E
- Is a two digit decimal number indicating the
magnification value.
The sample above instructs the printer to print two bar codes,
each 9 dots by 3 dots.
C
Set Column Offset Amount
This command allows horizontal adjustment of the point where printing begins. The
printer is instructed to print label formats nnnn units to the right of the position that the
format specifies. This feature is useful when a single format is to be printed on labels
containing preprinted information.
Syntax:
Cnnnn
Where:
nnnn
Sample:
<STX>L
C0050
141100001000100DATAMAX<CR>
- Is a four-digit number for the column offset,
inches/100 or mm/10. The default is 0.
The sample above shifts all format data 0.5 inches to the right,
unless the printer is in metric mode, (see Label Formatting
Command “m”).

If using preprinted labels where the placement of the preprint data varies from label to
label, the printed information may overlap the preprinted data.
113
Label Formatting Command Functions
c
Set Cut by Amount
This command is the same as the “:” command except only a two-digit value can be
entered. This command allows a predetermined number of labels to be printed before a
cut is initiated. 1 to 99 labels may be printed before a cut is made.
Syntax:
cnn
Where:
nn
Sample
<STX>L<CR>
c07<CR>
141100001000100SAMPLE LABEL<CR>
Q0021<CR>
E
- Is a two-digit number indicating the number of labels
to be printed before a cut is performed. The default is
one.
The sample above instructs the printer to make cuts after labels
7, 14, and 21 have been printed. See Label Formatting Command
“:”.

D
The cutter must be enabled and all mechanism interlocks closed for the cut operation.
Set Dot Size Width and Height
This command is used to change the size of a printed dot, hence the print resolution –
dots per inch (DPI) of the print head. By changing the height of a dot, the maximum
length of a label can be increased or decreased. For the element sizes see Appendix K.
Syntax:
Dwh
Where:
w
- Is Dot Width multiplier 1 or 2.
h
- Is Dot Height multiplier 1, 2, or 3.

D11 is the default value for 300, 400 and 600 DPI printer models, while D22 is the
default value for all 203 DPI printer models.
114
Label Formatting Command Functions
E
Terminate Label Formatting Mode and Print Label
This command causes the printer, when the processing Label Formatting commands, to
terminate the Label Formatting Mode then generate, print, and feed a label. The label
generated will be based on whatever data has been received to that point, even if no
printable data has been received. (Other termination commands are “X” and “s”.)
Commands sent to the printer after the Terminate Label command must be of the
Immediate, System-Level, or Font Download type.
Syntax:
E
Sample:
<STX>L<CR>
121100000000000Testing<CR>
E<CR>
The sample above will print one label.
e
Recall Printer Configuration
This command recalls a previously stored printer configuration. It is highly
recommended that only one Recall Printer Configuration command be used per label,
and that it be used at the beginning of the label; otherwise, unpredictable results will
occur. (Printer configurations may be stored using the Extended System-Level
Commands or via the printer’s menu system.)
Syntax:
eName<CR>
Where:
Name
- The name, up to 16 characters, of the configuration
file.
<CR>
- 0x0d terminates the name.
Sample:
<STX>L<CR>
ePlant1<CR>
1A2210001000000Testing<CR>
E<CR>
The sample above recalls the stored printer configuration, Plant1.
F
Advanced Format Attributes
These commends extend the text presentation capabilities for Scalable Fonts. The
format attribute allows a set of label format records to select Bolding, Italicizing and
Underlining. Additional commands allow the specification of line rotation and font
changes within a label field. See “Advanced Format Attributes” (Section 8) for details.
115
Label Formatting Command Functions
G
Place Data in Global Register
The “G” command saves the print data of a print format record in a global register
(temporary storage). This data may be retrieved and copied to another record in the
same label format using the special Label Formatting Command: <STX>S. Global
registers are named in the order received, beginning with Register A, ending at Register
Z, and incrementing with each instance of the G command use.
Syntax:
G
Sample:
<STX>L<CR>
121100000000000Testing<CR>
G<CR>
1A2210001000000<STX>SA<CR>
E<CR>
The sample above stores, retrieves, and prints the data in global
register A. One label is printed with “Testing” in two locations.
H
Enter Heat Setting
This command changes the “on time” of elements of the print head. The default setting
is 10 (except in the case of printers with a menu, where the default setting can be
changed through the keypad). An increase or decrease in this value results in a change
of heat applied by the print head to the media, lightening or darkening the print contrast
accordingly. This is helpful when using different media types, each requiring a different
amount of heat to properly image the media. The host device can send this command
value to correct the heat setting per the application.
Syntax:
Hnn
Where:
nn
Sample:
<STX>L<CR>
H15<CR>
141100001000100SAMPLE LABEL<CR>
E
- Is a two-digit heat value (00-30).
The sample above sets the printer for a heat value of 15 and
prints one label.
116
Label Formatting Command Functions
J
Justification
This command changes the printing justification.
Syntax:
Ja
Where:
a
Sample:
<STX>L<CR>
1911A1801001000TEST1
JR
1911A1801000100TEST2
JC
1911A1802000200TEST3
E
- Is a single-digit alpha character:
L = left justified (default)
R = right justified
C = center justified
The sample above prints “TEST1” one inch up and one inch over
going right, “TEST2” one inch up and one inch over going left, and
“TEST3” two inches up and over.

Display-Equipped Models – This command is only valid for use with scalable fonts.
M
Select Mirror Mode
This command instructs the printer to “mirror” all subsequent print field records,
producing fields that are transposed visually.
Syntax:
M
Sample:
<STX>L
161100003200010 NOT MIRRORED<CR>
M<CR>
161100003000400 MIRRORED<CR>
E
Printed Result:
117
Label Formatting Command Functions
m
Set Metric Mode
This command sets the printer to measure in metric. When this command is sent, all
measurements will be interpreted as metric values, (e.g., a column offset of 0010 will be
interpreted as 1.0 mm).
Syntax:
m
Sample:
<STX>L<CR>
m
141100001000100SAMPLE LABEL<CR>
E
The sample above prints the text (SAMPLE LABEL) starting at
location coordinates 10.0 mm, 10.0 mm.
n
Set Inch (Imperial) Mode
This command sets the printer to measure in inches. When this command is sent, all
measurements will change to inches. Default mode, and is menu selectable.
Syntax:
n
Sample:
<STX>L<CR>
n
141100001000100SAMPLE LABEL<CR>
E
The sample above prints the text (SAMPLE LABEL) starting at
location coordinates 1.0 inch, 1.0 inch.
P
Set Print Speed
This command sets a print speed for a label or batch of labels.
Syntax:
Pa
Where:
a
Sample:
<STX>L
PC
141100001000100LABEL1<CR>
E
<STX>L
141100001000100LABEL2<CR>
E
- Is a single character representing a speed; see
Appendix L for valid ranges.
The sample above prints two labels, the first at a speed of 2
inches per second (51 mm per second) and the second at the
default setting.
118
Label Formatting Command Functions
p
Set Backfeed Speed
This command, typically used in conjunction with the Cut or Peel and Present operations,
controls the rate at which the labels will reverse to align to the next start of print
position. The setting remains in effect until another backfeed speed command is
received or until the printer is reset.
Syntax:
pa
Where:
a
Sample:
<STX>L
pF
- Is a single alpha character representing a speed; see
Appendix L for valid ranges.
The sample above sets the printer to a backup speed of 3.5 IPS.
Q
Set Quantity of Labels to Print
This command sets the number of the label copies to be printed. A one to five digit value
is allowed, if the command is delimited by a carriage return <CR>. This permits host
applications to generate label quantity commands without the need to pad leading zeros.
(A four-digit command value does not need to be <CR> terminated.)
Syntax:
Qnnnnn
Where:
nnnnn
Sample:
<STX>L
121100000000000Testing<CR>
Q0020<CR>
E<CR>
- Is a one to five-digit delimited value setting for the
number of labels to be printed. The default value is
one.
The sample above will print a batch of 20 identical labels.

Specifying 9999 as the four-digit quantity results in continuous printing.
119
Label Formatting Command Functions
R
Set Row Offset Amount
This command allows vertical adjustment of the point where printing begins. The printer
is instructed to print label formats nnnn units above the position that the format
specifies. This feature is useful when a single format is to be printed on labels containing
preprinted information.
Syntax:
Rnnnn
Where:
nnnn
Sample:
<STX>L
R0037<CR>
141100001000100SAMPLE LABEL<CR>
E
- Is a four-digit number (0000-9999) for the row offset,
in inches/100 or millimeters/10. The default is 0.
The sample above prints a label with a row offset amount of .37
inches, unless in metric mode.

• If using preprinted labels where the placement of the preprint data varies from label
to label, the printed information may overlap the preprinted data.
• If printing near the TOF is important (i.e., on very small labels or in very tight
formats), it may be necessary to use the ROW ADJUST setting to shift the vertical
start of print position in the negative direction.
r
Recall Stored Label Format
This command is used to retrieve label formats stored on a memory module. Embedding
recalled labels, up to 6 levels of nesting, within a recall label is also possible.
Syntax:
rnn...n
120
Label Formatting Command Functions
Where:
nn…n
- Is a label name, up to 16 characters in length.
The samples below explain different ways to recall and print a label
format. (Use <STX>W to view a memory module’s directory.)
String Sent:
Printer Interpretation:
Sample 1:
<STX>L<CR>
rTEST<CR>
Q0002<CR>
E<CR>
Begin label format
Retrieve format named TEST
Quantity requested = 2
Terminate formatting and print
Sample 2:
<STX>L<CR>
rTEST<CR>
X<CR>
<STX>G<CR>
Begin label format
Retrieve format named test
Terminate formatting
Print
Sample 3:
<STX>L<CR>
D11<CR>
PO<CR>
SO<CR>
rTEST<CR>
E<CR>
Begin label format
Dot size = 1x1
Print speed O
Feed speed O
Retrieve format named test
Terminate formatting and print
The sample below explains recall embedding.
Sample:
String Sent:
Printer Interpretation:
<STX>L
rLABEL1
191111111111LABEL1FIELD1
sGLabel1
Store label 1
<STX>L
rLABEL1
191111111111LABEL2FIELD1
sGLabel2
Store label 2
<STX>L
rLabel2
19111111111LABEL3FIELD1
E
Print label 3
What gets printed:
LABEL1 FIELD1
LABEL2 FIELD1
LABEL3 FIELD1
121
Label Formatting Command Functions
S
Set Feed Speed
This command controls the rate at which the label is moved through non-printed areas.
The setting remains unchanged unless another feed speed command is received or until
the printer is reset.
Syntax:
Sa
Where:
a
Sample:
<STX>L
SE
141100001000100LABEL1<CR>
E
<STX>L
1411000010001000LABEL2<CR>
E
- Is a single alpha character representing a speed; see
Appendix L for valid ranges.
The sample above sets a 3 IPS feed speed and prints two labels,
with the same feed speed for both.
s
Store Label Format in Module
This command stores a label format to a specified module as a .dlb file. Supplying the
module name will store the label to that module; otherwise, using C will cause the label
format to be stored in the selected default module (see <STX>X). In addition, this
command terminates the Label Formatting Command.
Syntax:
sann…n
Where:
a
- Is the module designator representing a single
character module name; see Appendix K.
nn…n
- Represents the name of the label (maximum 16
characters).
Sample:
<STX>L<CR>
D11<CR>
191100501000000123456789012<CR>
1911005020000001234567<CR>
191100500000000Sample<CR>
1X1100000000000B250250002002<CR>
Q0001<CR>
sATEST<CR>
The sample above stores a format in Memory Module A and
names it “TEST”. (To recall a label format from the module use
the “r” command.)
122
Label Formatting Command Functions
T
Set Field Data Line Terminator
This command, intended for use with record types that accept binary data (e.g.,
PDF417), allows binary control codes (e.g., a carriage return) to be embedded in the
printed data by setting an alternate data line terminator. Valid only for the next format
record, the terminator then defaults back to the carriage return.
Syntax:
Tnn
Where:
nn
Sample:
<STX>L<CR>
T00<CR>
191100200000000TEST<NULL>
141100001000100TERMIATOR<CR>
Q0001<CR>
E<CR>
- Is an ASCII two-character representation of a HEX
code to be used for the end of data terminator.
The sample above sets the a NULL terminator (ASCII NULL: HEX
00) for the data line termination code. The terminator is
immediately restored to a carriage return <CR>, as seen in the
format record containing the text “TERMINATOR”.
t
Add or subtract date time from the printer date
This command allows the user to print an adjusted date of the printer. This date can be
printed using the Special Label Formatting Command <STX>D. This command does not
change the printer date.
Syntax:
txnnnn<CR>
Where:
x=
D = adjust by days
W = adjust by weeks
M = adjust by months
Y = adjust by years
nnnn = 4 digits to be added or subtracted. An optional ‘-‘ may
precede the digits to indicate subtraction.
Sample 1:
Assume printer date is set to January 01, 2013
<STX>L
tD0005
121100001000100 Expiration Date:<STX>D GHI PQ, RSTU
E
Sample 1 prints: Expiration Date:JAN 06, 2013
123
Label Formatting Command Functions
Sample 2:
Assume printer date is set to January 31, 2013
<STX>L
tM0001
121100001000100 Expiration Date:<STX>D GHI PQ, RSTU
E
Sample 2 prints: Expiration Date:FEB 28, 2013
Note: When advancing from a day at the end of the month with
more days than the adjusted date, the printed date will not be
greater than the maximum number of days of the adjusted
month.
Sample 3:
Assume printer date is set to January 01, 2013
<STX>L
tW-0001
121100001000100 Expiration Date:<STX>D GHI PQ, RSTU
E
Sample 3 prints: DEC 25, 2012
U
Mark Previous Field as a String Replacement Field
This command controls the formatting of replacement data. Specifying a field as a string
replacement for dynamic, not static, fields will optimize throughput. See <STX>U.
Syntax:
U
Sample:
<STX>L
D11
121100001000000123456789012<CR>
U<CR>
1211000020000001234567<CR>
U<CR>
161100000000000Sample<CR>
1X1100000000000B250250002002<CR>
Q0001
E
<STX>U01ABCDEFGHIJKL<CR>
<STX>U028901234<CR>
<STX>G
The sample above sets the format for register loading and prints
two labels. The first two of four format records have been
designated replacement fields. The second label is generated with
System-Level field-replacement commands and printed.

The length of the original string sets the data string length of any replacement; both
must be equal. The data being used when created must be valid for the font type being
selected.
124
Label Formatting Command Functions
X
Terminate Label Formatting Mode
This command causes the printer, when in label formatting mode, to immediately switch
to the system command mode and generate a label format based on the data received
at that point. However, unlike the “E” command, it will not print a label. (Other
termination commands are the “E” and “s”.)
Syntax:
X
Sample:
<STX>L<CR>
141100001000100SAMPLE<CR>
X<CR>
The sample above will result in a label format, but no label will be
printed.
y
Select Font Symbol Set
This command, like the <STX>y, selects the scalable font symbol set. The selected
symbol set remains active until another symbol set is selected; see the <STX>y
command for details.
Syntax:
ySxx
Where:
S
- Byte-size designation; see Appendix H:
S = Single byte symbol sets; and,
U = Double byte symbol sets.
xx
- Symbol set selection.
Sample:
<STX>L
ySSW<CR>
The sample above selects the Swedish symbol set for use in
format records using scalable fonts.
125
Label Formatting Command Functions
z
Zero (Ø) Conversion to “0”
This command removes the slash zero in fonts 0 to 8, and in the human readable field
(if any) of the bar codes A to Z. The command applies only to format records containing
those fonts and bar codes, and is effective only for the label format in which it appears.
Syntax:
z
Sample:
<STX>L
z
121100000000000Test0000<CR>
E

None of the smooth fonts (i.e., Font 9) use the slash zero convention, and this
command will have no effect on scalable fonts.
+ (>)(()
Make Last Field Entered Increment
This command, useful in printing sequenced labels, causes the printer to automatically
increment a field in a batch of labels. The numeric data in the field will increment by the
value assigned after the plus sign (+) each time a label is produced [or the greater than
symbol [>] can be substituted to make the field increment alphabetically, or the left
parenthesis [(] can be substituted to make the field increment hexadecimal data (valid
hexadecimal data is 0-9 or A-F, usually in pairs)]. This command is effective only on the
label format record that it follows, and is intended to be used with the Q, <STX>E, or
<STX>G commands.
Syntax:
*pii
Where:
*
- Is + for numeric increment, > for alphanumeric
increment, or (for hexadecimal increment.
p
- Is the fill character for the left-hand character of the
field.
ii
- Is the amount by which to increment the field.
Sample:
<STX>L<CR>
13220000000000012345<CR>
+01<CR>
Q0003<CR>
E<CR>
The sample above will generate a single field label format that
prints the initial label with a value of 12345, and then increments
that number by one for the next two labels.
126
Label Formatting Command Functions
Embedding
Numeric strings for incrementing may also be embedded between alphabetic characters
(e.g., when systems require alphanumeric bar codes with alphabetic prefixes or
suffixes).
Sample:
<STX>L<CR>
161100000100010AB0001CD<CR>
+ 100<CR>
Q0003<CR>
E<CR>
The sample above will print three labels, incrementing 0001 by 1
on each label with AB and CD remaining untouched: AB0001CD,
AB0002CD, AB0003CD. Note that the increment value has one
leading blank and two trailing zeros, while the blank is a pad
character and the trailing zeroes are placeholders that leave CD
unchanged.
– (<)())
Make Last Field Entered Decrement
This command, useful in printing sequenced labels, causes the printer to automatically
decrement a field in a batch of labels. The numeric data in the field will decrement by
the value assigned after the minus (-) sign each time a label is produced [or the less
than character [<] can be substituted to make the field decrement alphabetically, or the
right parenthesis [)] can be substituted to make the field decrement hexadecimal data
(valid hexadecimal data is 0-9 or A-F, usually in pairs)]. This command is effective only
on the label format record that it follows, and is intended to be used with the Q, <STX>E
or <STX>G commands.
Syntax:
*pii
Where:
*
- Is – for numeric decrement, < for alphanumeric
decrement, or) for hexadecimal decrement.
p
- Is the fill character for the leftmost character of the
field.
ii
- Is the amount by which to decrement the field.
Sample:
<STX>L<CR>
132200000000000123AB<CR>
<01<CR>
Q0003<CR>
E<CR>
The sample above will generate a single field label format that
prints the initial label with a value of 123AB, and then decrements
that number by one for the next two labels.
127
Label Formatting Command Functions
Embedding
Numeric strings for decrementing may also be embedded between alphabetic characters
(e.g., when systems require alphanumeric bar codes with alphabetic prefixes or
suffixes).
Sample:
<STX>L<CR>
1611000001000101000CD<CR>
- 100<CR>
Q0003<CR>
E<CR>
The sample above will print three labels: 1000CD, 999CD, and
998CD. Note that the pad character is a placeholder for digits
removed from the left side in the subtraction process. When a
fixed pitch font is used, the justification of the rightmost character
is sustained regardless of the number of digits replaced by the pad
character on the left side.
^
Set Count by Amount
This command allows applications using the increment / decrement field command to
print more than one label with the same field value before the field data is updated. The
default is 1.
Syntax:
^nn
Where:
^
- May be 0x55 or 0x40; see note below.
nn
- Is a two-digit value that specifies the number of
labels to be generated before incrementing (or
decrementing) the field value.
Sample:
<STX>L<CR>
13220000000000012345<CR>
-01<CR>
^02<CR>
Q0006<CR>
E<CR>
The sample above prints two labels containing the same field
value before decrementing the field. Six labels are printed.

This command can only be issued once per label format. In addition, when alternate
Control Codes are enabled, the ^ character must be replaced by the @ character
(hexadecimal 0x40); see Control Code Command Functions.
128
Label Formatting Command Functions
Special Label Formatting Command Functions
Two Special Label Formatting Commands, the <STX>S and the <STX>T, are entered directly
into the data field of label format records. (Do not confuse them with System-Level
Commands because the same control character is used.) If alternate control codes are
enabled the <STX> becomes “~” (hexadecimal 0x7E); see Control Code Command Functions.
Label Formatting Character
Command Description
<STX>D
Print adjusted date
<STX>S
Recall global data and place in field
<STX>T
Print time and date
STX D
Print adjusted date
This command prints the adjusted date generated by the ‘t’ label formatting command.
Using string characters, allows the adjusted date data to be selected and printed. In
addition, the <STX>D may be preceded by data to be printed/encoded, and/or the
string may be terminated by an <STX> command followed by more data, then <CR>
terminated. The string characters are not printed; instead, the label will show the
corresponding print value.
Syntax:
<STX>Dstring<CR>
Where:
string - Is any set of characters, A – Z and a - h; see the table
below.
String
Characters
A
Week Day (Mon = 1, Sun = 7)
String
Markers
VW
24-hour time format
BCD
Day Name
XY
12-hour time format
EF
Month Number
Za
Minutes
GH...O
Month Name
gh
Seconds
PQ
Day
bc
AM or PM
RSTU
Year
def
Julian Date
Sample 1:
Print Values
Print Values
Assume printer date is set to January 01, 2013
<STX>L
tD0005
121100001000100 Expiration Date:<STX>D GHI PQ, RSTU
E
Prints: Expiration Date:JAN 06, 2013
129
Label Formatting Command Functions
Sample 2:
Assume printer date is set to January 01, 2013
<STX>L
tD0005
121100001000100 Expiration Date:<STX>D GHI PQ,
RSTU<STX> <<<<
E
Prints: Expiration Date:JAN 06, 2013 <<<<
STX S
Recall Global Data and Place in Field
This command, when in the format record data field, places data from a specified global
register into the data field. See the G command.
Syntax:
<STX>Sn
Where:
n
Sample:
<STX>L<CR>
121100000000000DMX<CR>
G<CR>
1A2210001000000<STX>SA<CR>
E<CR>
- Specifies the global register (A P) that contains the
data to place into the data field.
The sample above places the string “DMX” into the next available
global register (A), and then line 4 is effectively replaced by the
data from global register A.
STX T
Print Time and Date
This command, using string characters and markers, allows time and date data to be
selected and retrieved from the internal clock. In addition, the <STX>T may be preceded
by data to be printed/encoded, and/or the string may be terminated by an <STX>
command followed by more data then <CR> terminated. The string characters/markers
are not printed; instead, the label will show the corresponding print value.
Syntax:
<STX>Tstring<CR>
Where:
string
- Is any set of characters, A - Z and a – h; see the
table below.
130
Label Formatting Command Functions
String
Characters
A
Week Day (Mon = 1, Sun = 7)
String
Markers
VW
24-hour time format
BCD
Day Name
XY
12-hour time format
EF
Month Number
Za
Minutes
GH...O
Month Name
gh
Seconds
PQ
Day
bc
AM or PM
RSTU
Year
def
Julian Date

Print Values
Print Values
When using substitution, you must ensure the converted string produces valid
characters for the selected bar code / font.
Sample 1:
<STX>L<CR>
121100001000100<STX>TBCD GHI PQ, TU<CR>
E<CR>
Sample 1 prints SUN DEC 21, 98.
Sample 2:
<STX>L<CR>
191100100100010<STX>TEF/PQ<CR>
E<CR>
Sample 2 prints 12/21.
Sample 3:
<STX>L<CR>
191100100100010ABC <STX>TEF/PQ<STX> DEF<CR>
E<CR>
Sample 3 prints ABC 12/21 DEF, and illustrates a method of
embedding the time string, where the string must be terminated
by <STX>.

The samples above assume a current printer date of December 21, 1998.
131
Label Formatting Command Functions
132
Font Loading Command Functions
7
Font Loading Command Functions
Introduction
The commands used for font loading are usually generated by font creation software;
however, the assigned font ID number command must be sent to the printer before the font
file. All Font Loading Commands begin with <ESC> (ASCII control character 27 [decimal]).
The downloaded font will be stored in the default module (refer to the <STX>X command) as
file type .dbm. The commands in the table below are listed in their order of appearance, top
to bottom, during font downloading. The <SOH>D command must be sent prior to
downloading a font.
Command
Description
*c###D
Assign Font ID Number
)s#Wnn…n
Font Descriptor
*c#E
Character Code
(s#W
Character Download Data
*c###D
Assign Font ID Number
This command is the first command required for downloading a font to either RAM or
Flash Memory modules. ESC represents the ASCII control character 27.
Syntax:
<ESC>*c###D
Where:
###
- Is the font ID numbers 100-999 (000 – 099 are
reserved for resident fonts).
133
Font Loading Command Functions
)s###W
Font Descriptor
This command (typically first data in a font file) contains all of the information about the
font contained in the file. Different font generation software will create different length
header information, but the initial 64 bytes will remain consistent with the PCL-4 (HP
LaserJet II) format.
Syntax:
<ESC>)s###Wddd…d
Where:
###
- Is the number of bytes of font descriptor data from 1
to 3 ASCII decimal digits.
dd…d
- Is the descriptor.
*c###E
Character Code
This code is the ASCII decimal value corresponding to the next downloaded character.
Syntax:
<ESC>*c###E
Where:
###
(s#W
- Is the ASCII value of the character, three digits
maximum, 0 to 999.
Character Download Data
This command contains all of the information for one downloaded character.
Syntax:
<ESC>(s###Wnn…n
Where:
###
- Is the number of bytes of bitmapped data, three
digits maximum, from 1 to 999.
nn…n
- Is the bitmapped data.
134
Generating Label Formats
8
Generating Label Formats
Introduction
This section explains the use of the different fields in a print format record.
Format Record Commands
Received label format data (see example below) is processed by the printer sequentially,
left to right and top to bottom.
String Sent
<STX>L<CR>
D11<CR>
121100000050005Home Position<CR>
191100602000200ROTATION 1<CR>
291100602000200ROTATION 2<CR>
391100602000200ROTATION 3<CR>
491100602000200ROTATION 4<CR>
1A3104003000260123456<CR>
2A3104001400300123456<CR>
3A3104001000140123456<CR>
4A3104002600100123456<CR>
1X1100000000000B400400003003<CR>
1X1100002000000L400003<CR>
1X1100000000200L003400<CR>
121100004100010Printhead Location<CR>
Q0001<CR>
E<CR>

Interpretation
Begin label format
Set dot size
Format text
Format text
Format text
Format text
Format text
Format bar code with text
Format bar code with text
Format bar code with text
Format bar code with text
Format box
Format line
Format line
Format text
Label quantity
End formatting, begin printing
The sample above assumes that “inch” mode (<STX>n) is selected, with four inch media.

(print direction)
135
Generating Label Formats
The first line in the sample format is the System-Level Command directing the printer to
begin label formatting. (Other System-Level Commands may precede the <STX>L for
printer setup.) Lines 2, 14, and 15 are Label Formatting Commands. Line 15 is the exit
and print command. The remaining lines (3-13) are print format records, explained in
this section.
A record is a data string that contains the information to be printed on the label(s).
Records are the building blocks of label formats. Every record must end with a
termination character (usually a carriage return, <CR>). Omitting termination
characters will result in the concatenation of records. Omitting the carriage return that
precedes the termination character E, which is necessary to complete the label
formatting and begin printing, will cause the printer to continue interpreting all
subsequent data as label print format records.
Generating Records
Every record is made of three parts: (1) a header that is *15 bytes in length, (2) the
data to be printed, and (3) a termination character (e.g., <CR>) marking the end of the
field. The header is used to select the appearance of the data when printed by choosing
rotation, font type, size, and position options. Every header contains similar information,
but different types of records may use this information in different ways. The six record
types are:
1. Internal Bitmapped Font
2. Smooth Font (Simulated)
3. Scalable Font
4. Bar code
5. Images
6. Graphics
* As requirements grow some fields record headers will exceed 15 characters.
The Structure of a Record
The basic structure of the record is described below. For details regarding the various
interpretations of the six types see Record Structure Types.
The third line of the label format example consists of the following:
121100000050005HOME POSITION<CR>
This string comprises a complete record, shown below, divided into its three basic
component parts.
Header
Data String
Termination Character
121100000050005
HOME POSITION
<CR>
136
Generating Label Formats
The record (with spaces added for readability) conforms to the following fixed field
format. Identifying lower case letters have been placed below field values for reference
in the following sections:
1 2 1 1
000
0005
0005
HOME POSITION
<CR>
a b c d
eee
ffff
gggg
[hhhh iiii] jj…j
Termination character
Location
Within
Record
Record Type
Internal
Bitmapped
Font
Smooth
Font
Scalable
Font
Bar
Code
Images
Graphics
a
Rotation
Rotation
Rotation
Rotation
Rotation
1
b
Font ID
9
9
Bar Code
Y
X
c
Width
Multiplier
Width
Multiplier
Width
Multiplier
Wide
Bar
Width
Multiplier
1
d
Height
Multiplier
Height
Multiplier
Height
Multiplier
Narrow
Bar
Height
Multiplier
1
eee
000
Font Size/
ID
ID
Bar Code
Height
000
000
ffff
Row
Position
Row
Position
Row
Position
Row
Position
Row
Position
Row
Position
gggg
Column
Position
Column
Position
Column
Position
Column
Position
Column
Position
Column
Position
hhhh
N/A
N/A
Font Height
N/A
N/A
N/A
iiii
N/A
N/A
Font Width
N/A
N/A
N/A
jj…j
Data
String
Data
String
Data
String
Data
String
Image
Name
Graphics
Specifier
The record structure is shown for each of the record types. The left-most column shows
the locations of all characters in the record, and corresponds to the example above the
table. Each record structure interprets the characters of the record in its own way,
though some of the interpretations of the characters are identical across all record
types. For example, the characters ffff are interpreted as Row Position in all record
types. While c is a Width Multiplier for Internal Bitmapped Font, Smooth Font, Scalable
Font, and Image record types, it has other interpretations for Bar Code and Graphics
record types.
137
Generating Label Formats
The Header Fields
Each of the fields in the record header is generally described below. Please reference the
detailed descriptions under Record Structure Types for variations. The field name titles
of the following paragraphs are preceded with a reference letter. All characters sent to
the printer within the header fields are ASCII, alphanumeric.
a: Rotation
The first field of a header is a single ASCII character that selects the clockwise
degree of rotation for the data to be printed on a label, where:
1 = 0º; 2 = 90º; 3 = 180º; and, 4 = 270º.
b: Fonts, Bar Codes, Graphics, and Images
The second field (b) determines how the rest of the fields are interpreted, as shown
in the table below.
•
Values 0 through 9 select human-readable fonts. 0 through 8 will select standard
printer fonts; value 9 selects the CG Triumvirate smooth scalable font (internal)
or scalable fonts. When 9 is used to select a scalable font, the font size (font I.D.
number) is chosen by entering a value in the height field eee.
•
Values A through z select bar codes. Values A through T (uppercase) will print bar
codes with human-readable interpretations. Values a through z (lowercase) will
print bar codes only.
•
Value W requires two additional characters to specify the Bar Code/Font ID.
•
A font field value X selects a drawing object (line, box, circle or polygon), and
field value Y is used to print an image stored in a module.
b Font Field Value
Interpretation
0-9
Font
A-T
Bar code with human readable text.
a-z
Bar code without human readable text.
Wxx
Bar code/Font expansion
X
Line, box, polygon, circle
Y
Image
138
Generating Label Formats
c: Width Multiplier
Values 1-9, A-Z, and a-z represent multiplication factors from 1 – 61, respectively.
For human-readable fonts, the width multiplier represents the number of times the
selected font dot tables are multiplied and has no effect on the character height. For
bar codes, this character specifies the wide bar width or ratio at a resolution that is
dependent upon the printer model. See Appendix F for default values.
d: Height Multiplier
The height multiplier has the same range and function as the width multiplier (c), but
vertical. When used in the context of bar codes, this field is the ratio denominator, or
the small bar (module) width. Values 1-9, A-Z, and a-z will give a narrow bar width
of one dot (dot size = 1/printhead resolution) to dots. The narrow bar width
resolution and range are dependent upon the print head resolution; see Appendix K.
A “dot multiplier” command can also be used to change the printed dot size (see
Label Formatting Command “D” and Appendix F).
eee: Bar Code Height (Font Size/Selection)
This field has interpretations dependent upon the value of the font b field, as shown
below.
b Font Field Value
eee Field Range
eee Field Interpretation
0-8
000
Not used – Internal bitmapped font
9
000-999, A04-A72,
S00-S9z, U00-U9z, u00-u9z
Font height; Font selection
A-T
000-999
Bar code height (with human readable)
a-z
000-999
Bar code height
Wxx
000-999
Bar code height (with human readable)
X,Y
000
Not used
ffff: Row Position
The lower left corner of a label is considered the “home position”. The row position
field is a vertical coordinate that determines how far above the home position the
data is to be printed. Field data is interpreted in hundredths of an inch or tenths of
millimeters.
139
Generating Label Formats
gggg: Column Position
This field is a horizontal coordinate that determines how far to the right of “home
position” the data will be printed. Appendix G lists the maximum values of the gggg
field.
hhhh: Optional Scalable Font Height
The height of a scalable font can be specified in two ways: points or dots. To specify
the height in points the first character of the field is a “P” followed by the number of
points, 004 to 999. To specify the size in dots, all four characters must be numeric.
This field must be specified for scalable fonts. (See note below Optional Scalable Font
Width.)
iiii: Optional Scalable Font Width
The width of a scalable font can be specified in two ways, points or dots. To specify
the width in points, the first character of the field is a “P” followed by the number of
points, 004 to 999 points. To specify the size in dots, all four characters must be
numeric. This field must be specified for scalable fonts. See note below.

To ensure that the data stream is portable to other Datamax-O’Neil printers, specify
the font size in points. If the font is specified in dots, it will output differently on
printers with different DPI/MMPI resolutions. There are 72.307 points per 1 inch
(2.847 mm).
jj…j: Data Field
The final field contains the data that will actually be printed on the label. A string of
data can be up to 255 characters in length (except when using the PDF417 bar code,
which may be up to 3000 characters long), ending with a carriage return. Characters
placed in the data field will be printed as long as they fall within the physical range of
the print head. Consult Appendix K for a listing by printer.
Record Structure Types
Each of the six record types has its own field structure and is described in the following
section. The record types allow quick reference to the field types and their valid data
inputs for the field. There are similar, but unique, record structures for each: internal,
bitmapped fonts, internal smooth fonts, downloaded bitmapped fonts, scalable fonts, bar
codes, images, and graphics.
140
Generating Label Formats
1: Internal Bitmapped Fonts
This record type is used for internal bitmapped fonts (see Appendix C, Tables C-1
through C-5).
When a 0 through 8 is entered in field b, then the height field eee is not used. The
bitmapped fonts include 8 different fonts (see Appendix C). The character mapping
for these fonts is shown in Appendix A, or a subset thereof.
Field
Valid Inputs
Meaning
a
1, 2, 3 and 4
Rotation
b
0 to 8 (see Appendix C).
Font
c
1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z
Width Multiplier
d
1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z
Height Multiplier
000
N/A
ffff
0000 to 9999
Row
gggg
0000 to 9999 Dependent upon printer. See Appendix K.
jj…j
Valid ASCII character string up to 255 characters, followed by
a termination character.
eee
Column
Data
2: Smooth Font, Font Modules, and Downloaded Bitmapped Fonts
This record type is used for internal smooth fonts (CG Triumvirate – see Table below)
or a bitmapped font downloaded to a memory module; see Font Loading Commands.
When a 9 is entered in field b, then the height field eee determines the font. The
internal smooth font has up to 13 font sizes (see Appendix C). Values 100 through
999 select individual fonts stored on DRAM, or Flash memory. These include
downloaded bitmapped fonts. Use eee values of 096 – 099 for Kanji fonts, if
equipped (see Appendix I). The character mapping is shown in Appendix A.
Field
Valid Inputs
Meaning
a
1, 2, 3 and 4
Rotation
b
9
c
1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z
Width Multiplier
d
1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z
Height Multiplier
Fixed Value
(continued)
141
Generating Label Formats
Field
eee
Valid Inputs
000 to 999 (000 to 099 Reserved), A04 to A72, x04 – x72,
Where x is an upper case letter; see Appendix H.
ffff
0000 to 9999
gggg
0000 to 9999 Dependent upon printer. See Appendix K.
jj…j
Valid ASCII character string up to 255 characters followed by a
termination character.
Meaning
Font / Size
Row
Column
Data
3: Scalable Fonts
The Smooth Scalable Font Technology is licensed from AGFA. Both Microtype and
TrueType (.TTF) Scalable Font file formats are supported. The eee field identifies
the scalable font*, and data type – normal (binary) or Hex ASCII. Uppercase S or U
– binary, lowercase u – Hex ASCII (see Appendix H). Values S00 to S9z, and U00 to
U9z (u00 to u9z), select a scalable font. S00, S01 and SAx are used for the
standard internal (resident) fonts.
Field
Valid Inputs
Meaning
a
1, 2, 3 and 4
b
9
c
1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z
Width Multiplier
d
1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z
Height Multiplier
S00 to Szz, U00-Uzz, u00-uzz
Font Data Type
eee
Rotation
Fixed Value
ffff
0000 to 9999
Row
gggg
Dependent upon printer. See Appendix K.
hhhh
P004-P999, 0016-4163**
Character Height;
points, dots
iiii
P004-P999, 0014-4163**
Character Width;
points, dots
jj…j
Valid ASCII character string up to 255 characters followed by a
termination character.
Column
Data
* The actual scalable font available is depending on your printer model and equipped options.
**Character sizes are resolution dependent, as indicated in the following table.
142
Generating Label Formats
Character size (dots)
Print head
Resolution (DPI)

Width
Height
203
16-2817
16-2817
300
14-4163
16-4163
400
22-5550
22-5550
600
33-8325
33-8325
A scalable font cache must be allocated to print. Minimum cache size is 15. The
double byte fonts require five units of additional cache.
4: Bar Codes
Valid inputs for the bar code field b are letters: uppercase letters will print a humanreadable text below the bar code; lowercase letters will only print the bar code. For
example, entering a “p” in the b field selects the Postnet bar code. Because the
Postnet font does not provide human-readable data, the uppercase P is not valid.
Other bar codes without a human-readable counterpart include u (MaxiCode) and z
(PDF417) – for additional model-specific restrictions see Appendix F.
For module-based bar codes, field d is the narrow bar width in dots (bar code module
size). For consistent results in all rotations for bar codes of this type, field d and field
c must have the same value. For ratio-based bar codes field c is the wide bar width in
dots (the numerator); field d is the narrow bar width in dots (the denominator). See
Appendix G for specific bar code information and variations in record format field
usage.
The eee height field represents the bar code (symbol) height. The valid range (001 to
999) translates to bar heights ranging from .01 inch (.254 mm) to 9.99 inches (253.7
mm). For bar codes that require additional specified parameters, use the jj…j data
field as the location for these parameters. See the specific bar code for details in
Appendix G.
Field
Valid Inputs
Meaning
1, 2, 3 and 4
Rotation
A to Z and a to z (except P, u, v, z), or Wna where n is 1 to
9 and a is A to S and a to s. No n is an implied 1.
Bar Code
c
1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z
Wide Bar
d
1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z
Narrow Bar
a
b [bb]
(continued)
143
Generating Label Formats
Field
eee
Valid Inputs
001 to 999
Symbol Height
ffff
0000 to 9999
gggg
See Appendix K.
jj…j
Valid ASCII character string up to 255 characters followed
by a termination character.

Meaning
Row
Column
Data
Placing 0 (zero) in both c and d will result in the default bar code ratio or module
size. Placing 000 (zero) in the symbol height field will result in the default bar code
height; see Appendix F for defaults.
5: Images
An image record is used to print an image that is stored in a memory module.
Images can be printed only in Rotation 1; see <STX>I.
Field
Valid Inputs
Meaning
a
1
Fixed Value
b
Y
Image
c
1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z
Width Multiplier
d
1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z
Height Multiplier
eee
000
Fixed Value
ffff
0000 to 9999
Row
gggg
See Appendix K.
jj…j
ASCII string, up to 16 characters followed by a termination
character.
Column
Image Name
6: Graphics
Using graphics, the printer can produce lines, boxes, polygons, and circles. This
function is selected by entering an X in field b. The values entered in the data field
determine the sizes and shapes of the objects to be drawn. Forms can be created
using shaded boxes, complex logos, or even a simple diagonal line without the need
to download a graphics file to the printer. Generate each kind of graphic as described
below.
144
Generating Label Formats
Lines and Boxes
Lines and boxes are drawn by values that determine column and row starting
position, length, width, and wall thickness of the line or box (see Appendix K).
Depending on the printer’s mode, all measurements are interpreted as inches/100
or millimeters/10 (see <STX>m). The data field jj…j is used to describe the line or
box dimensions.
Segment
Meaning
a
1
Fixed value
b
X
Line / Box
c
1
Fixed Value
d
1
Fixed Value
eee
000
Fixed Value
ffff
0000 to 9999
gggg
0000-9999; see Appendix K.
jj…j
Lhhhvvv
lhhhhvvvv
Bhhhvvvbbbsss
bhhhhvvvvbbbbssss
Line*:
Row
Lhhhvvv
Where:
L
hhh
vvv
Line**:
= “L” and specifies line drawing;
= horizontal width of line; and,
= vertical height of line.
lhhhhvvvv
Where:
l
hhhh
vvvv
Box***:
= “l” and specifies line drawing;
= horizontal width of line; and,
= vertical height of line.
Bhhhvvvbbbsss
Where:
Box****:
Where:

Valid Inputs
B
hhh
vvv
bbb
sss
=
=
=
=
=
“B” and specifies box drawing;
horizontal width of box;
vertical height of box;
thickness of bottom and top box edges; and,
thickness of box sides.
bhhhhvvvvbbbbssss
b
hhhh
vvvv
bbbb
ssss
=
=
=
=
=
“b” and specifies box drawing;
horizontal width of box;
vertical height of box;
thickness of bottom and top box edges; and,
thickness of box sides.
Boxes are hollow, while lines can be understood as filled-in boxes.
145
Column
Line*
Line**
Box***
Box****
Generating Label Formats
Polygons
Polygons are created by defining the positions of the corners, specifying a
number of data points that represent the vertices of the object, which can range
from a simple line (two points), or a triangle (three points), to any free-form
outline. Polygons may be filled with a variety of different patterns. All row/column
specifiers are interpreted as inches/100 or millimeters/10 depending on the
printer mode, (see <STX>m).
Record structure for a polygon (spaces added for readability):
1 X 11 ppp rrrr cccc P ppp bbbb rrrr cccc rrrr cccc … <CR>
Where:
1
Rotation (must be 1)
ppp
Fixed Value (001)
X
Graphic field ID
bbbb
Fixed Value (0001)
1
Multiplier (must be 1)
rrrr
Row of point 2
1
Multiplier (must be 1)
cccc
Column of point 2
ppp
Fill pattern #
rrrr
Row of point 3
rrrr
Row of point 1
cccc
Column of point 3
cccc
Column of point 1
P
Polygon ID (Fixed Value)

The points must be specified in the order to be drawn; the last point specified is
automatically connected to the first point to close the polygon. If only two points
are specified, a single line will be drawn. See Label Formatting Command A.
…
<CR>
Additional points
Termination character
Circles
A circle is created by defining by its center point and radius. Circles can be filled
with a variety of different patterns. Row, column, and radius are interpreted as
inches (100) or millimeters (10) depending on printer mode.
Record structure for a circle (spaces have been added for readability):
1 X 11 fff rrrr cccc C ppp bbbb rrrr <CR>
Where:
146
Generating Label Formats
1
Rotation (must be 1)
cccc
Column of the center point
X
Graphic field
C
Circle ID (Fixed Value)
1
Multiplier (must be 1)
ppp
Fixed Value (001)
1
Multiplier (must be 1)
bbbb
Fixed Value (0001)
fff
Fill pattern number
rrrr
Radius of the circle
rrrr
Row of the center point
<CR>
Termination character
Fill Patterns
Pattern Number
Description
0
No Pattern
1
Solid Black
2
6% Black
3
12% Black
4
25% Black
5
38% Black
6
50% Black
7
Diamonds
8
Circles
9
Right Diagonal Lines
10
Left Diagonal Lines
11
Grid
147
Example
Generating Label Formats
Examples (with spaces added for readability):
1: Triangle
The record:
1 X 11 000 0010 0010 P 001 0001 0040 0025 0010 0040<CR>
Produces a triangle with no fill pattern:
(row 0040, column 0025)
(row 0010, column 0010)
(row 0010, column 0040)
2: Rectangle with Fill
The record:
1 X 11 004 0010 0010 P 001 0001 0050 0010 0050 0200 0010 0200<CR>
Produces a rectangle filled with pattern 4 (25% Black):
(row 0010, column 0010)
(row 0050, column 0200)
3: Circle
The record:
1 X 11 000 0100 0100 C 001 0001 0025<CR>
Produces a circle centered at row 0100, column 0100 with a radius of 0025 and
no fill pattern:
4: Circle with Fill
The record:
1 X 11 009 0100 0100 C 001 0001 0025<CR>
Produces a circle centered at row 0100, column 0100 with a radius of 0025 and
filled with pattern 9 (right diagonal lines):
148
Generating Label Formats
Advanced Format Attributes
Two different advanced formatting attributes extend the text presentation capabilities.
The first format attribute allows a set of label format records to make a state change
that modifies the font attributes of any following DPL text records. The second format
attribute provides a means of inserting text and font formatting commands directly into
the DPL data stream via a command delimiter structure. All label formats begin by
default with attributes disabled.
The table below represents the current list of font attributes available to the user. Note
that these commands are delimited by the \<xxx> sequence (where xxx is from the list
below).
Command
Units
FB
+/-
Turns on or off font boldfacing.
FI
+/-
Turns on or off font italicization.
FU
+/-
Turns on or off underlining of string.
FPn
Points
Specifies the vertical point size of the
following text relative to the base line.
FSn
Points
Specifies the horizontal point size of the
following text relative to the base line.
FR[+/-]n

Degrees
Purpose
Specifies the rotation of the base line,
relative to the original print direction of the
record.
Notes
minus “-” is disable; or,
plus “+” is enable
If a + or – precedes the
numeric value, then the
direction is relative to the
current print direction.
These commands are only valid for scalable fonts, such as Internal Font 9, S00, S01, or
downloaded TrueType scalable fonts. (Some models have limited standard font sets and
capabilities; see the notes below for applicability of commands and consult the
appropriate Operator’s Manual for available standard and optional font sets.)
For example, the first format attribute command can be illustrated as follows. The text
below and the resulting label are examples of a current DPL format:
149
Generating Label Formats
<STX>L
D11
1911S0102600040P018P018Old
1911S0102000040P018P018Old
1911S0101400040P018P018Old
1911S0100800040P018P018Old
1911S0100200040P018P018Old
E
DPL
DPL
DPL
DPL
DPL
World
World
World
World
World
If the DPL format is modified as follows, the resulting label is printed:
<STX>L
D11
FA+
FB+
1911S0102600040P018P018New
FU+I+
1911S0102000040P018P018New
FI-U+B1911S0101400040P018P018New
FU-B+
1911S0100800040P018P018New
FB+I+U+
1911S0100200040P018P018New
FB-U-IE
DPL World
DPL World
DPL World
DPL World
DPL World
Note that if all format commands after the first FB+ were deleted the entire label would
have been printed with bold scalable fonts. This is what is meant by a state change.
Once invoked, that command is in affect until turned off or the label format is
terminated with the “E” “s” or the “X” command.
The second format attribute command is inserted into the text data stream and
delimited by the angle brackets “<>“ This structure takes the form of \<command>. An
example of this command is as follows:
150
Generating Label Formats
<STX>L
D11
A2
FA+
1911S0105000020P018P018DPL allows \<FP36FS36>FONT\<FS10FP10> sizes
\<FS8FP12>in the string
1911S0103500100P018P018\<FR80>D\<FR-5>P\<FR-5>L\<FR-5> \<FR-5>l\<FR5>e\<FR->t\<FR-5>s\<FR-5> \<FR-5>y\<FR-5>o\<FR-5>u\<FR-5> \<FR-5>w\<FR5>r\<FR-5>i\<FR-5>t\<FR-5>e\<FR-5> \<FR-5>i\<FR-5>n\<FR-5> \<FR-5>c\<FR5>i\<FR-5>r\<FR-5>c\<FR-5>l\<FR-5>e\<FR-5>s\<FR-5> \<FR-5>t\<FR-5>o\<FR5>o\<FR-5>!
1911S0102400040P018P018\<FR+45>DPL allows \<FB+>Rotations\<FB-FR-90> in
the string
1911S0102000040P018P018DPL allows \<FB+>BOLD\<FB-> in the string
FU+
1911S0101400040P018P012DPL allows \<FI+>ITALICS\<FI-> in the string
FI+U1911S0101000040P018P012DPL allows \<FB+I+>COMBINATIONS\<FB-I-> in the
string
FB+I1911S0100600040P018P018DPL allows \<FB+>BOLD\<FB-> in the string
FU+I+
1911S0100200040P018P018DPL allows \<FB+>BOLD\<FB-> in the string
FB-U-IE
The graphic to the left is an example of the output from this
DPL command stream. The user has the ability to change the
point and set size of the font within the DPL command record.
In addition, the angle of the baseline may be specified relative
to the current orientation of the record. (For example, the
command \<FR+45> will rotate the baseline forty five degrees
in the positive direction from the default print direction.)

Refer to Section 8 for more information regarding the DPL
record format for a scalable font text string.
151
Generating Label Formats
152
Appendix A – ASCII Control Chart
Appendix A
ASCII Control Chart
Ctrl @
Ctrl A
Ctrl B
Ctrl C
Ctrl D
Ctrl E
Ctrl F
Ctrl G
Ctrl H
Ctrl I
Ctrl J
Ctrl K
Ctrl L
Ctrl M
Ctrl N
Ctrl O
Ctrl P
Ctrl Q
Ctrl R
Ctrl S
Ctrl T
Ctrl U
Ctrl V
Ctrl W
Ctrl X
Ctrl Y
Ctrl Z
Ctrl [
Ctrl \
Ctrl ]
Ctrl ^
Ctrl _
Char
Dec
Hex
Char
Dec
Hex
Char
Dec
Hex
Char
Dec
Hex
NUL
SOH
STX
EXT
EOT
ENQ
ACK
BEL
BS
HT
LF
VT
FF
CR
SO
SI
DLE
DC1
DC2
DC3
DC4
NAK
SYN
ETB
CAN
EM
SUB
ESC
FS
GS
RS
US
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
0A
0B
0C
0D
0E
0F
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
1A
1B
1C
1D
1E
1F
!
“
#
$
%
&
Ô
(
)
*
+
,
.
/
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
;
<
=
>
?
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
2A
2B
2C
2D
2E
2F
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
3B
3C
3D
3E
3F
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
\
]
^
_
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
4A
4B
4C
4D
4E
4F
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
5A
5B
5C
5D
5E
5F
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
p
q
r
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
|
}
~
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
7A
7B
7C
7D
7E
7F
(continued)
153
Appendix A – ASCII Control Chart
Char
Dec
Hex
Char
Dec
Hex
Ç
ü
é
â
ä
à
å
ç
ê
ë
è
ï
î
ì
Ä
Å
É
æ
Æ
ô
ö
ò
û
ù
ÿ
Ö
Ü
ø
£
Ø
x
ƒ
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
8A
8B
8C
8D
8E
8F
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
9A
9B
9C
9D
9E
9F
á
í
ó
ú
ñ
Ñ
ª
°
¿
®
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
AA
AB
AC
AD
AE
AF
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
BA
BB
BC
BD
BE
BF

1/2
1/4
¡
¯
²
³
´
Á
Â
À
©
¹
»
¢
¥
Char
ã
Ã
ð
Ð
Ê
Ë
È
Í
Î
Ï
Ì
Dec
Hex
Char
Dec
Hex
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
C0
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
CA
CB
CC
CD
CE
CF
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
DA
DB
DC
DD
DE
DF
Ó
ß
Ô
Ò
õ
Õ
µ
þ
Þ
Ú
Û
Ù
ý
Ý
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
E0
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
EA
EB
EC
ED
EE
EF
F0
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
FA
FB
FC
FD
FE
FF
±
3/4
÷
¸
º
¨
·
• For hardware handshake XON/XOFF commands:
o XON
o XOFF
=Ctrl Q (DC1)
=Ctrl S (DC3)
• The Euro currency character ( ) has been added to the table above at 255 (FF) as a
Datamax-O’Neil standard for resident bitmapped fonts 0,1,2,3,4,5,6, and 9 (CG
Triumvirate).
154
Appendix B – Sample Programs
Appendix B
Sample Programs
“C” Language Program
The following sample “C” program is included for reference. The graphic below shows
the output generated by this program.
/ DMX SERIES Sample C program

/
# include <stdio.h>
main ()
{
char pcs = “590”;
char desc = “10K OHM 1/4 WATT”;
fputs (“DMX Printer Test Program\n”, stdout);
fputs (“\x02L\n”, stdaux);
fputs (“H07\n” stdaux);
fputs (“D11\n”, stdaux);
/ STX L – Enter Label
Formatting /
/ Enter Heat Setting of 7/
/ Set Width and Height Dot
Size /
fprintf (stdaux, “191108010000025%s\n”,desc);/ Select smooth Font

/
fprintf (stdaux, “1a6210000000050%sPCS\n”, pcs);/ Select Bar code
type ‘a’ /
fputs (“E\n”, stdaux);
/ End Label format mode and
print/
}
10K OHM 1/4 WATT
155
Appendix B – Sample Programs
ASCII text file
The following ASCII text file will also generate the label shown on the previous page.
^BL
H07
D11
19110080100002510K OHM 1/4 WATT<CR>
1a6210000000050590PCS<CR>
E<CR>
VB Application Generating DPL
The following sample is a Visual Basic program that displays a database record on the
screen. A user can scroll through the records and then print a selected one. Five bar
codes are printed along with data fields and headings.
‘Printer DPL Controls
Dim CharSet As String‘<STX> byte
Const StartLabel = “L”
Const EndLabel = “E”
Const PrintDensity = “D11”
‘Printer DPL Data to position dynamic information on label
Const OrderTxt = “191100704150010”‘font 9, 24 pt
Const OrderBC = “1a6205004200120”
Const CustomerTxt = “191100603600010”
Const
Const
Const
Const
Item1NO = “191100403250010”
Item1BC = “1a6204002870010”
Item1Txt = “191100402690010”
Item1Qty = “191100603070260”
‘DPL Fixed Items on label
Const Itm1 = “191100303400010Item #”
Const Qty1 = “191100303400250Quantity”
Const Boxsize = “B065035002002”
Const BoxPos1 = “1X1100003050240”
Const Image1 = “1Y3300004750010SLANT1”
Dim Fixed As String
‘Item Variables
Dim Item1 As String
Dim PrintLabel As String
Dim OrderData As String
‘Print label by clicking print button with the mouse
Private Sub cmdPrint_Click()
156
Appendix B – Sample Programs
‘Concatenate all the dynamic data fields with the constant header
strings, terminated with <cr> Chr$(13)
OrderData = OrderTxt & txtOrderNo.Text & Chr$(13) & OrderBC &
txtOrderNo.Text & Chr$(13) & CustomerTxt & txtCustomer.Text
Item1 = Item1NO & txtItem1.Text & Chr$(13) & Item1BC &
txtItem1.Text & Chr$(13) & Item1Txt & txtItem1Desc.Text & Chr$(13)
& Item1Qty & txtItem1Qty.Text
‘Concatinate entire label format and send out serial port
PrintLabel = CharSet & MaxLength & Chr$(13) & CharSet &
StartLabel & Chr$(13) & PrintDensity & Chr$(13) & Image1 & Chr$(13)
& OrderData & Chr$(13) & Item1 & Chr$(13) & Fixed & Chr$(13) &
EndLabel
Comm1.Output = PrintLabelEnd Sub
‘Display the record form on the screen
Private Sub Form_Load()
Fixed = Itm1 & Chr$(13) & Chr$(13) & Qty1 & Chr$(13) & Chr$(13)
& BoxPos1 & Boxsize & Chr$(13)
CharSet = Chr$(126) ‘Alternate <stx> character ~
MComm.PortOpen = 1‘Open the serial port
End Sub
‘Exit the program by clicking Exit button with the mouse
Private Sub cmdExit_Click()
Comm1.PortOpen = 0‘Close down the serial port
End
End Sub
VB Application interfacing via Windows Driver
Create a form similar to the one shown here.
VERSION 5.00
Begin VB.Form Form1
Caption
=
ClientHeight
=
ClientLeft
=
ClientTop
=
ClientWidth
=
LinkTopic
=
MaxButton
=
MinButton
=
ScaleHeight
=
ScaleWidth
=
“Datamax Test Print”
1065
60
345
2325
“Form1”
0
‘False
0
‘False
1065
2325
157
Appendix B – Sample Programs
StartUpPosition =
3 ‘Windows Default
Begin VB.ComboBox cmboFonts
Height
=
315
Left
=
90
TabIndex
=
2
Text
=
“Font List”
Top
=
45
Width
=
2130
End
Begin VB.CommandButton cmdExit
Caption
=
“Quit”
Height
=
465
Left
=
1350
TabIndex
=
1
Top
=
495
Width
=
825
End
Begin VB.CommandButton cmdPrint
Caption
=
“Print”
Height
=
465
Left
=
90
TabIndex
=
0
Top
=
495
Width
=
870
End
End
Attribute VB_Name = “Form1”
Attribute VB_GlobalNameSpace = False
Attribute VB_Creatable = False
Attribute VB_PredeclaredId = True
Attribute VB_Exposed = False
‘Print label by clicking print button with the mouse
Private Sub cmdPrint_Click()
‘font name as seen in application font list box
‘if not found, driver will inform GDI to generate an
‘image that will be downloaded
Printer.FontName = cmboFonts.Text
‘1,440 twips equals one inch
Printer.Height = 6480
‘4.5 inches in twips
Printer.Width = 5760
‘4 inches in twips
Printer.CurrentX = 1440
‘1 inch (column position)
Printer.CurrentY = 2160
‘2 inches (row position)
Printer.Print “0123456789”
Printer.EndDoc
End Sub
Private Sub Form_Load()
Dim X As Printer
Dim I As Integer ‘Used for the font list
‘ search for printer queue name / driver name
For Each X In Printers
If X.DeviceName = “Datamax I-4206” Then ‘printer found
‘ Set printer as system default.
Set Printer = X
For I = 0 To Printer.FontCount - 1 ‘ Determine number of fonts.
158
Appendix B – Sample Programs
cmboFonts.AddItem Printer.Fonts(I)
‘ Put each font into list
box.
Next I
Exit For
End If
Next
End Sub
‘Exit the program and shut down the serial port
‘by clicking Exit button with the mouse
Private Sub cmdExit_Click()
End
End Sub
When the program is run, the combo box should be populated with the available fonts as shown
below.
VB Application to Send Raw Data via Printer Driver
This is a sample Visual Basic program that checks for any printer driver attached to
“LPT1”. If one is installed then a DPL file can be printed via the print driver. **Note that
this does not have to be a Datamax-O’Neil DPL print driver. DPL is created by the
application and sent to LPT1.
To begin, a global variable called SelPrinter must be defined as a string. Then use the
following code to create a .frm file.
VERSION 5.00
Object = “{F9043C88-F6F2-101A-A3C9-08002B2F49FB}#1.2#0”; “comdlg32.ocx”
Begin VB.Form Form1
Caption
=
“Form1”
ClientHeight
=
1290
ClientLeft
=
165
ClientTop
=
735
ClientWidth
=
3750
LinkTopic
=
“Form1”
MaxButton
=
0
‘False
MinButton
=
0
‘False
ScaleHeight
=
1290
ScaleWidth
=
3750
StartUpPosition =
3 ‘Windows Default
Begin MSComDlg.CommonDialog CommonDialog1
Left
=
1635
159
Appendix B – Sample Programs
Top
=
765
_ExtentX
=
847
_ExtentY
=
847
_Version
=
393216
End
Begin VB.CommandButton cmdClose
Cancel
=
-1 ‘True
Caption
=
“Close”
Height
=
372
Left
=
2400
TabIndex
=
3
Top
=
735
Width
=
972
End
Begin VB.CommandButton cmdStoreImage
Caption
=
“Print”
Default
=
-1 ‘True
Height
=
372
Left
=
240
TabIndex
=
2
Top
=
735
Width
=
972
End
Begin VB.TextBox txtFile
Height
=
288
Left
=
120
TabIndex
=
1
Top
=
360
Width
=
3492
End
Begin VB.Label Label1
Caption
=
“File Name”
Height
=
255
Left
=
120
TabIndex
=
0
Top
=
135
Width
=
1455
End
Begin VB.Menu File
Caption
=
“&File”
Begin VB.Menu open
Caption
=
“&Open”
End
Begin VB.Menu exit
Caption
=
“&Exit”
Shortcut
=
^Q
End
End
End
Attribute VB_Name = “Form1”
Attribute VB_GlobalNameSpace = False
Attribute VB_Creatable = False
Attribute VB_PredeclaredId = True
Attribute VB_Exposed = False
Option Explicit
‘**********************************
#If Win32 Then
160
Appendix B – Sample Programs
Private Type DOC_INFO_1
pDocName As String
pOutputFile As String
pDatatype As String
End Type
#End If ‘WIN32 Types
‘**********************************
‘** Function Declarations:
#If Win32 Then
Private Declare Function OpenPrinter& Lib “winspool.drv” Alias “OpenPrinterA”
(ByVal pPrinterName As String, phPrinter As Long, ByVal pDefault As Long) ‘
Third param changed to long
Private Declare Function StartDocPrinter& Lib “winspool.drv” Alias
“StartDocPrinterA” (ByVal hPrinter As Long, ByVal Level As Long, pDocInfo As
DOC_INFO_1)
Private Declare Function StartPagePrinter& Lib “winspool.drv” (ByVal hPrinter
As Long)
Private Declare Function WritePrinter& Lib “winspool.drv” (ByVal hPrinter As
Long, pBuf As Any, ByVal cdBuf As Long, pcWritten As Long)
Private Declare Function EndDocPrinter& Lib “winspool.drv” (ByVal hPrinter As
Long)
Private Declare Function EndPagePrinter& Lib “winspool.drv” (ByVal hPrinter
As Long)
Private Declare Function ClosePrinter& Lib “winspool.drv” (ByVal hPrinter As
Long)
#End If ‘WIN32
Dim ch As String * 1, f1 As Integer, loadfile As String
Private Sub cmdOpenFile_Click()
On Error GoTo ErrHandler
‘ Set Filters
CommonDialog1.Filter = “All Files (*.*)|*.*”
‘Specify Default Filter
CommonDialog1.FilterIndex = 1
‘Display Open dialog box
CommonDialog1.ShowOpen
loadfile = CommonDialog1.FileName
Label2.Caption = loadfile
Exit Sub
ErrHandler:
Exit Sub
End Sub
Private Sub cmdStoreImage_Click()
Dim hPrinter&
Dim jobid&
Dim res&
Dim written&
Dim printdata$
Dim docinfo As DOC_INFO_1
loadfile = Form1.txtFile.Text
If loadfile = ““ Then
MsgBox “You must Open a file to send”, vbExclamation
161
Appendix B – Sample Programs
Exit Sub
End If
‘ Open file.
f1 = FreeFile
Open loadfile For Binary As f1
‘ Open printer for printing
res& = OpenPrinter(SelPrinter, hPrinter, 0)
If res = 0 Then
MsgBox “Unable to open the printer”
Exit Sub
End If
docinfo.pDocName = “MyDoc”
docinfo.pOutputFile = vbNullString
docinfo.pDatatype = vbNullString
jobid = StartDocPrinter(hPrinter, 1, docinfo)
Call StartPagePrinter(hPrinter)
Call WritePrinter(hPrinter, ByVal printdata$, Len(printdata$), written)
While Not EOF(1)
Get #f1, , ch
printdata$ = ch
Call WritePrinter(hPrinter, ByVal printdata$, Len(printdata$),
written)
Wend
Call EndPagePrinter(hPrinter)
Call EndDocPrinter(hPrinter)
Call ClosePrinter(hPrinter) ‘ Close when done
‘ Close file
Close #1
MsgBox “File sent to print spooler.”, vbExclamation
End Sub
Private Sub cmdClose_Click()
Unload Me
End Sub
Private Sub exit_Click()
End
End Sub
Private Sub Form_Load()
Dim X As Printer
‘ search for printer queue name / driver name
For Each X In Printers
If X.Port = “LPT1:” Then ‘printer found
‘ Set printer as system default.
SelPrinter = X.DeviceName
Exit For
End If
Next
End Sub
Private Sub lpt2_Click()
End Sub
162
Appendix B – Sample Programs
Private Sub open_Click()
CommonDialog1.ShowOpen
loadfile = CommonDialog1.FileName
txtFile.Text = loadfile
End Sub
Private Sub Printer_Click()
CommonDialog1.ShowPrinter
End Sub
This will create the form pictured below:

It may be necessary to remove and reinsert the common dialog control due to Windows®
registry issues.
163
Appendix B – Sample Programs
164
Appendix C – Available Fonts
Appendix C
Available Fonts – Sizes, References, and Samples
All character bitmapped fonts available on the printers are described in this section. Each
font has a name (Font ID) associated with it for use in programming. Use the Font Number
in field b of the Format Record header to cause the printer to use the corresponding font.
Fonts 0 through 8 use the slash zero (Ø) conventions for distinguishing between the zero
and the alphabetic O. The slash can be removed with the label formatting command z.
These fonts are non-proportional (monospaced). Therefore, all of the characters take up the
same amount of space when printed. This is helpful when using variable data in a fixed
area. The sizes of these fonts are shown on the following pages.
The CG Triumvirate font number 9 is a proportional font. Each character will take up a
different amount of space when printed. For example, the letter W will be wider than the
letter I.
Font
Number
Valid ASCII Characters (decimal)
0
32-127, 255
1
32-168, 171, 172, 225, 255
2
32-168, 171, 172, 225, 255
3
32, 35-38, 40-58, 65-90, 128, 142-144, 146, 153, 154, 156, 157,
165, 168, 225, 255
4
32, 35-38, 40-58, 65-90, 128, 142-144, 146, 153, 154, 156, 157,
165, 168, 225, 255
5
32, 35-38, 40-58, 65-90, 128, 142-144, 146, 153, 154, 156, 157,
165, 168, 225, 255
6
32, 35-38, 40-58, 65-90, 128, 142-144, 146, 153, 154, 156, 157,
165, 168, 225, 255
7
32-126
8
32, 48-57, 60, 62, 67, 69, 78, 83, 84, 88, 90
9
Dependent upon selected symbol set; see Appendix H.
165
Use with Record
Structure Type
Internal
Bitmapped
Fonts
Scalable Font
Appendix C – Available Fonts
Font sizes are dependent upon the print head resolution of the printer used. The tables
below contain a listing of the font sizes by resolution with dimensions given in dots.
Font
Font
Font
Font
Font
Font
Font
Font
Font
Font
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Font
Font
Font
Font
Font
Font
Font
Font
Font
Font
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Font
Font
Font
Font
Font
Font
Font
Font
Font
Font
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Height
Width
Spacing
Point Size
7
13
18
27
36
52
64
32
28
5
7
10
14
18
18
32
15
15
1
2
2
2
3
3
4
5
5
2.5
4.6
6.4
9.6
12.8
18.4
22.7
11.3
9.9
Height
Width
Spacing
Point Size
10
19
27
40
53
77
95
47
41
7
10
15
21
27
27
47
22
22
1
3
3
3
4
4
6
7
7
2.4
4.6
6.5
9.6
12.7
18.5
22.8
11.3
9.8
Height
Width
Spacing
Point Size
14
26
36
54
72
104
128
64
56
10
14
20
28
36
36
64
30
30
2
4
4
4
6
6
8
10
10
2.5
4.6
6.4
9.6
12.8
18.4
22.7
11.3
9.9
166
Appendix C – Available Fonts
Font
Font
Font
Font
Font
Font
Font
Font
Font
Font
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Height
Width
Spacing
Point Size
20
38
54
80
106
154
190
94
82
14
20
30
42
54
54
94
44
44
2
6
6
6
8
8
12
14
14
2.4
4.6
6.5
9.6
12.7
18.5
22.8
11.3
9.8
Internal Smooth Font 9 (Smooth Font) Point Size Specifiers
Label format records with font code 9 (in Format Record header field b) can specify any of
the font sizes in the leftmost column of the table below. The corresponding specification in
either column labeled Ann or 0nn is used in the font size/selection (eee height) field to
select the desired font size. Optional font sets may contain subsets of those described here.
For an optional font set that generates these fonts via scalable font technology, the
character mapping for this font is the selected scalable symbol set (see Appendix E).
In the sample format below, a 300 DPI printer will use 4-point smooth font to produce a
printed label with the words “four point font”. Sample format:
<STX>L<CR>
1911A0400100010four point font<CR>
E<CR>
Point Size
Smooth Font 9 Font Size Specification Syntax
Ann
203 DPI
300, 400, & 600 DPI
4
5
6
A06
8
A08
10
A10
12
A12
14
A14
18
A18
24
A24
30
A30
36
A36
48
A48
72
[1]
Available at 300 DPI and greater print resolutions only.
167
A04
A05
A06
A08
A10
A12
A14
A18
A24
A30
A36
A48
A72
0nn
000 [1]
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
-
Appendix C – Available Fonts
Internal Bitmapped and Smooth Font Samples
The identifying number is used in the Format Record header field b to cause the printer to
use the corresponding font.

The Euro currency character ( ) has been added to Fonts 0 – 6.
The ASCII character DEL ( ) has been added to Fonts 0 – 3.
0: Identifies a 96-character alphanumeric font, uppercase and lowercase.
1: Identifies a 145-character uppercase and lowercase alphanumeric font that includes
desenders and ascenders.
2: Identifies a 138-character alphanumeric upper and lowercase font.
3: Identifies a 62-character alphanumeric uppercase font.
4: Identifies a 62-character alphanumeric uppercase font.
168
Appendix C – Available Fonts
5: Identifies a 62-character alphanumeric upper case font.
6: Identifies a 62-character alphanumeric uppercase font.
7: Identifies a font that prints OCR-A, size I.
8: Identifies a font that prints OCR-B, size III.
169
Appendix C – Available Fonts
9: Identifies the Internal CG Triumvirate font. Point sizes are selected by the number in the
Format Record header eee height field.
170
Appendix D – Reset Codes
Appendix D
Reset Codes
The most common transmitted error codes are:
Uppercase “R”
This code is sent every time the printer is turned “On,” signaling a hardware reset.
Uppercase “T”
This code signals a software reset. A software reset is made by sending the command
sequence to the printer or by performing a reset using the front panel keys.
171
Appendix D – Reset Codes
172
Appendix E – Symbol Sets
Appendix E
Single Byte Symbol Sets
The following tables include some of the sixty-six standard symbol sets. Not all of these
symbol sets can be used with every font. Symbol sets containing the Euro currency
character are W1, WE, WG, WL, WT, WR, and PM; see Appendix I, and the <STX>y
command.
The following sets were produced using a Windows -based PC-compatible with a United
States keyboard properties layout. Results may vary if printing this document using a
different input locale.

00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
A0
B0
C0
D0
E0
F0
0
1
2
(DN) ISO 60: Danish / Norwegian Symbol Set
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
@
P
‘
p
!
1
A
Q
a
q
“
2
B
R
b
r
#
3
C
S
c
s
$
4
D
T
d
t
%
5
E
U
e
u
0
1
2
3
4
0
@
P
‘
p
!
1
A
Q
a
q
“
2
B
R
b
r
#
3
C
S
c
s
“
–
(
ª
‘
¶
“
±
)
º
‘
§
µ
×
«
æ
ˆ
†
‰
»
Æ
¨
*
:
J
Z
j
z
+
;
K
Æ
k
æ
,
<
L
Ø
l
ø
=
M
Å
m
å
.
>
N
^
n
¯
/
?
O
_
o
▒
(DT) DeskTop Symbol Set
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
$
4
D
T
d
t
%
5
E
U
e
u
&
6
F
V
f
v
‡
©

®
o
‚
ð
˜
„
Ð
ˇ
&
6
F
V
f
v
‘
ij
˘
‘
7
G
W
g
w
‘
7
G
W
g
w
¼
¡
IJ
”
173
(
8
H
X
h
x
)
9
I
Y
i
y
(
8
H
X
h
x
)
9
I
Y
i
y
*
:
J
Z
j
z
+
;
K
[
k
{
,
<
L
\
l
|
=
M
]
m
}
.
>
N
^
n
~
/
?
O
o
▒
¢
–
—
þ

=
¾
Pt
t
·
²
£
Œ
,
¤
t
°
¹
ℓ
œ
¯
fi
¬
/
fl
¦
½
¿
…
‘
³
¥
ø
˛
ƒ
þ
l
Ø
'
ß
Þ
Appendix E – Symbol Sets
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
A0
B0
C0
D0
E0
F0
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
A0
B0
C0
D0
E0
F0
0
1
2
3
(E1) ISO 8859/1 Latin 1 Symbol Set
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
0
@
P
‘
p
!
1
A
Q
a
q
“
2
B
R
b
r
#
3
C
S
c
s
$
4
D
T
d
t
%
5
E
U
e
u
&
6
F
V
f
v
‘
7
G
W
g
w
(
8
H
X
h
x
)
9
I
Y
i
y
*
:
J
Z
j
z
+
;
K
[
k
{
,
<
L
\
l
|
=
M
]
m
}
.
>
N
^
n
~
/
?
O
o
▒
¡
±
Á
Ñ
á
ñ
¢
²
Â
Ò
â
ò
£
³
Ã
Ó
ã
ó
¤
´
Ä
Ô
ä
ô
¥
µ
Å
Õ
å
õ
¦
¶
Æ
Ö
æ
ö
§
·
Ç
×
ç
÷
¨
©
ª
°
À
Ð
à
ð
¸
¸
¹
È
Ø
è
ø
É
Ù
é
ù
Ê
Ú
ê
ú
«
»
Ë
Û
ë
û
¬
¼
Ì
Ü
ì
ü
½
Í
Ý
í
ý
®
¾
Î
Þ
î
þ
¯
¿
Ï
ß
ï
ÿ
0
1
2
3
4
(E2) ISO 8859/2 Latin 2 Set
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
@
P
‘
p
!
1
A
Q
a
q
“
2
B
R
b
r
#
3
C
S
c
s
$
4
D
T
d
t
+
;
K
[
k
{
,
<
L
\
l
|
=
M
]
m
}
.
>
N
^
n
~
/
?
O
o
▒
˘
Ł
ł
¤
´
Ä
Ô
ä
ô
·
“
Í
Ý
í
ý
Z
º
Á
Â
Ð
Ó
á
â
ó
%
5
E
U
e
u
&
6
F
V
f
v
Ö
ö
‘
7
G
W
g
w
(
8
H
X
h
x
§
·
Ç
×
ç
÷
¨
¸
174
)
9
I
Y
i
y
¹
É
Ø
*
:
J
Z
j
z
B
C
D
E
F
Š
š
Ë
Ú
é
Ü
ë
ú
ü
z
Î
ß
î
Appendix E – Symbol Sets
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
A0
B0
C0
D0
E0
F0
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
0
1
2
3
4
B
C
D
E
F
0
@
P
‘
p
!
1
A
Q
a
q
“
2
B
R
b
r
#
3
C
S
c
s
$
4
D
T
d
t
%
5
E
U
e
u
&
6
F
V
f
v
‘
7
G
W
g
w
(
8
H
X
h
x
)
9
I
Y
i
y
*
:
J
Z
j
z
+
;
K
[
k
{
,
<
L
\
l
|
=
M
]
m
}
.
>
N
^
n
~
/
?
O
o
▒
¡
±
Á
Ñ
á
ñ
¢
²
Â
Ò
â
ò
£
³
Ã
Ó
ã
ó
¤
´
Ä
Ô
ä
ô
¥
µ
Å
Õ
å
õ
¦
¶
Æ
Ö
æ
ö
§
·
Ç
×
ç
÷
¨
¸
È
Ø
è
ø
¹
É
Ù
é
ù
ª
º
Ê
Ú
ê
ú
«
»
Ë
Û
ë
û
¬
¼
Ì
Ü
ì
ü
½
Í
¾
Î
í
I
î
0
1
2
3
4
(FR) ISO 69: French Symbol Set
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
à
P
µ
p
!
1
A
Q
a
q
“
2
B
R
b
r
£
3
C
S
c
s
$
4
D
T
d
t
*
:
J
Z
j
z
+
;
K
º
k
é
,
<
L
ç
l
ù
=
M
§
m
è
.
>
N
^
n
¨
/
?
O
_
o
▒
0
1
2
3
(GR) ISO 21: German Symbol Set
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
!
“
#
$
%
&
-
.
/
0
§
P
‘
p
1
A
Q
a
q
2
B
R
b
r
3
C
S
c
s
4
D
T
d
t
5
E
U
e
u
6
F
V
f
v
=
M
Ü
m
ü
>
N
^
n
ß
?
O
_
o
▒
0
1
2
3
4
0
§
P
ù
p
!
1
A
Q
a
q
“
2
B
R
b
r
£
3
C
S
c
s
$
4
D
T
d
t
º
À
à
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
(E5) ISO 8859/5 Latin 5 Set
5
6
7
8
9
A
%
5
E
U
e
u
&
6
F
V
f
v
‘
7
G
W
g
w
(
8
H
X
h
x
)
9
I
Y
i
y
¯
¿
Ï
ß
ï
ÿ
(
)
*
+
8
H
X
h
x
9
I
Y
i
y
:
J
Z
j
z
;
K
Ä
k
ä
̗
<
L
Ö
l
ö
(IT) ISO 15: Italian Symbol Set
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
+
;
K
º
k
à
,
<
L
ç
l
ò
=
M
é
m
è
.
>
N
^
n
ì
/
?
O
_
o
▒
%
5
E
U
e
u
&
6
F
V
f
v
̓
7
G
W
g
w
‘
7
G
W
g
w
175
(
8
H
X
h
x
)
9
I
Y
i
y
*
:
J
Z
j
z
Appendix E – Symbol Sets
1
2
3
4
(LG) Legal Symbol Set
5
6
7
8
9
P
°
p
!
1
A
Q
a
q
“
2
B
R
b
r
#
3
C
S
c
s
$
4
D
T
d
t
%
5
E
U
e
u
0
1
2
3
4
0
@
P
`
p
Ä
ê
†
∞
¿
–
‡
!
1
A
Q
a
q
Å
ë
º
±
¡
—
`
Ò
“
2
B
R
b
r
Ç
í
¢
≤
¬
“
‚
Ú
#
3
C
S
c
s
É
ì
£
≥
√
“
„
Û
$
4
D
T
d
t
Ñ
î
§
¥
f
‘
‰
Ù
0
1
2
3
0
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
A0
B0
C0
D0
E0
F0
0
@
0
@
P
`
p
Ç
É
á
░
└
╨
a
≡
!
1
A
Q
a
q
ü
æ
í
▒
┴
╤
ß
±
‘
7
G
W
g
w
(
8
H
X
h
x
)
9
I
Y
i
y
(MC) Macintosh Symbol Set
5
6
7
8
9
%
5
E
U
e
u
Ö
ï
•
µ
≈
‘
Â
&
6
F
V
f
v
Ü
ñ
¶
÷
Ê
ˆ
‘
7
G
W
g
w
á
ó
ß
Σ
«
Á
˜
(
8
H
X
h
x
à
ò
®
»
ÿ
Ë
¯
)
9
I
Y
i
y
â
ô
©
π
…
Ÿ
È
˘
B
C
D
E
F
*
:
J
Z
j
z
+
;
K
[
k
§
,
.
¢
N
l
¶
=
M
]
m
†
n
™
/
?
O
_
o
▒
A
B
C
D
E
F
*
:
J
Z
j
z
ä
ö
™
+
;
K
[
k
{
ã
õ
´
ª
À
¤
Î
º
,
<
L
\
l
|
å
ú
¨
°
Ã
=
M
]
m
}
ç
ù
/
?
O
_
o
<
>
Ï
¸
Ì
¨
.
>
N
^
n
~
é
û
Æ
æ
Œ
fi
Ó
˛
è
ü
Ø
Ø
œ
fl
Ô
ˇ
B
C
♂
E
♫
F



/
?
O
_
o
⌂
Å
ƒ
»
┐
╧
▀
∩
/
Í
˙
(PC) PC-8 Code Page 437 Symbol Set
4
5
6
7
8
9
A

00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
A0
B0
C0
D0
E0
F0
&
6
F
V
f
v
A


!!
¶
§
­
↨
“
2
B
R
b
r
é
Æ
ó
▓
┬
╥
└
#
3
C
S
c
s
â
ô
ú
│
├
╙
π
$
4
D
T
d
t
ä
ö
ñ
┤
─
╘
∑
⌠
%
5
E
U
e
u
à
ò
Ñ
╡
┼
╒
σ
⌡
&
6
F
V
f
v
å
û
ª
╢
╞
╓
µ
÷
‘
7
G
W
g
w
ç
ù
°
╖
╟
╫
Τ
≈
176
(
8
H
X
h
x
ê
ÿ
¿
╕
╚
╪
ф
○
)
9
I
Y
i
y
ë
Ö
⌐
╣
╔
┘
Θ
▪
*
:
J
Z
j
z
è
Ü
¬
║
╩
┌
Ω
▪
+
;
K
[
k
{
ï
¢
½
╗
╦
█
δ
√
L
Ω
Õ
D
♀
∟
,
<
L
\
l
|
î
£
¼
╝
╠
▄
=
M
]
m
}
ì
¥
¡
╜
═
▌
.
>
N
^
n
~
Ä
Pt
«
╛
╬
▐
∞
ф
є
■
n
2
Appendix E – Symbol Sets
0
C0
D0
E0
F0


!!
¶
§
▬
↨
#
3
C
S
c
s
â
ô
ú
│
├
╙
π
$
4
D
T
d
t
ä
ö
ñ
┤
─
╘
∑
⌠
%
5
E
U
e
u
à
ò
Ñ
╡
┼
╒
σ
⌡
&
6
F
V
f
v
å
û
õ
╢
╞
╓
µ
÷
‘
7
G
W
g
w
ç
ù
Õ
╖
╟
╫
Τ
≈
3
4
0
@
P
`
p
Ç
É
á
░
└
╨
a
≡
!
1
A
Q
a
q
ü
æ
í
▒
┴
╤
ß
±
“
2
B
R
b
r
é
Æ
ó
▓
┬
╥
└
0
1
2
0
@
P
`
p
Ç
É
á
░
└
ð
Ó
╸
D
♀
E
♫
F



.
>
N
^
n
~
Ä
×
«
/
?
O
_
o
⌂
“
2
B
R
b
r
é
$
4
D
T
d
t
ä
ö
%
5
E
U
e
u
&
6
F
V
f
v
‘
7
G
W
g
w
ç
í
▒
ó
▓
#
3
C
S
c
s
â
ô
ú
│
ž
┤
Á
Ž
Â
┴
Ð
ß
“
┬
├
Ë
─
┼
ͅ
̌
˘
2
3
4
„
‚
“
“
‘
‘
̇




40
::
50
℘
.
>
N
^
n
~
Ä
Ŀ
³
╛
╬
▐
C
♂
!
1
A
Q
a
q
ü
Ô
̌
/
?
O
_
o
⌂
Å
ŀ
¤
┐
╧
▀
∩
=
M
]
m
}
ì
Ø
¡
╜
═
▌
B

↨
˘

(PE) PC-852 Latin 2 Symbol Set
5
6
7
8
9
A
▬
¯

∟
,
<
L
\
l
|
î
£
ʼn
╝
╠
▄
є
■
§
30
F

ф
¶
00
10
20
+
;
K
[
k
{
ï
ø
ℓ
╗
╦
█
E
♫
∞
!!
1
)
9
I
Y
i
y
ë
Ö
ã
╣
╔
┘
Θ
▪
D
♀
δ
√

0
(
8
H
X
h
x
ê
ÿ
¿
╕
╚
╪
ф
○
C
♂
*
:
J
Z
j
z
è
Ü
Ã
║
╩
┌
Ω
▪

00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
A0
B0
2

00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
A0
B0
C0
D0
E0
F0
1
(PD) PC-8 D/N, Code Page 437N Symbol Set
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
§
(
8
H
X
h
x
ł
╚
Í
Š
÷
Î
š
̧
°
f
60
┌
└
╭
╰
┼
├
─
70
┐
┘
╯
╯
┬
┤
┴
+
;
K
[
k
{
Ü
=
M
]
m
}
╣
║
╗
╝
╔
┘
Ú
¨
╩
┌
╦
█
╠
▄
═
ý
Ý
Ł
╬
»
┓
¤
▀
´

´
A
B
C
D
E
F
™
℠

«
§
»
¶
ℒ
ℓ
‹
›


┃┃


╓
╙
│
⊔
⊓
╖
╜
177
∟
,
<
L
\
l
|
î
2
)
9
I
Y
i
y
ë
Ö
(PI) PI Font Symbol Set
5
6
7
8
9
*
:
J
Z
j
z
n
∥
□
■
◊

▒
Appendix E – Symbol Sets
0
1

00
10
(PM) PC-850 Multilingual Symbol Set (Default Symbol Set)
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C





♂
♀
¶
§
D
E
F



/
?
O
_
o
⌂
Å
ƒ
»




‘
7
G
W
g
w
ç
ù
°
(
8
H
X
h
x
ê
ÿ
¿
)
9
I
Y
i
y
ë
Ö
*
:
J
Z
j
z
è
Ü
+
;
K
[
k
{
ï
ø
½
‚
<
L
\
l
|
î
£
¼
¨
=
M
]
m
}
ì
Ø
¡
·
>
N
^
n
~
Ä
0
@
P
`
p
Ç
É
á
░
!
1
A
Q
a
q
ü
æ
í
▒
“
2
B
R
b
r
é
Æ
ó
▓
#
3
C
S
c
s
â
ô
ú
│
$
4
D
T
d
t
ä
ö
ñ
┤
%
5
E
U
e
u
à
ò
Ñ
▂
&
6
F
V
f
v
å
û
ª
Á
Â
À
©
╗
╝
¥
┐
┴
Ð
┬
Ê
├
Ë
─
È
┼
ı
ĺ
╔
╩
╦
╠
═
Ó
-
ß
±
Ô
=
Ò
¾
õ
¶
Õ
§
μ
÷
┘
Ù
“
┐
Û
.
█
Ú
¹
▄
ý
³
╎
Ý
²
╬
Ì
E0
F0

þ
¸
╚
Î
¤
D0
└
ð
Ã
║
¢
ã
╣
2
3
♥
C
D
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
A0
B0
C0
0
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
A0
B0
C0
D0
E0
F0
1

0
@
P
`
p
Ç
É
á
░
└
╨
a
≡
!
1
A
Q
a
q
ü
æ
í
▒
┴
╤
ß
±
2
B
R
b
r
é
Æ
ó
▓
┬
╥
└
#
3
C
S
c
s
â
ô
ú
│
├
╙
π
Þ
º
┑
(PT) PC-8 TK, Code Page 437T Symbol Set
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B




◘




—
¶
§
$
%
&
‘
(
)
*
+
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
;
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
ä
à
å
ç
ê
ë
è
ï
ö
ò
û
ù
ÿ
Ö
Ü
¢
⌐
ñ
Ñ
ª
°
¬
½
¼
┤
╡
╢
╖
╕
╣
║
╗
─
┼
╞
╟
╚
╔
╩
╦
█
╘
╒
╓
╫
╪
┘
┌
∑
⌠
σ
⌡
µ
÷
Τ
≈
178
ф
○
Θ
▪
Ω
▪
δ
√
×
«
¯
▪
E
F



/
?
O
_
o
⌂
Å
ƒ
»
┐
╧
▀
∩
‚
<
L
\
l
|
î
£
¡
╝
╠
▄
=
M
]
m
}
ì
¥
¡
╜
═
▌
·
>
N
^
n
~
Ä
Pt
«
╛
╬
▐
∞
ф
є
■
n
2
▀
´
Appendix E – Symbol Sets
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
A0
B0
C0
D0
E0
F0
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
(R8) Roman-8 Symbol Set
5
6
7
8
9
0
1
2
3
4
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
@
P
‘
p
!
1
A
Q
a
q
“
2
B
R
b
r
#
3
C
S
c
s
$
4
D
T
d
t
%
5
E
U
e
u
&
6
F
V
f
v
‘
7
G
W
g
w
(
8
H
X
h
x
)
9
I
Y
i
y
*
:
J
Z
j
z
+
;
K
[
k
{
,
<
L
\
l
|
=
M
]
m
}
.
>
N
^
n
~
/
?
O
o
▒
â
Å
Á
Þ
À
Ý
ê
î
Ã
þ
Â
ý
ô
Ø
ã
·
È
º
û
Æ
Ð
µ
Ê
Ç
á
å
ð
¶
Ë
ç
é
Í
Í
¾
Î
Ñ
ó
ø
Ì
—
Ï
ñ
ú
æ
Ó
¼
΄
¡
à
Ä
Ò
½
`
¿
è
ì
Õ
ª
ˆ
“
£
ù
Ü
Š
«
˜
¥
ä
É
š
Û
ƒ
ö
ß
Ÿ
±
£
¢
ü
Ô
ÿ

Ù
§
ë
Ï
Ú
»
0
1
2
3
(SP) ISO 17: Spanish Symbol Set
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
§
P
`
p
!
1
A
Q
a
q
“
2
B
R
b
r
£
3
C
S
c
s
$
4
D
T
d
t
*
:
J
Z
j
z
+
;
K
¡
k
º
,
<
L
Ñ
l
ñ
=
M
¿
m
ç
.
>
N
^
n
~
/
?
O
_
o
▒
0
1
2
3
(SW) ISO 11: Swedish Symbol Set
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
É
P
é
p
!
1
A
Q
a
q
“
2
B
R
b
r
#
3
C
S
c
s
¤
4
D
T
d
t
+
;
K
Ä
k
ä
,
<
L
Ö
l
ö
=
M
Å
m
å
.
>
N
Ü
n
ü
/
?
O
_
o
▒
%
5
E
U
e
u
%
5
E
U
e
u
&
6
F
V
f
v
&
6
F
V
f
v
´
7
G
W
g
w
‘
7
G
W
g
w
179
(
8
H
X
h
x
(
8
H
X
h
x
)
9
I
Y
i
y
)
9
I
Y
i
y
¤
ò
Ö
õ
*
:
J
Z
j
z
Appendix E – Symbol Sets
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
A0
B0
C0
D0
E0
F0
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
0
1
2
3
4
(TS) PS Text Symbol Set
5
6
7
8
9
0
@
P
`
p
!
1
A
Q
a
q
“
2
B
R
b
r
#
3
C
S
c
s
$
4
D
T
d
t
%
5
E
U
e
u
&
6
F
V
f
v
‘
7
G
W
g
w
(
8
H
X
h
x
)
9
I
Y
i
y
*
:
J
Z
j
z
+
;
K
[
k
{
,
<
L
\
l
|
=
M
]
m
}
.
>
N
^
n
~
/
?
O
_
o
¡
`
¢
†
´
£
‡
ˆ
/
·
˜
¥
ƒ
¶
˘
§
•
·
¤
,
¨
‘
„
“
“
°
«
»
¸
‹
…
›
‰
“
fi
˛
fl
¿
ˇ
Ł
ł
Ø
ø
Œ
œ
º
ß
C
D
E
F
¯
A
B
C
D
E
F
—
Æ
æ
ª
(UK) ISO 4: United Kingdom Symbol Set
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
0
1
2
3
0
@
P
`
p
!
1
A
Q
a
q
“
2
B
R
b
r
£
3
C
S
c
s
$
4
D
T
d
t
0
1
2
3
4
0
@
P
‘
p
!
1
A
Q
a
q
“
2
B
R
b
r
#
3
C
S
c
s
$
4
D
T
d
t
%
5
E
U
e
u
*
:
J
Z
j
z
+
;
K
[
k
{
,
<
L
\
l
|
=
M
]
m
}
.
>
N
^
n
⎯
/
?
O
_
o
▒
(US) ISO 6: ASCII Symbol Set
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
+
;
K
[
k
{
,
<
L
\
l
|
·
=
M
]
m
}
.
>
N
^
n
~
/
?
O
o
▒
%
5
E
U
e
u
&
6
F
V
f
v
&
6
F
V
f
v
‘
7
G
W
g
w
‘
7
G
W
g
w
180
(
8
H
X
h
x
(
8
H
X
h
x
)
9
I
Y
i
y
)
9
I
Y
i
y
*
:
J
Z
j
z
Appendix E – Symbol Sets
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
A0
B0
C0
D0
E0
F0
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
A0
B0
C0
D0
E0
F0
0
1
2
3
0
@
P
`
p
!
1
A
Q
a
q
“
2
B
R
b
r
#
3
C
S
c
s
(VI) Ventura International Symbol Set
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
$
4
D
T
d
t
„
‰
â
Å
Á
Œ
À
“
ê
î
Ã
œ
Â
“
ô
Ø
ã
¶
È
º
û
Æ
Ê
Ç
á
å
†
‡
0
1
2
3
4
0
@
P
‘
p
!
1
A
Q
a
q
“
2
B
R
b
r
#
3
C
S
c
s
$
4
D
T
d
t
„
‰
%
5
E
U
e
u
&
6
F
V
f
v
‘
7
G
W
g
w
(
8
H
X
h
x
)
9
I
Y
i
y
*
:
J
Z
j
z
“
º
¶
†
C
D
E
F
+
;
K
[
k
{
,
<
L
\
l
|
=
M
]
m
}
.
>
N
^
n
~
/
?
O
_
o

⊔
Ú
§
ë
ï
Ú
»
■
Û
ƒ
ö
ß
Ÿ
□
™
¤
ò
Ö
õ
º
‹
›
£
ù
Ü
Š
«
¥
ä
É
š
(VU) Ventura US Symbol Set
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
+
;
K
[
k
{
,
<
L
\
l
|
=
M
]
m
}
.
>
N
^
n
~
/
?
O
_
o
→
⊔
■
□
Ë
ç
é
í
Í
—
%
5
E
U
e
u
Î
Ñ
ó
ø
Ì
–
&
6
F
V
f
v
Ï
ñ
ú
æ
Ó
‘
7
G
W
g
w
¡
à
Ä
Ò
(
8
H
X
h
x
¿
è
ì
Õ
ª
)
9
I
Y
i
y
*
:
J
Z
j
z
™
“
B
§
‡
—
–
¢
ü
Ô
ÿ
…
¢
…
181
Appendix E – Symbol Sets
0
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
A0
B0
C0
D0
E0
F0
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
A0
B0
C0
D0
E0
F0
1
2
3
!
1
A
Q
a
q
°
À
Ð
à
ð
‘
¡
±
Á
Ñ
á
ñ
“
2
B
R
b
r
‚
‘
¢
²
Â
Ò
â
ò
#
3
C
S
c
s
ƒ
“
£
³
Ã
Ó
ã
ó
0
1
2
3
!
1
A
Q
a
q
“
2
B
R
b
r
‚
‘
˘
˛
Â
#
3
C
S
c
s
0
@
P
`
p
€
0
@
P
`
p
€
‘
º
ˇ
±
Á
Ð
“
Ł
ł
Ó
á
â
ó
(W1) Windows 3.1 Latin 1 Symbol Set
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
$
4
D
T
d
t
„
“
¤
´
Ä
Ô
ä
ô
%
5
E
U
e
u
…
•
¥
µ
Å
Õ
å
õ
&
6
F
V
f
v
†
–
¦
¶
Æ
Ö
æ
ö
‘
7
G
W
g
w
‡
—
§
·
Ç
×
ç
÷
(
8
H
X
h
x
ˆ
˜
¨
¸
È
Ø
è
ø
)
9
I
Y
i
y
‰
™
©
¹
É
Ù
é
ù
*
:
J
Z
j
z
Š
š
ª
º
Ê
Ú
ê
ú
(WE) Windows 3.1 Latin 2 Symbol Set
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
$
4
D
T
d
t
„
“
¤
´
Ä
Ô
ä
ô
%
5
E
U
e
u
…
µ
&
6
F
V
f
v
†
–
¦
¶
Ö
ö
‘
7
G
W
g
w
‡
—
§
·
Ç
×
ç
÷
182
(
8
H
X
h
x
)
9
I
Y
i
y
‰
™
*
:
J
Z
j
z
Š
š
¨
¸
É
B
C
D
E
F
+
;
K
[
k
{
‹
›
«
»
Ë
Û
ë
û
,
<
L
\
l
|
Œ
œ
¬
¼
Ì
Ü
ì
ü
=
M
]
m
}
.
>
N
^
n
~
/
?
O
_
o
▒
½
Í
Ý
í
ý
®
¾
Î
Þ
î
þ
Ÿ
¯
¿
Ï
ß
ï
ÿ
B
C
D
E
F
+
;
K
[
k
{
‹
›
«
»
Ë
,
<
L
\
l
|
=
M
]
m
}
.
>
N
^
n
~
Ž
ž
/
?
O
_
o
▒
¬
“
Í
Ý
í
ý
Ú
é
Ü
ë
ú
ü
Î
ß
î
Appendix E – Symbol Sets
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
A0
B0
C0
D0
E0
F0
0
1
2
3
0
@
P
`
p
!
1
A
Q
a
q
“
2
B
R
b
r
#
3
C
S
c
s
$
4
D
T
d
t
%
5
E
U
e
u
&
6
F
V
f
v
‘
7
G
W
g
w
(
8
H
X
h
x
)
9
I
Y
i
y
°
À
Ð
à
ð
`
¡
±
Á
Ñ
á
ñ
’
¢
²
Â
Ò
â
ò
£
³
Ã
Ó
ã
ó
¤
´
Ä
Ô
ä
ô
¥
µ
Å
Õ
å
õ
¦
¶
Æ
Ö
æ
ö
§
·
Ç
×
ç
÷
¨
¸
È
Ø
è
ø
¹
É
Ù
é
ù
0
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
A0
B0
C0
D0
E0
F0
(WO) Windows 3.0 Latin 1 Symbol Set
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
0
@
P
`
p
€
°
À
à
1
!
1
A
Q
a
q
‘
¡
±
Á
Ñ
á
ñ
2
3
˜
#
3
C
S
c
s
ƒ
“
£
³
Ã
Ó
ã
ó
2
B
R
b
r
,
‘
¢
²
Â
Ò
â
ò
B
C
D
E
F
*
:
J
Z
j
z
+
;
K
[
k
{
,
<
L
\
l
|
=
M
]
m
}
.
>
N
^
n
˜
/
?
O
_
o
▒
ª
º
Ê
Ú
ê
ú
«
»
Ë
Û
ë
û
¬
¼
Ì
Ü
ì
ü
½
Í
Ý
í
ý
¾
Î
Þ
î
þ
¯
¿
Ï
ß
ï
ÿ
(WT) Windows 3.1 Latin 5 Symbol Set
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
$
4
D
T
d
t
„
“
¤
´
Ä
Ô
ä
ô
%
5
E
U
e
u
…
¥
µ
Å
Õ
å
õ
&
6
F
V
f
v
†
–
¦
¶
Æ
Ö
æ
ö
‘
7
G
W
g
w
‡
—
§
·
Ç
×
ç
÷
183
(
8
H
X
h
x
ˆ
˜
¨
¸
È
Ø
è
ø
)
9
I
Y
i
y
‰
™
©
¹
É
Ù
é
ù
*
:
J
Z
j
z
Š
š
ª
º
Ê
Ú
ê
ú
B
C
D
E
F
+
;
K
[
k
{
‹
›
«
»
Ë
Û
ë
û
‚
<
L
\
l
|
Œ
œ
¬
¼
Ì
Ü
ì
ü
=
M
]
m
}
.
>
N
^
n
~
/
?
O
_
o
▒
½
Í
®
¾
Î
í
l
î
Ÿ
¯
¿
Ï
ß
ï
ÿ
Appendix E – Symbol Sets
184
Appendix F – Bar Code Summary Data
Appendix F
Bar Code Summary Data
Bar code fonts have alpha names (left column, below). Uppercase alpha names will print bar codes with human-readable
interpretations, if supported. Lowercase alpha names will print bar codes only. Place the ID in field b of the Format Record
header to cause the printer to encode the data field using the associated symbology; see Appendix G for details. Column
labeled “Linear Scanner Supported” provides an indication that printers equipped with a Linear Scanner are capable of
recognizing the associated symbology.
Bar Code Characteristics
Bar
Code ID
Symbology
Valid ASCII Characters, decimal value
representation
Linear
Scanner
Supported
Length
Checksum
Varies
No
32, 36, 37, 42, 43, 45-57, 65-90

A/a
Code 39
B/b
UPC-A
11
Yes
48-57 Numeric only. Option V used in the 6th
& 7th position

C/c
UPC-E
6
Yes
48-57 Numeric only

D/d
Interleaved 2 of 5 (I2 of 5)
Varies
No
48-57 Numeric only

E/e
Code 128
Varies
M-103
32-127

F/f
EAN-13
12
Yes
48-57 Numeric only. Option V used in 7th &
8th position

G/g
EAN-8
7
Yes
48-57 Numeric only

H/h
HBIC
Varies
M-43
32, 36-39, 42, 43, 45-57, 65-90

Codabar
Varies
No
36, 43, 45-58, 65-68

I/i
(continued)
185
Appendix F – Bar Code Summary Data
Bar
Code ID
Symbology
J/j
Interleaved 2 of 5 w/ a modulo 10
checksum
K/k
Plessey
L/l
Interleaved 2 of 5 w/ modulo 10
checksum & bearer bars
Valid ASCII Characters, decimal value
representation
Linear
Scanner
Supported
Length
Checksum
Varies
M-10
48-57 Numeric only

Up to 14
M-10
48-57 Numeric only. Option + is last
character for 2nd M-11 chksum

13
M-10
48-57 Numeric only

M/m
2 digit UPC addendum
2
Yes
48-57 Numeric only
[1]
N/n
5 digit UPC addendum
5
Yes
48-57 Numeric only
[1]
O/o
Code 93
Varies
No
35-38, 42-58, 65-90, 97-122
p
Postnet
Varies
Yes
48-57 Numeric only

Q/q
UCC/EAN 128
19
Yes
48-57 Numeric only

R/r
UCC/EAN 128 K-Mart non-EDI
18
Yes
48-57 Numeric only

S/s
UCC/EAN 128 Random Weight
34 +
Yes
48-57 Numeric only

T/t
Telepen
Varies
Yes
All ASCII characters
84
Yes
Alphanumeric
Specified
Yes
Alphanumeric
1
No
A, B, C, D
Varies
Yes
All
Specified
Yes
All
Varies
Yes
All 8-bit values
U
UPS MaxiCode
u
UPS MaxiCode w/ Byte Count
v
FIM
z
PDF417
Z
PDF417 w/ Byte Count
W1c
DataMatrix
(continued)
186
Appendix F – Bar Code Summary Data
Bar
Code ID
Symbology
Valid ASCII Characters, decimal value
representation
Length
Checksum
Specified
Yes
All 8-bit values
Linear
Scanner
Supported
W1C
DataMatrix w/ Byte Count
W1d
QR Code – Auto format
Varies
Yes
Alphanumeric
W1D
QR Code – Manual format
Varies
Yes
Single-byte or Kanji double-byte
W1f
Aztec
Varies
Yes
All 8-bit values
W1F
Aztec w/ Byte Count
Specified
Yes
All 8-bit values
USD-8 (Code 11)
Varies
Yes
45, 48-57
W1I
EAN 128 w/auto subset switching
Varies
Yes
32-127

W1J
Code 128 w/auto subset switching
Varies
Yes
32-127

W1k
GS1 DataBar (six types)
Varies
Yes
Numeric / Alphanumeric (type dependent)
W1L
Planet Code
Varies
Yes
48-57 Numeric only
W1M / W1m Australia Post 4-State Bar Code
Varies
Yes
Numeric / Alphanumeric (type dependent)
W1N / W1n
Industrial 2 of 5
Varies
M-10
48-57 Numeric only
W1p
Intelligent Mail Barcode (IMB)
Varies
No
48-57 Numeric only
W1q
CODABLOCK
Varies
Yes
32, 36, 37, 42, 43, 45-57, 65-90 / All ASCII
characters (type dependent)
W1R
UCC/EAN Code 128 K-MART NON EDI
18
Yes
48-57 Numeric only
Standard 2 of 5
Varies
M-10
48-57 Numeric only
TCIF Linked 3 of 9 (TLC39)
Varies
Yes
W1G / W1g
W1S / W1s
W1t
(continued)
187
Alphanumeric
Appendix F – Bar Code Summary Data
Bar
Code ID
[1]
Valid ASCII Characters, decimal value
representation
Length
Checksum
Code 16K
Varies
Yes
All ASCII characters
W1z
MicroPDF417
Varies
Yes
All 8-bit values
W1Z
MicroPDF417 w/ Byte Count
Specified
Yes
All 8-bit values
W1Y / W1y
Symbology
Linear
Scanner
Supported
Readable when using “Barcode Count” method (see <STX>KcSN for details).
Bar Code Default Widths and Heights
Bar Code Default Data
203 DPI Resolutions
300 DPI Resolutions
400 DPI Resolutions
600 DPI Resolutions
Font
Height
(inches)
Ratio/
Module Size
Height
(inches)
Ratio/
Module Size
Height
(inches)
Ratio/
Module Size
Height
(inches)
Ratio/
Module Size
A
.40
6:2
.40
9:4
.40
12:4
.40
18:6
B
.80
3
.80
4
.80
6
.80
9
C
.80
3
.80
4
.80
6
.80
9
D
.40
5:2
.40
9:4
.40
10:4
.40
15:6
E
.40
2
.40
4
.40
4
.40
6
F
.80
3
.80
4
.80
6
.80
9
G
.80
3
.80
4
.80
6
.80
9
H
.40
6:2
.40
9:4
.40
12:4
.40
18:6
I
.40
6:3
.40
9:4
.40
12:6
.40
18:6
J
.40
5:2
.40
9:4
.40
10:4
.40
15:6
(continued)
188
Appendix F – Bar Code Summary Data
203 DPI Resolutions
300 DPI Resolutions
400 DPI Resolutions
600 DPI Resolutions
Font
Height
(inches)
Ratio/
Module Size
Height
(inches)
Ratio/
Module Size
Height
(inches)
Ratio/
Module Size
Height
(inches)
Ratio/
Module Size
K
.40
5:2
.40
9:4
.40
10:4
.40
15:6
L
1.30
5:2
1.30
9:4
1.30
10:4
1.30
15:6
M
.90
3
.90
4
.90
6
.90
9
N
.80
3
.80
4
.80
6
.80
9
O
.40
6:3
.40
8:4
.40
12:6
.40
18:9
p
.08
N/A
.08
N/A
.08
N/A
.08
N/A
Q
1.40
2
1.40
4
1.40
4
1.40
6
R
1.40
2
1.40
4
1.40
4
1.40
6
S
1.40
2
1.40
3
1.40
4
1.40
6
T
.80
1
.80
1
.80
2
.80
3
U/u
1.00
N/A
1.00
N/A
1.00
N/A
1.00
N/A
v
.5
1
.5
1
.5
2
.5
3
z
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Z/z
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
W1C/W1c
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
W1D/W1d
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
W1F/W1f
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
W1G/W1g
.5
5:2
.5
7:3
.5
9:4
.5
14:6
W1I
.40
2
.40
4
.40
4
.40
6
W1J
.40
2
.40
4
.40
4
.40
6
W1k
N/A
2
N/A
3
N/A
4
N/A
6
W1L
0.80
N/A
0.80
N/A
0.80
N/A
0.80
N/A
W1M/W1m
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
W1N/ W1n
0.40
6:2
0.40
9:4
0.40
12:4
0.40
18:6
(continued)
189
Appendix F – Bar Code Summary Data
203 DPI Resolutions
300 DPI Resolutions
400 DPI Resolutions
600 DPI Resolutions
Font
Height
(inches)
Ratio/
Module Size
Height
(inches)
Ratio/
Module Size
Height
(inches)
Ratio/
Module Size
Height
(inches)
Ratio/
Module Size
W1p
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
W1q
.40
2
.40
4
.40
4
.40
6
W1R
1.40
2
1.40
4
1.40
4
1.40
6
W1S/W1s
0.40
6:2
0.40
9:4
0.40
12:4
0.40
18:6
W1t
.40
6:2
.40
9:4
.40
12:4
.40
18:6
W1Y/ W1y
.40
2
.40
4
.40
4
.40
6
W1Z/W1z
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A

Some bar codes will be sensitive to Label Command “D”; see Label Formatting Commands for details.
190
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
Appendix G
Bar Code Details
Unless otherwise noted all bar codes depicted in this section were produced using the
ratio/module values of 00 and height fields of 000 to cause the printer to produce symbols
using default bar widths and height fields. See Appendix F for the default values.
A:
Code 3 of 9
Valid Characters: 0-9, A-Z, - . * $ / + % and the space character.
Variable Length.
Valid bar widths: The expected ratio of wide to narrow bars can range from 2:1 to 3:1.
The following example prints a 3 of 9 bar code with a wide to narrow bar ratio of 3:1:
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1A00000001501000123456789<CR>
121100000000100Barcode A<CR>
E
B:
UPC-A
Valid Characters: 0-9
Length: 12 digits. If the user provides 11 digits, the printer will compute the checksum.
If the user provides the checksum, the printer will check that it matches the expected
checksum. If it does not match, the printer will print out all zeros and the expected
checksum. See Appendix O.
Valid bar widths: The fourth character of record is the width of the narrow bar in dots.
All other bars are a ratio of the narrow bar (2 times, 3 times, and 4 times the narrow
bar width).
The following example prints a UPC-A bar code:
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1B000000015010001234567890<CR>
121100000000100Barcode B<CR>
E
191
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
C:
UPC-E
Valid Characters: 0-9
Length: Seven digits. If the user provides six digits, the printer will compute the
checksum. If the user provides the checksum, the printer will check that it matches the
expected checksum. If it does not match, the printer will print out all zeros and the
expected checksum.
Valid bar widths: The fourth character of record is the width of the narrow bar in dots.
All other bars are a ratio of the narrow bar (2 times, 3 times, and 4 times the narrow
bar width).
The following example prints a UPC-E bar code:
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1C0000000150100012345<CR>
121100000000100Barcode C<CR>
E
D:
Interleaved 2 of 5 (I 2 of 5)
Valid Characters: 0-9
Variable Length.
Valid bar widths: The expected ratio of wide to narrow bars can range from 2:1 to 3:1.
The following example prints an Interleaved 2 of 5 bar code with a wide to narrow bar
ratio of 3:1:
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1D000000015010001234567890<CR>
121100000000100Barcode D<CR>
E
E:
Code 128
Valid Characters: The entire 128 ASCII character set.
Variable Length
Valid bar widths: The fourth character of record is the width of the narrow bar in dots.
All other bars are a ratio of the narrow bar (2 times the narrow bar width, 3 times the
narrow bar width, and 4 times the narrow bar width).
192
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
This printer supports the Code 128 subsets A, B, and C. The printer can be selected to
start on any code subset and switch to another within the data stream. The default code
subset is B; otherwise, the first character (A, B, C) of the data field determines the
subset. Subset switching is only performed in response to code switch command. These
commands are placed in the data to be encoded at appropriate locations.

The use a B as the first character is recommended to prevent an A or C from changing
the subset.
Subset A: Includes all of the standard uppercase alphanumeric keyboard characters
plus the control and special characters. To select Code 128 Subset A, place an ASCII A
(DEC 65, HEX 41) before the data to be encoded.
Subset B: Includes all of the standard uppercase alphanumeric keyboard characters
plus the lowercase alphabetic and special characters. To select Code 128 Subset B, place
an ASCII B (DEC 66, HEX 42) before the data to be encoded. If no start character is sent
for the Code 128 font, Code 128 Subset B will be selected by default.
Subset C: Includes the set of 100 digit pairs from 00 through 99 inclusive, as well as
special characters. Code 128 Subset C is used for double density encoding of numeric
data. To select Code 128 Subset C, place an ASCII C (DEC 67, HEX 43) before the data
to be encoded. Subset C can only encode an even number of numeric characters. When
the data to be encoded includes an odd number of numeric characters, the last character
causes the printer to automatically generate a “switch to subset B” and encode the last
character appropriately in subset B.
Special Character Handling: Characters with an ASCII value greater than 95 are
considered special characters. To access these values, a two-character reference table is
built into the printer (see below).
For example, to encode FNC2 into a Code 128 Subset A bar code, send the ASCII “&”
(DEC 38, HEX 26) followed by the ASCII “B” (DEC 66, HEX 41).
Sample: ATEST&B123
ASCII
Encoded: TEST<FNC2>123

2 CHAR
CODE A
CODE B
CODE C
96
&A
FNC3
FNC3
-NA-
97
&B
FNC2
FNC2
-NA-
98
&C
SHIFT
SHIFT
-NA-
99
&D
CODEC
CODEC
-NA-
100
&E
CODEB
FNC4
CODEB
101
&F
FNC4
CODEA
CODEA
102
&G
FNC1
FNC1
FNC1
193
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
Control Codes: By sending these control codes, control characters can be encoded into
a Code 128 Subset A bar code (e.g., ABC{DE will be encoded as ABC<ESC>DE):
Control Code in the Bar Code Data Stream
Encoded Control Character Result
`
NUL
a through z
1 - 26
{
ESC
|
FS
}
GS
~
RS
ASCII 127
US
The following example prints a Code 128 bar code:
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1E000000015010001234567890<CR>
121100000000100Barcode E<CR>
E
F:
EAN-13
Valid Characters: 0-9
Length: 13 digits. If the user provides 12 digits, the printer will compute the checksum.
If the user provides the checksum, the printer will check that it matches the expected
checksum. If it does not match, the printer will print all zeros and the expected
checksum. See Appendix O.
Valid bar widths: The fourth character of record is the width of the narrow bar in dots.
All other bars are a ratio of the narrow bar (2 times, 3 times, and 4 times the narrow
bar width).
The following example prints an EAN-13 bar code:
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1F0000000150100012345678901<CR>
121100000000100Barcode F<CR>
E
194
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
G:
EAN-8
Valid Characters: 0-9
Length: 8 digits. If the user provides 7 digits, the printer will compute the checksum. If
the user provides the checksum, the printer will check that it matches the expected
checksum. If it does not match, the printer will print all zeros and the expected
checksum.
Valid bar widths: The fourth character of record is the width of the narrow bar in dots.
All other bars are a ratio of the narrow bar (2 times, 3 times, and 4 times the narrow
bar width).
The following example prints an EAN-8 bar code:
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1G00000001501000123456<CR>
121100000000100Barcode G<CR>
E
H:
Health Industry Bar Code (HBIC)
Valid Characters: 0-9, A-Z, -$ /. %
Variable Length.
Valid bar widths: The expected ratio of wide to narrow bars can range from 2:1 to 3:1.
The host must supply leading “+”’s
The following example prints a HBIC bar code with a wide to narrow bar ratio of 3:1:
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1H0000000150050+0123456789<CR>
121100000000100Barcode H<CR>
E
I:
Codabar
Valid Characters: 0-9, A-D, -, ., $, :, /, + (comma is not valid)
Variable Length but requires at least three characters.
Valid bar widths: The expected ratio of wide to narrow bars can range from 2:1 to 3:1.
Valid Codabar symbols require start and stop characters (A–D). These characters should
be placed in the data field along with other data to be included in the symbol.
195
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
The following example prints a Codabar bar code with a wide to narrow bar ratio of 3:1:
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1I63040001501000A1234567890D<CR>
121100000000100Barcode I<CR>
E
J:
Barcode I
Interleaved 2 of 5 (with a Modulo 10 Checksum)
Valid Characters: 0-9
Variable Length.
Valid bar widths: The expected ratio of wide to narrow bars can range from 2:1 to 3:1.
The following example prints an Interleaved 2 of 5 bar code with a modulo 10 checksum
added and with a wide to narrow bar ratio of 3:1:
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1J000000015010001234567890<CR>
121100000000100Barcode J<CR>
E
K:
Plessey
Valid Characters: 0-9
Valid bar widths: The expected ratio of wide to narrow bars can range from 2:1 to 3:1.
If a + character is the last data character, an additional MSI checksum will be added to
the bar code in place of the + character.
The following example prints a Plessey bar code with a wide to narrow bar ratio of 3:1:
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1K000000015010001234567890<CR>
121100000000100Barcode K<CR>
E
196
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
L:
Interleaved 2 of 5 (with a Modulo 10 Checksum and Bearer Bars)
Valid Characters: 0-9
Variable Length: For the bearer bars to be printed, 13 characters are required.
Valid bar widths: The expected ratio of wide to narrow bars can range from 2:1 to 3:1.
The following example prints an Interleaved 2 of 5 bar code with a modulo 10 checksum
with a wide to narrow bar ratio of 3:1 and bearer bars:
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1L00000001501000123456789012<CR>
121100000000100Barcode L<CR>
E
M:
2-Digit UPC Addendum
Valid Characters: 0-9
Length: 2 digits.
Valid bar widths: The fourth character of record is the width of the narrow bar in dots.
All other bars are a ratio of the narrow bar (2 times, 3 times, and 4 times the narrow
bar width). Human readable characters for this bar code symbology are printed above
the symbol.
The following example prints a 2 digit UPC bar code addendum:
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1M000000015010042<CR>
121100000000100Barcode M<CR>
E
N:
5-Digit UPC Addendum
Valid Characters: 0-9
Length: 5 digits.
Valid bar widths: The width multiplier is the width of the narrow bar in dots. All other
bars are a ratio of the narrow bar (2 times, 3 times, and 4 times the narrow bar width).
Human readable characters for this bar code symbology are printed above the symbol.
197
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
The following example prints a 5 digit UPC bar code addendum:
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1N000000015010001234<CR>
121100000000100Barcode N<CR>
E
O:
Code 93
Valid Characters: 0-9, A-Z, -.$/+% and the space character.
Variable Length.
Valid bar widths: The width multiplier is the width of the narrow bar in dots. All other
bars are a ratio of the narrow bar (2 times, 3 times, and 4 times the narrow bar width).
The following example prints a Code 93 bar code:
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1O0000000150100Datamax42<CR>
121100000000100Barcode O<CR>
E
p:
Postnet
Valid Characters: 0-9
Length: 5, 9 or 11 digits
Valid bar widths: The width and height multiplier values of 00 will produce a valid
Postnet symbol.
Usage: The bar code height field is ignored since the symbol height is United States
Postal Service specific. This bar code is to display the zip code on a letter or package for
the US Postal Service.
The following example prints a Postnet bar code:
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1p000000015010032569<CR>
121100000000100Barcode p<CR>
E
198
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
Q:
UCC/EAN Code 128
Valid Characters: 0-9
Length: 19 digits.
Valid bar widths: The fourth character of record is the width of the narrow bar in dots.
All other bars are a ratio of the narrow bar (2 times, 3 times, and 4 times the narrow
bar width). Human readable characters for this bar code symbology are printed above
the symbol.
The printer spreads a weighted module 103 check sum.
The following example prints a UCC/EAN Code 128 bar code:
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1Q00000001501000123456789012345678<CR>
121100000000100Barcode Q<CR>
E
R:
UCC/EAN Code128 K-MART NON EDI
Valid Characters: 0-9
Length: 18 digits
Valid bar widths: The fourth character of record is the width of the narrow bar in dots.
All other bars are a ratio of the narrow bar (2 times, 3 times, and 4 times the narrow
bar width). Human readable characters for this bar code symbology are printed above
the symbol. (See W1R for an alternate.)
This bar code is set up according to K-MART specifications.
The following example prints a KMART bar code.
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1R0000000150100012345678901234567<CR>
121100000000100Barcode R<CR>
E
199
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
S:
UCC/EAN Code 128 Random Weight
Valid Characters: 0-9
Length: At least 34 digits.
Valid bar widths: The fourth character of record is the width of the narrow bar in dots.
All other bars are a ratio of the narrow bar (2 times, 3 times, and 4 times the narrow
bar width).
This bar code is commonly used by the food and grocery industry.
The following example prints a UCC/EAN Code 128 Random Weight bar code:
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1S000000015005001100736750292601193042032020018002110123456<CR>
121100000000100Barcode S<CR>
E
Barcode S
T:
Telepen
Valid Characters: ASCII character set( 0-127 )
Variable Length
Valid bar widths: The fourth character of the record is the width of the narrow bar in
dots. All other bars are a ratio of the narrow bar (2 times, 3 times, and 4 times the
narrow bar width).
The following example prints a Telepen bar code:
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1T0000000150100ABCDEF<CR>
121100000000100Barcode T<CR>
E
Barcode T
200
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
u:
UPS MaxiCode, Modes 2 & 3
The printer supports MaxiCode as defined in the AIM Technical Specification. The
following examples illustrate various label format record message syntaxes for encoding
data as MaxiCode. In the following examples, special formatting is used to denote
special ASCII characters as shown:
Symbol
R
S
G
S
E
OT
Hexadecimal Value
1E
1D
04
(Printer message syntax allows for EOT to be
substituted with <CR> or the use of both EOT and
<CR>.)
UPS Modes 2 & 3 Explicit
The data stream can force Mode 2 or 3 encoding by placing #2 or #3, respectively,
before the data, as shown in the example below. If this is not specified, the printer
chooses the best mode.
1u0000001200120#3[)>RS01GS96123456GS068GS001GS1Z12345675GSUPSNGS12345EGS0
89GSGS1/1GS10.1GSYGSGSGSUTRSEOT
This example will print encoding the MaxiCode symbol in Mode 3.
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1u0000001200120#3[)>RS01GS96123456GS068GS001GS1Z12345675GSUPSNGS12345EGS089GSGS1/
1GS10.1GSYGSGSGSUTRSEOT
121100000000100Barcode u<CR>
E
Where:
#3
Forces Mode 3 encoding
[)>RS01GS96 Message Header
123456
Maximum 9 alphanumeric ASCII, postal
code
068
Country Code
001
Class
G
1Z1...
S
...TRSEOT
Primary
Message
Secondary
Message
Examples
In the UPS 3.0 protocol examples that follow, Primary Message control characters GS will
not be encoded in the MaxiCode symbol. All characters, the Secondary Message, with
the exception of the leading GS, in are encoded.
201
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
A UPS 3.0 zip + 4 with Message data format and message header:
1u0000001200120[)>RS01GS96841706672GS840GS001GS1Z12345675GSUPSNGS12345EGS089GSGS1/
1GS10.1GSYGSGSGSUTRSEOT
Where:
[)>RS01GS96
841706672
840
001
G
S1Z1...
...TRSEOT
Message Header
Maximum 9 alphanumeric ASCII, postal code
Country Code
Class
Primary
Message
Secondary
Message
A UPS 3.0 international postal “V6C3E2” with Message data format and message header:
1u0000001200120[)>RS01GS96V6C3E2GS068GS001GS1Z12345675GSUPSNGS12345EGS089GSGS1/1GS
10.1GSYGSGSGSUTRSEOT
Where:
[)>RS01GS96
V6C3E2
068
001
G
S1Z1...
...TRSEOT
Message Header
Maximum 6 alphanumeric ASCII, international zip code
Country Code
Class
Primary
Message
Secondary
Message
A UPS 3.0 international zip “V6C3E2” without Message data format and message header:
1u0000001200120V6C3E2GS068GS001GS1Z12345675GSUPSNGS12345EGS089GSGS1/1GS10.1
G
G G G
R E
SY S S SUT S OT
Where:
V6C3E2
068
001
G
S1Z1...
...TRSEOT
Maximum 6 alphanumeric ASCII, international zip code
Country Code
Class
Primary
Message
Secondary
Message
A UPS 3.0 zip + 4 “32707-3270” without Message data format and message header:
1u0000001200120327073270GS068GS001GS1Z12345675GSUPSNGS12345EGS089GSGS1/1GS10.1GSYGS
R E
G G
S SUT S OT
Where:
32707
3270
068
001
G
S1Z1...
...TRSEOT
5 digit ASCII, Zip code
4 digit ASCII, +4 Zip code (not required)
Country Code
Class
Primary
Message
Secondary
Message
202
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
U:
UPS MaxiCode, Modes 2 & 3 with Byte Count Specifier
Specified Length – The upper case U identifies a UPS MaxiCode bar code with a 4-digit
string length specifier. This allows values 0x00 through 0xFF to be included within the
data strings without conflicting with the DPL format record terminators. The four-digit
decimal data byte count immediately follows the 4-digit column position field. This value
includes all of the data following the byte count field, but does not include itself.
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1U00000010001000051327895555840666this package<0x0D>is going to Datamax<CR>
121100000000100Barcode U<CR>
E
From the example above, the bar code’s data stream,
1U00000010001000051327895555840666this package<0x0D>is
going to Datamax
includes a Byte Count Specifier (the portion in bold), where 0051
equals the four-digit decimal data byte count and includes all bytes
that follow until the end of the bar code data. Field termination is
set by the byte count. <STX>, <CR>, and <0x0D> all represent single
byte values of hexadecimal 02, 0D, and 0D, respectively. The UPS
MaxiCode bar code produced encodes “327895555840666this
package<CR>is going to Datamax”, and prints a line of text:
Barcode U.
v:
Barcode U
FIM
Valid Characters: A, B, C, or D
Length: 1 character
Valid bar widths: The width and height multiplier works the same as for fonts on this bar
code.
This bar code is used to display the Facing Identification Mark (FIM) that is carried on
certain types of letter mail for the U S Postal Service:
FIM A: Courtesy reply mail with Postnet.
FIM B: Business reply, penalty or franked mail without Postnet.
FIM C: Business reply, penalty or franked mail with Postnet.
FIM D: OCR readable mail without Postnet (typically for envelopes with a courtesy reply
window).
The following example prints an FIM A bar code:
203
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1v0000000150100A<CR>
121100000000100Barcode v<CR>
E
z:
PDF-417
Valid Characters: All ASCII characters.
Variable Length – This two dimensional bar code holds large amounts of data in a small
area, while providing a high level of redundancy and error checking, if specified.
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1z0000000150100F1000000PDF417<CR>
121100000000100Barcode z<CR>
E
Barcode z
The example above prints a normal, security level one, PDF-417 bar code with a 1:2
aspect ratio and best-fit rows and columns. The (bolded) bar code’s data stream
1z0000000150100F1000000PDF417<CR> decodes as follows:
Example Data
F
1-character specifying a normal or truncated bar code (T to truncate, F for
normal).
1
1-digit security level ranging from 0 to 8.
00
2-digit aspect ratio specified as a fraction, with the first digit being the
numerator and the second digit the denominator. Use “00” for the default
ratio of 1:2. Valid range is from “00” to “99.”
00
2-digit number specifying the number of rows requested. Use “00” to let
the printer find the best fit. Valid range is from “03” to “90”. Row values
less than 3 are set to 3, while row values greater than 90 are set to 90.
00
2-digit number specifying the number of columns requested. Use “00” to
let the printer find the best fit. Valid range is from “01” to “30”. Column
values greater than 30 are set to 30.
PDF417
<CR>

Explanation
The data stream to be encoded.
Terminates the data stream.
Format Record header fields c and d should both be zero.
204
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
Z:
PDF-417 with Byte Count Specifier
Specified Length – The upper case Z identifies a PDF-417 bar code with a string 4-digit
length specifier. This allows values 0x00 through 0xFF to be used within the data strings
without conflicting with the DPL format record terminators. The four-digit decimal data
byte count immediately follows the 4-digit column position field. This value includes all
of the data following the byte count field, but does not include itself.
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1Z00000001501000015F1000000pdf<0x0D>417<CR>
121100000000100Barcode Z<CR>
E
Barcode Z
From the example above, the bar code’s data stream,
1Z00000001501000015F1000000pdf<CR>417
includes a Byte Count Specifier (the portion in bold), where 0015 equals the four-digit
decimal data byte count and includes all bytes that follow until the end of the bar code
data. Field termination is set by the byte count. <STX>, <CR>, and <0x0D> all represent
single byte values of hexadecimal 02, 0D, and 0D, respectively. The PDF-417 bar code
produced encodes “pdf<CR>417”, and prints a line of text: Barcode Z.
W1c: DataMatrix
Valid Characters: Any 8-bit byte data
Variable Length
DataMatrix is a two-dimensional matrix symbology, which is comprised of square
modules arranged within a perimeter finder pattern. There are two basic types: ECC
000-140 and ECC 200.
ECC 000 - 140 symbols:
These square symbols can be any odd size from 9x9 to 49x49, which may be specified in
fields jjj and kkk. If an ECC 000-140 symbol is specified with even numbers of rows or
columns, the next largest odd value will be used. Input values greater than 49 or less
than 9 will cause the symbol to be automatically sized for the input character stream.
The record format is shown here, expanded with spaces.
a W b[b] c d eee ffff gggg hhh i jjj kkk ll…l
205
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
Where:
Field
Valid Inputs
a
1,2,3, and 4
Meaning
W
W
b[b]
c, 1c
c
1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z
Module size horizontal multiplier
d
1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z
Module size vertical multiplier
eee
000 to 999
ffff
0000 to 9999
Label position, row
gggg
0000 to 9999
Label position, column
Rotation
Fixed value, extended bar code set
Selects the DataMatrix bar code - the two differing values
have no other significance.
No effect; Must be numeric
A 3-digit convolutional error correction level.
hhh
000, 050, 080, 100, 140
If any number other than one of these options is entered
then the nearest lesser value from the valid entries is used.
Example: Selecting an ECC value of 099 will cause the
actual ECC value of 080 to be used.
1 digit format identification:
i
0-6
0 - Automatically choose the encodation scheme based
on the characters to be encoded.
1 - Numeric data.
2 - Upper-case alphabetic.
3 - Upper-case alphanumeric and punctuation characters
(period, comma, hyphen, and slash).
4 - Upper-case alphanumeric.
5 - ASCII, the full 128 ASCII character set.
6 - Any 8-bit byte.
If a format identifier is selected which will not encode the
input character stream then the bar code symbol will not be
printed.
Auto-encodation format identification is recommended
since it will select the best possible encodation scheme for
the input stream.
jjj
9, 11, 13 … 49. ECC 140
minimum is 15.
A 3 digit odd number (or 000) of rows requested. 000
causes rows to be automatically determined. If the rows
and columns do not match, the symbol will be sized to a
square using the greater of the two values.
kkk
9, 11, 13 … 49. ECC 140
minimum is 15.
A 3 digit odd number (or 000) of columns requested. 000
causes columns to be automatically determined. If the rows
and columns do not match, the symbol will be sized to a
square using the greater of the two values.
ll…l
8-bit data, followed by a
termination character.
Data to be encoded.
206
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
ECC 200 symbols:
There are 24 square symbol sizes available, with both row and column dimensions,
which may be specified in fields jjj and kkk, measured in modules as indicated in the
following list - 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 32, 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 64, 72, 80, 88,
96, 104, 120, 132, and 144. If an ECC 200 symbol is specified with odd numbers of
rows or columns, the next largest even value will be used. Input values greater than
144 or less than 10 will cause the symbol to be automatically sized for the input
character stream. The record format is shown here, expanded with spaces.
a W b[b] c d eee ffff gggg hhh i jjj kkk ll…l
Where:
Field
Valid Inputs
a
1,2,3, and 4
W
W
b[b]
c, 1c
c
1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z
Module size horizontal multiplier
d
1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z
Module size vertical multiplier
eee
000 to 999
ffff
0000 to 9999
Label position, row
gggg
0000 to 9999
Label position, column
hhh
200
i
0
jjj
kkk
ll…l
Meaning
Rotation
Fixed value, extended bar code set
Selects the DataMatrix bar code - the two differing values
have no other significance.
No effect; Must be numeric
ECC 200 uses Reed-Solomon error correction.
Fixed value, not used
10,
22,
44,
88,
12,
24,
48,
96,
14, 16, 18, 20,
26, 32, 36, 40,
52, 64, 72, 80,
104, 120, 132,
144
A 3 digit even number (or 000) of rows requested.
10,
22,
44,
88,
12,
24,
48,
96,
14, 16, 18, 20,
26, 32, 36, 40,
52, 64, 72, 80,
104, 120, 132,
144
A 3 digit even number (or 000) of columns requested.
8-bit data
000 causes rows to be automatically determined. The
symbol will be sized to a square if the rows and columns do
not match by taking the larger of the two values.
000 causes columns to be automatically determined. The
symbol will be sized to a square if the rows and columns do
not match by taking the larger of the two values.
Data to be encoded in the symbol
Example:
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1W1c44000010001002000000000DATAMAX<CR>
121100000000100Barcode W1c<CR>
E
207
Barcode W1c
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
W1C: DataMatrix with Byte Count Specifier
Specified Length – The upper case C identifies a DataMatrix bar code with a string 4digit length specifier. This allows values 0x00 through 0xFF to be included within the
data strings without conflicting with the DPL format record terminators. The four-digit
decimal data byte count immediately follows the four-digit column position field. This
value includes all of the data following the byte count field, but does not include itself.
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1W1C440000100010000292000000000Datamax<0x0D>prints best<CR>
121100000000100Barcode W1C<CR>
E
From the example above, the bar code’s data stream,
1W1C440000100010000292000000000 Datamax<0x0D>prints best
includes a Byte Count Specifier (the portion in bold), where 0029
equals the four-digit decimal data byte count and includes all
bytes that follow until the end of the bar code data. Field
termination is set by the byte count. <STX>, <CR>, and <0x0D> all
represent single byte values of hexadecimal 02, 0D, and 0D,
respectively. The DataMatrix bar code produced encodes
“Datamax<CR>prints best,” and prints a line of text: Barcode
W1C.
W1d / W1D:
Barcode W1C
QR Code
Valid Characters: Numeric Data, Alphanumeric Data, 8-bit byte data, and Kanji
characters
Variable Length: The two-dimensional bar code (as documented in AIM, Version 7.0).
Syntax (spaces added for readability): a W1 b c d eee ffff gggg hh…h
Where:
208
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
Field
Valid Inputs
a
1,2,3 and 4
W1
W1
Meaning
Rotation
Fixed value, extended bar code set
Selects the QR bar code formatting mode, where:
D and d
b
D = Manual formatting. Allows the data string (hh…h) to
be entered with a comma (,) as a field separator;
fields are optional per QR Code specifications, and the
first field indicates Model 1 or Model 2 QR Code
(Model 2 is the default).
d = Automatic formatting. Allows the data string (hh…h)
to be data only.
c
1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z
Module size horizontal multiplier Each cell in the bar code is
square, therefore “c” and “d” must be equal. Depending on
the conversion mode (<STX>n or <STX>m), each unit
indicates a cell dimension of .01 inch or .1 mm.
d
1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z
Module size vertical multiplier. (See explanation for “c”,
above.)
eee
000 to 999
ffff
0000 to 9999
Label position, row
gggg
0000 to 9999
Label position, column (see Appendix J)
hh…h
Valid ASCII character
string, followed by (a)
termination character(s)
No effect; must be numeric
QR Code data string (see Generation Structure, below).
Generation Structure
The data input structure (hh…h) is as follows:
Auto Format (W1d)
With bar code identifier “d”, the data begins after the last character of the column
position field, and does not include any command characters. The data string is
terminated with a termination character, usually a 0x0d hex that occurs twice in
succession. The bar code symbol will have the following characteristics:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Model 2
Error Correction Code Level = “M” (Standard Reliability Level)
Mask Selection = Automatic
Data Input Mode = Automatic [1]
Example:
209
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1W1d4400000100010This is the data portion<CR><CR>
121100000000100Barcode W1D<CR>
E
[3]
(2 termination
characters required.)
Manual Formatting (W1D)
With bar code identifier “D”, minor changes allow flexibility for data entry. (Spaces
have been added for readability.)
[q,] [e [m] i,]
cdata cdata cdata…cdata term
[2]
Where:
Field
Valid Inputs
q
1, 2
e
m
I
cdata
term
Meaning
QR Code Model number, optional. Model 2 is the default.
Error Correction Level (Reed-Solomon) – Four
allowing recovery of the symbol code words:
H = Ultra Reliability Level (30%)
Q = High Reliability Level (25%)
M = Standard Reliability Level (15%)
L = High Density Level (7%)
H, Q, M, L
0 – 8, none
Mask Number, optional:
None = Automatic Selection
0-7 = Mask 0 to Mask 7
8
= No Mask
A, a, M, m
Data
A
a
M
m
N, A, B, K
immediately followed
by data
<CR>, <CR><CR>
[3]
Input Mode:
= Automatic setting, ASCII
= Automatic, hex-ASCII [1]
= Manual Setting, ASCII[2]
= manual, hex-ASCII[2]
levels
[1]
Character Mode:
N = Numeric, N data
A = Alphanumeric, A data
B = Binary , Bnnnn data (where nnnn = data bytecount, 4 decimal digits; byte-count /2 for hexASCII
K = Kanji, K data
The data string is terminated with a termination character,
generally a 0x0d hex, but can be changed by the operator.
If the Data Input Mode is Automatic, the data string is
terminated with two successive termination characters.
[1]
When Data Input Mode = Automatic, Kanji data cannot be used; Manual data input required.
When using manual formatting, commas are required between format fields and data types.
[3]
<CR> represents the line termination character as defined by the current control code set or
after use of Txx, line field terminator label format command.
[2]
210
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
If HEX/ASCII mode is selected in manual Data Input Mode, only the data for Kanji or
Binary data types will be converted, therefore the other data types and all command
characters must be entered in ASCII format. If HEX/ASCII is selected in automatic
Data Input Mode, all of the data must be entered in HEX/ASCII format.
Data Append Mode String Format, Manual Formatting – Bar Code W1D
D aa tt pp I
Where:
Field
Valid Inputs
D
D
aa
00, 99
Meaning
Data Append Mode String Format indicator
QR Code Number in Append Series, 2 decimal digits
tt
The total number of QR Codes in series, 2 decimal digits
pp
Value of Parity, 2 digits, 8 LSBs of data parity
e
H, Q, M, L
As above
m
0 – 8, none
As above
i
A, a, M, m
As above
cdata
N, A, B, K
immediately followed
by data
As above
term
<CR>, <CR><CR>
As above
Characteristics
Models:
Model
A.
B.
C.
D.
1 (original version), bar code versions 1 through 14
ECC Levels “H”, “M”, “Q”, and “L”
Mask Selection Automatic or 0 through 8
Data Input Modes Automatic and Manual
Data Append Mode
Model
A.
B.
C.
D.
2 (enhanced version), bar code versions 1 through 40
ECC Levels “H”, “M”, “Q”, and “L”
Mask Selection Automatic or 0 through 8
Data Input Modes Automatic and Manual
Data Append Mode
Representation of data:
Dark Cell = Binary 1
Light Cell = Binary 0
Symbol Size (not including quiet zone, 4 cells on each of the 4 sides):
211
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
Model 1: 21 X 21 cells to 73 X 73 cells (Versions 1 to 14, increase in steps of 4 cells
per side)
Model 2: 21 X 21 cells to 177 X 177 cells (Versions 1 to 40, increase in steps of 4
cells per side)
Data Characters per symbol (maximum for symbol size):
Numeric Data
Model 1; Version 14; ECC = L: 1,167 characters
Model 2; Version 40; ECC = L: 7,089 characters
Alphanumeric Data
Model 1; Version 14; ECC = L: 707 characters
Model 2; Version 40; ECC = L: 4,296 characters
Binary Data
Model 1; Version 14; ECC = L: 486 characters
Model 2; Version 40; ECC = L: 2,953 characters
Kanji Data
Model 1; Version 14; ECC = L: 299 characters
Model 2; Version 40; ECC = L: 1,817 characters
Code Type: Matrix
Orientation Independence: Yes
Example
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1W1D44000001000102HM,AThis is the data portion also with
binary,B0003<0xfe><0xca><0x83><0x0D>
121100000000100Barcode W1D<CR>
E
Barcode W1D
Where:
QR Code bar code, Cell Size = 0.1 inch square, positioned at X =. 1” and Y = .1”,
ECC=H, Mask = Automatic, Data Input Mode = Manual.
Other Examples:
DPL field record, QR Code bar code, Cell Size = 0.04 inch square, positioned at X =
.1” and Y = .1”, ECC = H, Mask = 3, Data Input Mode = Manual:
1W1D4400000100010H3M,AThis is the data portion also with
binary,B0003<0xfe><0xca><0x83><0x0D>
212
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
DPL field record, QR Code bar code, Cell Size = 0.08 inch square, positioned at X =
.1” and Y = .1”, ECC = L, Mask = Automatic, Data Input Mode = Manual - Kanji:
1W1D88000001000102,LM,K<0x81><0x40><0x81><0x41><0x81><0x42><0x0D>
DPL field record, QR Code bar code, Cell Size = 0.04 inch square, positioned at X =
.1” and Y = .1”, ECC = L, Mask = Automatic, Data Input Mode = Manual - Kanji (in
Hex/ASCII format):
1W1D4400000100010L8m,K814081418142<0x0D>
DPL field record, QR Code bar code, Cell Size = 0.01 inch square, positioned at X =
.1” and Y = .1”, ECC = M, Mask = Automatic, Data Input Mode = Automatic:
1W1d1100000100010Pallet 35FGA, Box 55367, Datamax Corp, Orlando,
Florida 32707<0x0D><0x0D>
W1f / W1F: Aztec
Valid Characters: All ASCII characters, depending upon the selected options.
Variable Length (W1f): This two dimensional bar code holds a large amount of data in a
small area and can provide a high level of error checking.
Specified Length (W1F): With a string four-digit length specifier, values 0x00 through
0xFF to be included within the data strings without conflicting with the DPL format
record terminators.
Syntax (spaces added for readability): a W1 b c d eee ffff gggg [hhhh] i jjj kk…k
Where:
213
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
Field
Valid Inputs
a
1,2,3, and 4
W1
W1
b
f and F
Meaning
Rotation
Fixed value, extended bar code set
Lowercase selects the Aztec bar code, variable length.
Uppercase selects the Aztec bar code with a Byte Count
Specifier
c
1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z
Module size horizontal multiplier, 0 = default size. The c/d
module size parameters should be equal to produce a
square symbol. When the label command (Dwh) is used to
generate larger text, then c and d may be used to
compensate and ensure a square symbol.
d
1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z
Module size vertical multiplier, 0 = default size (See
explanation for “c”, above.)
eee
000
ffff
0000 to 9999
Label position, row
gggg
0000 to 9999
Label position, column
[hhhh]
0000 to 9999
Optional string length specifier. Field termination is set by
this byte count. This decimal value includes all of the data
following this byte count field, but does not include itself.
i
0, 1
No Effect
Extended Channel Interpretation (ECI) mode; 0 = Disabled,
1 = Enabled
Error Correction (EC) / Amount (see table below), where:
jjj
000 to 300
kk…k
8-bit data, followed by a
termination character
000
001
101
201
300
–
–
–
–
–
Default EC, approximately 23%
099 EC fixed value, expressed as a percent.
104 Compact core, 1 to 4 layers respectively.
232 Full size core, 1 to 32 layers respectively.
Rune format, encodes three ASCII decimal digits 0256; scanner decode output is decimal number 0256
Data to be encoded.
The error correction or size selection determines the symbol size and other
characteristics of the symbol, as shown in the following table. Attempting to encode
more data that has been made available will result in no symbol printed.
214
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
Error Correction (EC) / Size Implications
jjj
Symbol
Size[1]
Symbol
Format
000
variable
001 to 099
variable
data
dependent
data and EC
dependent
101
102
102
103
104
15
19
19
23
27
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
19
23
27
31
37
41
45
49
53
57
61
67
71
75
79
83
87
91
95
101
105
109
113
117
121
125
131
135
139
143
147
151
compact
compact
compact
compact
compact
full
full
full
full
full
full
full
full
full
full
full
full
full
full
full
full
full
full
full
full
full
full
full
full
full
full
full
full
full
full
full
full
size
size
size
size
size
size
size
size
size
size
size
size
size
size
size
size
size
size
size
size
size
size
size
size
size
size
size
size
size
size
size
size
Maximum[2]
Binary Data
Bytes
Maximum[2]
Alphabetic
Characters
Maximum[2]
Numeric
Characters
1914
3067
3832
1914
3067
3832
6
19
19
33
53
12
33
33
57
89
13
40
40
70
110
8
24
40
62
87
114
145
179
214
256
298
343
394
446
502
559
621
687
753
824
898
976
1056
1138
1224
1314
1407
1501
1600
1702
1806
1914
15
40
68
104
144
187
236
291
348
414
482
554
636
718
808
900
998
1104
1210
1324
1442
1566
1694
1826
1963
2107
2256
2407
2565
2728
2894
3067
18
49
84
128
178
232
294
362
433
516
601
691
793
896
1008
1123
1246
1378
1511
1653
1801
1956
2116
2281
2452
2632
2818
3007
3205
3409
3616
3832
300
11
Rune
1
1
Measured in module size x, assuming default module size (cd=00).
[2]
Maximum sizes are approximate and data dependent, and may be less than indicated.
[1]
215
1
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
Error Correction
Size 001 to 099: This value specifies the percent of symbol code words to be used for
error correction. Actual error correction word percentage will vary depending on data.
The default value, approximately 23%, is recommended. Any other value may be
selected to meet the user’s needs. Some minimum-security code word may be
generated depending on the data sent for encoding, particularly when the volume of that
data is small. It the data capacity is exceeded no symbol is printed.
Size 101 to 104: Values 101 through 104 results in 1 through 4 layers (two modules
thick) respectively, around the center finder pattern. Data volume constraints apply as
indicated in the table above. Symbols will be of the compact form. All available code
word will be used for error correction. It the data capacity is exceeded no symbol is
printed.
Size 201 to 232: Values 201 through 232 result in 1 through 32 layers (two modules
thick) respectively, around the center finder pattern. Data volume constraints apply as
indicated in the table above. Symbols will be of the full-size form. All available
codewords will be used for error correction. It the data capacity is exceeded no symbol
is printed.
Size 300: Value 300 informs the printer that the data, which follows will be used to
encode one RUNE symbol. The data consists of one to three ASCII digits with value
range of 0 to 256. The data may include leading zeros. Data streams longer than three
digits or data that includes non-numeric characters may have unpredictable results.
Extended Channel Interpretation Mode: A value of 1 provides for extended channel
codewords to be inserted into the bar code symbol, using escape sequences in the
datastream. This mode also provides for effective Code 128 and UCC/EAN 128
emulations, when used in with appropriately configured bar code readers. The valid
values for escape sequences are of the form <ESC>n, where:
<ESC>
n
– 1 byte with value 2710 = 1B16
– 1 ASCII digit, range 0 through 6
These escape sequences are encoded as FLG(n) character pairs described in the
International Symbology Specification – Aztec Code, AIM, 1997-11-05, and the
meanings of the values for n are the same in both.
<ESC>0 – Is encoded as FLG(0), and interpreted as FNC1 or <GS> depending on its
location in the data stream. The printer does not validate <ESC>0
locations in the data stream.
When <ESC>0 is the leading data in the stream, it is interpreted as a
FNC1 as used in the Code 128 symbology, and specifically for UCC/EAN
128 applications. For appropriately configured scanners this will be
interpreted/transmitted as a ]C1 symbology identifier preamble. The
printer does not validate UCC/EAN 128 data syntax.
When <ESC>0 follows a single alphabetic or two numeric characters
respectively, then it also interpreted as a FNC1. For appropriately
configured scanners this would be interpreted/transmitted as a ]C2
symbology identifier preamble, and the alpha or numeric characters
216
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
preceding the FNC1 are Application Indicators assigned by AIM
International. The printer does not check AI validity.
When <ESC>0 is anywhere else in the data stream, a <GS> replaces it in
the bar code symbol, as with UCC/EAN 128 field separators.
<ESC>n – Is encoded as FLG(n), and is interpreted as signaling Extended Channel
Interpretation. When the value of n is from 1 to 6, it signals that the
following n digits comprise an extended channel identifier for use with ECI
compliant bar code scanners. An erroneous bar code symbol may result
from failing to follow <ESC>n with n digits. Any <ESC>0 following
<ESC>n and not within the n digits will be encoded as FLG(0). In the
context of a FLG(n), any backslash “\” (9210) will be interpreted by the
scanner as two backslashes “\\”.
Example 1:
The variable length example encodes “AZTEC” with no ECI input, and 23%
error correction, and prints the bar code. A line of text is also printed.
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1W1f00000001501000000AZTEC<CR>
121100000000100Barcode W1f<CR>
E
Example 2:
Barcode W1f
The specified length example includes a byte count field for all bytes that
follow until the end of the bar code data. The byte count is 17. The
symbology encodes “AZTEC<CR>barcode”, and prints the bar code. Notice
that a <CR> does not terminate the bar code format record. A line of text
is also printed.
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1W1F000000015010000170000AZTEC<0x0D>barcode
121100000000100Barcode W1F<CR>
E
Barcode W1F
Functions Not Supported
•
•
•
Structured Append
Reader Initialization Symbol Generation
Module shaving
217
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
W1g / W1G: USD-8 (Code 11)
Valid Characters: 0-9,Bar Code Data String Length: Variable, typical max 41 characters
Human Readable: W1G; and, Non-Human Readable: W1g
USD-8 (Code 11) is a bar code that encodes the ten digits and the dash (-) character.
An additional character serves as the start and stop indicator. Each character has three
bars and two spaces for a total of five elements. Of these five elements, two are of
medium width and three are narrow, except for the “0”, “9”, and “-“ characters, which
have only one wide element and four narrow elements.
The narrow bar size is specified in DPL by the narrow bar parameter, the medium is
specified in DPL by the wide bar parameter and the wide bar is fixed at 2 times the
medium bar minus the narrow bar.
DPL calculates two checksum characters, C and K, and automatically places them prior
to the stop character. The following example prints a Code11 bar code:
<STX>L
D11
1W1G00000015001500123456789-<CR>
121100000000100Barcode W1G<CR>
E
Barcode W1G
W1I: EAN128 (with Auto Subset Switching)
Valid characters: The entire 128 ASCII character set.
Variable length, minimum 4 characters
Valid bar widths: The fourth character of record is the width of the narrow bar in dots.
All other bars are a ratio of the narrow bar (2 times the narrow bar width, 3 times the
narrow bar width, and 4 times the narrow bar width).
This printer supports the Code 128 subsets A, B, and C. If the data begins with at least
four numeric characters the default start code is subset C. If there is a non-numeric in
the first four characters then the default start code is subset B. The next character after
start is always FNC1. Subset switching between B and C is performed based on rules as
below:
1. If in subset C and there are an odd number of numeric digits, subset B will be set
prior to the last digit.
2. If four or more numeric digits appear consecutively while in subset B, the character
code C will be set prior to the digits.
3. When in subset C and a non-numeric occurs, subset B will be inserted prior to the
character.
218
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
Note that there is no auto-switching from or to Subset A. Standard switches are still
used (see table below).
Subset A: Includes all of the standard uppercase alphanumeric keyboard characters
plus the control and special characters.
Subset B: Includes all of the standard uppercase alphanumeric keyboard characters
plus the lowercase alphabetic and special characters.
Subset C: Includes the set of 100 digit pairs from 00 through 99 inclusive, as well as
special characters. EAN128 Subset C is used for double density encoding of numeric
data.
Special Character Handling: Characters with an ASCII value greater than 95 are
considered special characters. To access these values, a two-character reference table is
built into the printer; see table below. As an example, to encode FNC2 into an EAN128
Subset A bar code, send the ASCII & (DEC 38, HEX 26) followed by an ASCII B (DEC 66,
HEX 41). Code FNC2 will be encoded.
ASCII
2 CHAR
CODE A
CODE B
CODE C
96
&A
FNC3
FNC3
-NA-
97
&B
FNC2
FNC2
-NA-
98
&C
SHIFT
SHIFT
-NA-
99
&D
CODEC
-NA-
-NA-
100
&E
CODEB
FNC4
-NA-
101
&F
FNC4
CODEA
CODEA
102
&G
FNC1
FNC1
FNC1
Control Codes: Control character encoding into Code 128 Subset A by sending these
control codes:
`
a through z
{
|
}
~
ASCII 127
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
NUL
1 - 26
ESC
FS
GS
RS
US
219
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
The following example prints an EAN128 bar code:
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1W1I000000025002512345&G10Z2133021AK<CR>
121100000000100Barcode W1I<CR>
E
Barcode W1I
When scanned this bar code will decode as follows:
[C][FNC1]1234[B]5[F1]10Z[C]213302[B]1AK(81)
W1J: Code 128 (with Auto Subset Switching)
Valid characters: The entire 128 ASCII character set.
Variable length
Valid bar widths: The fourth character of record is the width of the narrow bar in dots.
All other bars are a ratio of the narrow bar (2 times the narrow bar width, 3 times the
narrow bar width, and 4 times the narrow bar width).
This printer supports the Code 128 subsets A, B, and C. If the data begins with at least
four numeric characters the default start code is subset C. If there is a non-numeric in
the first four characters or there are less than four then the default start code is subset
B. Subset switching between B and C is based on the following rules:
1. If in subset C and there are an odd number of numeric digits, subset B will be set
prior to the last digit.
2. If four or more numeric digits appear consecutively while in subset B, the character
code C will be set prior to the digits. If there is an odd number of numerics already in
B, the first numeric will be placed in B with the others in C.
3. When in subset C and a non-numeric occurs, subset B will be inserted prior to the
character.
Note that there is no auto switching from, or to, subset A. Standard switches are still
used. See table below.
Subset A: Includes all of the standard uppercase alphanumeric keyboard characters
plus the control and special characters.
Subset B: Includes all of the standard uppercase alphanumeric keyboard characters
plus the lowercase alphabetic and special characters.
Subset C: Includes the set of 100 digit pairs from 00 through 99 inclusive, as well as
special characters. Code128 Subset C is used for double density encoding of numeric
data.
Special Character Handling: Characters with an ASCII value greater than 95 are
considered special characters. To access these values, a two-character reference table is
220
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
built into the printer; see table below. As an example, to encode FNC2 into a Code128
Subset A bar code, send the ASCII & (DEC 38, HEX 26) followed by an ASCII B (DEC 66,
HEX 41). Code FNC2 will be encoded.
ASCII
2 CHAR
CODE A
CODE B
CODE C
96
&A
FNC3
FNC3
-NA-
97
&B
FNC2
FNC2
-NA-
98
&C
SHIFT
SHIFT
-NA-
99
&D
CODEC
-NA-
-NA-
100
&E
CODEB
FNC4
-NA-
101
&F
FNC4
CODEA
CODEA
102
&G
FNC1
FNC1
FNC1
Control Codes: Control character encoding into Code 128 Subset A by sending these
control codes:
`
a through z
{
|
}
~
ASCII 127
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
NUL
1 - 26
ESC
FS
GS
RS
US
The following example prints a Code128 Auto bar code:
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1W1J000000025002512345&G10Z2133021AK<CR>
121100000000100Barcode W1J<CR>
E
Barcode W1J
When scanned this bar code will decode as follows:
[C]1234[B]5[F1]10Z2 [C]133021[B]AK(95)
221
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
W1k: GS1 DataBar (previously “Reduced Space Symbology RSS”)
Valid Characters: Type dependent
Bar Code Data String Length: Type dependent
GS1 DataBar is a continuous, linear symbology used for identification in EAN.UCC
systems. There are six different types:
GS1 DataBar Type
Overview*
• Encodes a full 14-digit EAN.UCC item identification
GS1 DataBar
GS1 DataBar Truncated
GS1 DataBar Stacked
GS1 DataBar Stacked Omni-Directional
within a linear symbol that can be scanned omnidirectionally.
• The encodable character set is 0 through 9.
• The maximum numeric data capacity is the
application identifier plus 14-digit numeric item
identification.
• Error detection is mod 79 checksum.
• Encodes a 14-digit EAN.UCC item identification with
indicator digits of zero or one within a linear symbol.
• The encodable character set is 0 through 9.
GS1 DataBar Limited
• The maximum numeric data capacity for is the
application identifier plus 14-digit numeric item
identification.
• Data must begin with indicator 0 or 1. Any higher
number results in discarded data.
• Error detection is mod 89 checksum.
• Encodes EAN.UCC item identification plus
supplementary AI element strings.
• The encodable character is a subset of ISO 646,
GS1 DataBar Expanded
consisting of upper and lower case letters, digits and
20 selected punctuation characters, plus the special
function character FNC1, (#).
• The maximum numeric data capacity is 74 numeric or
41 alphanumeric.
• Error detection is mod 211 checksum.
*Additional data can be encoded in a two-dimensional composite as per specification (see AIM
Spec ITS/99-001 for more details).
222
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
Syntax for GS1 DataBar (spaces added for readability):
a W1 k c d eee ffff gggg h
i j m n…n | p…p
Where:
Field
Valid Inputs
Meaning
a
1,2,3, and 4
W1
W1
k
k
c
1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z
Wide bar ratio, default = 2
d
1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z
Narrow bar ratio, default = 2
eee
000
ffff
0000 to 9999
Label position, row
gggg
0000 to 9999
Label position, column
Rotation
Fixed value, extended bar code set
Selects GS1 bar code
No effect
GS1 Type:
R
T
S
D
L
=
=
=
=
=
GS1
GS1
GS1
GS1
GS1
DataBar
DataBar
DataBar
DataBar
DataBar
h
R, T, S, D, L
i
1-9
j
0 to (i-1)
X pixels to undercut
m
0 to (i-1)
Y pixels to undercut
n…n
0 to 9
|
| (optional)
p…p
2-D data (optional)
Omnidirectional,
Truncated,
Stacked,
Stacked Omni-Directional,
Limited
Pixel Multiplier
Numeric linear data, length 13
[1]
Vertical bar separates primary linear data from secondary
2-D data
Additional 2-D data
[2]
[1]
The application identifier is not encoded in the symbol nor is the last check digit; the user
should enter in a 13-digit value. The decoding system will display the application identifier and
calculate the check digit.
[2]
The separator row height for two-dimensional composite is fixed at one times the pixel
multiplier.
Examples:
The following example prints an GS1 DataBar bar code:
<STX>L
D11
1W1k0000001500150R1002001234567890
121100000000100Barcode W1k<CR>
E
Barcode W1k
223
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
The following example prints an GS1 DataBar bar code with 2-D data:
<STX>L
D11
1W1k0000001500150R1002001234567890|123456-99/99/99
121100000000100Barcode W1k<CR>
E
Barcode W1k
The following example prints an GS1 DataBar Truncated bar code:
Barcode W1k
<STX>L
D11
1W1k0000001500150T1002001234567890
121100000000100Barcode W1k<CR>
E
The following example prints an GS1 DataBar Stacked bar code:
Barcode W1k
<STX>L
D11
1W1k0000001500150S1002001234567890
121100000000100Barcode W1k<CR>
E
The following example prints an GS1 DataBar Stacked Omni-Directional
bar code:
<STX>L
D11
1W1k0000001500150D1002001234567890
121100000000100Barcode W1k<CR>
E
Barcode W1k
The following example prints an GS1 DataBar Limited bar code:
Barcode W1k
<STX>L
D11
1W1k0000001500150L1001501234567890
121100000000100Barcode W1k<CR>
E
Syntax for the GS1 DataBar Expanded bar code (spaces added for readability):
a W1 k c d eee ffff gggg h
i j m nn p…p | q…q
Where:
224
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
Field
Valid Inputs
a
1,2,3, and 4
W1
W1
k
k
c
1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z
Wide bar ratio, default = 2
d
1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z
Narrow bar ratio, default = 2
eee
000
ffff
0000 to 9999
Label position, row
gggg
0000 to 9999
Label position, column
h
E
i
1-9
j
0 to (i-1)
m
0 to (i-1)
nn
Meaning
Rotation
Fixed value, extended bar code set
Selects GS1 bar code
No effect
GS1 Type: E= GS1 DataBar Expanded
Pixel Multiplier
X pixels to undercut
Y pixels to undercut
[2]
2-22, even only
p…p
0 to 9
|
| (optional)
q…q
2-D data (optional)
Segments per row
Subset of ISO646, including alphanumerics
Vertical bar separates primary linear data from secondary
2-D data
Additional 2-D data
[1]
[1]
Separator row height for two-dimensional composite is fixed at one times the pixel multiplier.
When using additional 2-D composite data, the sequence width must be at least 4.
[2]
Example:
The following example prints an GS1 DataBar Expanded bar code.
<STX>L
D11
1W1k0000001500150E100022001234567890
121100000000100Barcode W1k<CR>
E
Barcode W1k
W1L: Planet Code
Valid Characters: 0-9
Variable length, minimum one digit
Example:
The following example prints a Planet Code bar code:
<STX>L
D11
1W1L4405001000100123456789
E
Barcode W1L
225
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
W1m / W1M:
Australia Post 4-State Bar Code
Length: 37, 52, or 67 bars
Usage: This symbol is used for processing mail in the Australia Post System. The symbol
is 37, 52 or 67 bars in length, and the height and ratios are fixed according to the
specification (see “Customer Barcoding Technical Specifications” from Australia Post for
more information).
Syntax for the Australia Post 4-State Bar Code (spaces added for readability):
a W1 m c d eee ffff gggg hh iiiiiiii j…j
Where:
Field
Valid Inputs
Meaning
a
1,2,3, and 4
W1
W1
m
m and M
c
0
Not used.
d
0
Not used.
eee
000
Not used.
ffff
0000 to 9999
Label position, row
gggg
0000 to 9999
Label position, column
Rotation
Fixed value, extended bar code set
Lowercase selects the Australia Post bar code, and
uppercase selects the Australia Post bar code with a
human readable field.
Format Control Code (FCC):
hh
11, 87, 45, 92, 59, 62,
44
iiiiiiii
00000000-99999999
j…j
0-9, a-z, A-Z, #, space
FCC Value
11
87
45
92
59
62
44
Resulting Format
Standard Customer Bar Code
Routing Bar Code
Reply Paid Bar Code
Redirection Bar Code
Customer Bar Code 2
Customer Bar Code 3
Reserved
8-digit Delivery Point Identifier (DPID)
Optional – Customer information, Bar Code 2 or 3 (Bar
Code 2 has a maximum of 8 digits or 5 alphanumeric
characters, while Bar Code 3 has a maximum of 15 digits
or 10 alphanumeric characters), where if all numeric then
data will be encoded in N-type; otherwise, C-type will be
used.
Example 1:
The following example prints a standard Customer Bar Code using a DPID of
“39987520”:
226
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1WM00000005000501139987520<CR>
E
Barcode W1M
Note that the human readable shows the format control code, sorting code and the
generated Reed Solomon error correction parity values.
Example 2:
The following example prints a Customer Bar Code 2 using a DPID of “32211324” and
customer information “A124B”:
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1Wm00000005001505932211324A124B<CR>
E
W1n / W1N:
Barcode W1m
Industrial 2 of 5
Industrial 2 of 5 is a discrete, self-checking, continuous numeric bar code. All of the
information is contained in the bars, either wide or narrow, typically in a 3:1 ratio. The
space is equal to the width of the narrow bar.
Valid Characters: 0-9
Variable length, minimum one digit
Human Readable: W1N; and, Non-Human Readable: W1n
Example:
The following example prints an Industrial 2 of 5 with
a human readable field:
<STX>L
D11
1W1N8305001000100123456
E
Barcode W1N
227
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
W1p: Intelligent Mail Barcode (IMB)
Valid Characters: 0-9
Length: 20, 25, 29 or 31 digits
Valid bar widths: The width and height multiplier values of 00 will produce a valid IMB
symbol.
Usage: The bar code height field is ignored since the symbol height is United States
Postal Service specific. This bar code represents a 20 digit tracking code and a zero,
five, nine, or eleven digit routing code on a letter or package for the USPS.
Example:
The following example prints an IMB bar code:
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1W1p000000050005001234567094987654321012345678
91<CR>
E
Barcode W1p
W1q: CODABLOCK
CODABLOCK is a two-dimensional, multi-row, stacked bar code. CODABLOCK A uses the
Code 39 character set and supports variable ratios. CODABLOCK E and F use the Code
128 character set and support only fixed ratios, while CODABLOCK E also adds FNC1
automatically to the beginning of the data.
Valid Characters: CODABLOCK A: 0-9, A-Z, - . * $ / + % and the space character; and,
CODABLOCK E and F: All ASCII characters.
Variable length
Syntax (spaces added for readability): a W1q b c ddd eeee ffff
228
g h ii jj k…k
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
Where:
Meaning
Field
Valid Inputs
a
1,2,3, and 4
W1q
W1q
b
1 to 9, A to Z, and
a to z
Horizontal multiplier* (0 = default size)
c
1 to 9, A to Z, and
a to z
Vertical multiplier* (0 = default size)
ddd
001 to 999
eeee
0000 to 9999
Label position, row
ffff
0000 to 9999
Label position, column
g
A, E, F
h
0,1
ii
01-44
Number of rows to encode
jj
02-62
Number of characters per row
k…k
ASCII chars
Rotation
Fixed value, extended bar code set, selects CODABLOCK
Individual row height
CODABLOCK Mode – A, E, or F
Whether to generate and add checksum
Data
* Only CODABLOCK A supports variable ratios.
Example:
The following example prints a CODABLOCK E bar code with 4
rows, 2 characters per row:
<STX>L
D11
1W1q2202501000100E0040212345678
E
Barcode W1q
W1R: UCC/EAN Code 128 K-MART NON EDI
Valid Characters: 0-9
Length: 18 digits
Valid bar widths: The fourth character of record is the width of the narrow bar in dots.
All other bars are a ratio of the narrow bar (2, 3, or 4 times the narrow bar width).
Human readable characters for this bar code are printed above the symbol.
This produces the same symbology as bar code ID “R”, except that the human readable
field has been modified to print underneath the bar code (see below).
229
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
Example:
The following example prints a KMART bar code:
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1W1R0000000150100012345678901234567<CR>
121100000000100Barcode W1R<CR>
E
34 567890 123 4567
Barcode W1R
W1s / W1S:
Standard 2 of 5
Standard 2 of 5 is a discrete, self-checking, continuous numeric bar code. All of the
information is contained in the bars. Bars are either wide or narrow, typically in a 3:1
ratio. The space is equal to the width of the narrow bar.
Valid Characters: 0-9
Variable length, minimum one digit
Human Readable: W1S; and, Non-Human Readable: W1s
Example:
The following example prints a Standard 2 of 5 bar code:
<STX>L
D11
1W1S8305001000100123456
E
Barcode W1S
W1t: TCIF Linked 3 of 9 (TLC39)
Valid Characters: All ASCII characters.
Variable Length: Encodes a 25-character alphanumeric number in MicroPDF417 symbol.
Specified Length: Encodes a six-digit sequence in a standard Code 39 followed by a link
flag character in Code 3 of 9.
Syntax (spaces added for readability): a W1 t c d eee ffff gggg hhhhhh ; ii…i
Where:
230
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
Field
Valid Inputs
a
1,2,3, and 4
W1
W1
t
t
c
1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z
Wide bar of Code 39, ratio of wide to narrow must be
between 2:1 and 3:1.
d
1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z
Narrow bar of Code 39
eee
001 to 999
Height of Code 39
ffff
0000 to 9999
Label position, row
gggg
0000 to 9999
Label position, column
hhhhhh
ECI Data
;
Fixed
S/N Data
i…i
Meaning
Rotation
Fixed value, extended bar code set
Selects TLC39 bar code
Six digit ECI number
Parses data. (If the seventh character is not a semi colon
then only a six-digit code 39 will print.)
Up to 25 alphanumeric serial number characters to be
encoded in the MicroPDF417 symbol. This symbol is fixed
at four columns. The number of rows is determined by the
amount of data, as follows:
Character Count
1-14
15-22
23-25
Row Count
4
6
8
The link flag is the character “T” in Code 39 without a start/stop indicator. The flag
location is based on the ECI code location, length, and height. The location of the
MicroPDF417 symbol is based on the location of ECI bar code. The symbol’s module
width and height are fixed at the default. The following example prints a TLC39 bar
code:
<STX>L
D11
1Wt0000001500150123456;ABCD12345678901234
1911A0801300170A1B2C3DAAA
121100000000100Barcode W1t<CR>
E
Barcode W1t
W1y / W1Y:
Code 16K
Code 16K is a multi-row bar code.
Valid Characters: All ASCII characters
Variable length
Human Readable: W1Y; and, Non-Human Readable: W1y
231
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
Example:
The following example prints a Code 16K:
<STX>L
D11
1W1Y3305001000100ABC123
E
Barcode W1Y
W1z: MicroPDF417
MicroPDF417 is a 2 dimensional bar code capable of holding large amounts of data in a
small area. It provides a high level of redundancy and error checking.
Valid Characters: All ASCII characters, depending on the selected options.
Variable Length
Syntax (spaces added for readability): a W z c d eee ffff gggg h i j k 0 m…m
Where:
Field
Valid Inputs
Meaning
a
1,2,3, and 4
W1
W1
Fixed value, extended bar code set.
z
z
Selects the MicroPDF417 bar code.
c
1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z
Module size horizontal multiplier, 0 – default size.
d
1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z
Module size vertical multiplier, 0 – default size.
eee
000
ffff
0000 to 9999
Label position, row
gggg
0000 to 9999
Label position, column
h
1 to 4
i
0 to 9 and A
j
0, 1
Byte Compaction Mode, 1 - best binary data compression
k
0, 1
Macro Character Substitution, 1 - disable
0
0
m…m
8-bit data
Rotation
No Effect
Number columns
Row / Error Correction index
Fixed ASCII digit 0. Reserved for future use.
Data to be encoded.
The following example prints a MicroPDF417 bar code, default module size (cd = 00),
with 1 column, 24 rows, error correction of 33%, no byte compaction, macro character
substitution enabled.
232
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1W1z000000015010014000PDF417<CR>
121100000000100Barcode W1z<CR>
E
Barcode W1z
The number of columns (h) and row / error correction index (i) combine to form the
selection index (hi), which determines other symbol characteristics as shown below:
Row/Column/Error Correction Selection Index (hi) Implications
Max
Max
Symbol Symbol
Max
Max Alpha
Errors
Numeric
Width Height Binary Data Characters
Corrected
Characters
[2]
[3]
[5]
Bytes[3]
[1]
[5]
hi
Columns
Rows
10
11
12
13
14
15
1
1
1
1
1
1
11
14
17
20
24
28
4
4
4
5
5
5
40
40
40
40
40
40
24
30
36
42
50
58
3
7
10
13
18
22
6
12
18
22
30
38
8
17
26
32
44
55
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
8
11
14
17
20
23
26
5
6
6
7
8
10
12
57
57
57
57
57
57
57
18
24
30
36
42
48
54
8
14
21
27
33
38
43
14
24
36
46
56
67
72
20
35
52
67
82
93
105
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
6
8
10
12
15
20
26
32
38
44
9
11
13
15
18
23
29
35
41
47
84
84
84
84
84
84
84
84
84
84
14
18
22
26
32
42
54
66
78
90
6
10
15
20
27
39
54
68
82
97
10
18
26
34
46
66
90
114
138
162
14
26
38
49
67
96
132
167
202
237
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
4A
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
6
8
10
12
15
20
26
32
38
44
5
9
11
13
15
18
23
29
35
41
47
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
10
14
18
22
26
32
42
54
66
78
90
8
13
20
27
34
45
63
85
106
128
150
14
22
34
46
58
76
106
142
178
214
250
20
32
49
67
85
111
155
208
261
313
366
[1]
[2]
[3]
[3]
[5]
Can be any combination of 1 erasures + 2 substitutions (e.g. 13 maximum number of errors corrected
might include 7 erasures and 3 substitutions).
Includes 1 module width of quiet zone on either side.
Assumes the module height is 2 module width, and includes one module width quiet zones on top and
bottom.
Assumes Binary Compaction.
Assumes Text Compaction.
233
Appendix G – Bar Code Details

In the table above, row/column/error correction selection index (hi) values increasingly
large do not necessarily result in the ability to encode more data.
Byte Compaction Mode (j = 1)
A value of 1 forces Byte Compaction. The compaction ratio is six 8-bit bytes of data
compressed into a 5-symbol codeword. See the table above for the maximum data
allowed for any row/column/error correction selection index (hi).
Macro Character Substitution Disable (k=1)
By default Macro Character Substitution is enabled (k=0). When enabled, Byte
Compaction has priority over Macro Character Substitution. When Macro Character
Substitution is enabled, the data stream header and trailer are compacted when they
conform to the following forms:
[)>RS05GS data RS EoT
or
R
[)> S06GS data RS EoT
where:
data may not contain adjacent bytes with values RS or
(
R
S
= 3010 , 1E16 and
G
S
= 2910
G
S
1D16 and oT = 410 ,416)
E
,
Functions Not Supported
•
•
•
•
General Purpose Extended Channel Interpretations, including Code-128 emulations
Structured Append
Reader Initialization Symbol Generation
Module shaving
W1Z: Micro PDF417 with Byte Count Specifier
Specified Length – The upper case Z identifies a Micro PDF417 bar code with a 4-digit
string length specifier. This allows values 0x00 through 0xFF to be included within the
data strings without conflicting with the DPL format record terminators. The four-digit
decimal data byte count immediately follows the four-digit column position field. This
value includes all of the data following the byte count field, but does not include itself.
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1W1Z0000000150100001214000pdf<0x0D>417
121100000000100Barcode W1Z<CR>
E
Barcode W1Z
234
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
From the example, the bar code’s data stream,
1W1Z0000000150100001214000PDF<0x0D>417,
includes a Byte Count Specifier (the portion in bold), where 0012 equals the four-digit
decimal data byte count and includes all bytes that follow until the end of the bar code
data. Field termination is set by the byte count. <STX>, <CR>, and <0x0D> all represent
single byte values of hexadecimal 02, 0D, and 0D, respectively. The Micro PDF417 bar
code produced encodes “pdf<CR>417”, and prints a line of text: Barcode W1Z.
235
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
236
Appendix H – Single and Double Byte Character Font Mapping
Appendix H
Single and Double Byte Character Font Mapping
Label format records with font code 9 in the b field of the Format Record header can specify
any of the following bitmapped or scalable fonts with the associated specification in the font
size/selection (eee height) field, as shown in the tables on the following pages.
Example: 1911u4000100010A0215134<CR>
The example above will produce a printed string consisting of the two Kanji characters
referenced by the two HEX ASCII pairs A0, 21, and 51, 34, on appropriately equipped
printers.
Example: 1911U4001000100P012P012<0x38><0x77><0x00>
The above example will produce a printed string consisting of the one 12 point Kanji
character referenced by the byte pair with hex values 38 and 77 on appropriately equipped
printers.

Double byte hex representation character strings terminate with two null bytes and a <CR>,
i.e., 0x 00 00 0D. The Hex-ASCII representation is terminated with <CR>.
The alphanumeric portion (nn) of the scalable font specifiers, Snn, Unn, unn, numbering
system is a base 62 numbering system, 0, 1, 2…8, 9, A, B, C...X, Y, Z, a, b, c...x, y, z. For
scalable fonts the S designation signifies single byte characters and U designates double
byte. The lower case U counterpart signifies that print data in the label format record is in a
hex-ASCII format. Fonts that have been downloaded with designators of the form nn, where
nn are alphanumeric, as seen in the font size specifier (eee height) column below, may be
referenced in label format records by their upper or lower case specifiers as available.
However, fonts created for double-byte access cannot be accessed using Snn as the font
designator, and vice versa, single-byte fonts cannot be accessed using Unn or unn.

Downloading scalable fonts require specifying the font ID, a two character alphanumeric.
The S, or U, u used in referencing the font within label format records is not used in the
download specification. Attempting to utilize a scalable font with an inappropriate byte-size
designation (e.g. S on double byte or U, u on single byte) will have unpredictable results.
237
Appendix H – Single and Double Byte Character Font Mapping
Font 9, Font Specifications (eee Height) and Associated Characteristics
Font
Name
Character
Mapping
Font Size Specifier
(eee Height)
Point
Size
Font 9 Bitmapped Downloaded Fonts
User-downloaded
typeface
Single Byte
100 - 999
user defined
Font 9 Scalable Resident Fonts Specifications
CG Triumvirate Bold
Condensed
Single Byte
S00
CG Triumvirate
Single Byte
S01
scalable
scalable
Font 9 Scalable Resident Fonts Specifications (optional)
CG Times
Single Byte
SA0
scalable
CG Times Italic
Single Byte
SA1
scalable
CG Times Bold
Single Byte
SA2
scalable
CG Times Bold Italic
Single Byte
SA3
scalable
Gothic B Kanji
Double Byte (Binary)
U40
scalable
Gothic B Kanji
Double Byte (Hex ASCII)
u40
scalable
GB Simplified Chinese
Double Byte (Binary)
UC0
scalable
GB Simplified Chinese
Double Byte (Hex ASCII)
uC0
scalable
Korean Hangul
Double Byte (Binary)
UH0
scalable
Korean Hangul
Double Byte (Hex ASCII)
uH0
scalable
Font 9 Scalable Downloaded Fonts
User-downloaded
typeface
Single Byte (Binary)
S50 - S5z...,
S90 - S9z
scalable
User-downloaded
typeface
Double Byte (Binary)
U50...,U5z...,
U90...U9z
scalable
User-downloaded
typeface
Double Byte (Hex ASCII)
u50...,u5z...,
u90...u9z
scalable
238
Appendix I – Symbol Sets and Character Maps
Appendix I
Symbol Sets and Character Maps
Symbol Set Selection
Scalable fonts are mapped through a symbol set sometimes referred to as a “code page”.
This mapping allows the host application to select a variety of characters to match the
application. For example in the code page (CP), character code 0xE4 causes character to
be printed. In CP E7, the character code 0xE4 causes to be printed. Each of the CPs allows
the host application to “emulate” a character set for their application. Datamax-O’Neil
printers that support scalable fonts contain either a standard or an enhanced group of CPs
as defined below. The CP (symbol set) is selected using a DPL Command, <STX>ySxx, where
xx is the two letter CP Identifier.

In the following table, the checkmark symbol ( ) is used to indicate a full compliment of
characters, while “Part” indicates a partial compliment of characters and “X” indicates an
absence of characters for the given code page.
Single Byte Code Pages
Code Page
Identifier
Font Format
MicroType
Description
True
Type
[2]
Datamax
HP
(PCL)
CG
Triumvirate
CG
Times
AR
8V
X
[1]
Arabic-8
CP
3R
Part
[1]
PC Cyrillic
D1
11L
X
X
ITC Zapf Dingbats/100
D2
12L
X
X
ITC Zapf Dingbats/200
D3
13L
X
X
ITC Zapf Dingbats/300
DN
0D
Part
Part
DS
10L
X
X
DT
7J
DeskTop
E1
0N
ISO 8859/1 Latin 1
E2
2N
ISO 8859/2 Latin 2
E5
5N
ISO 8859/9 Latin 5
ISO 60 Danish /
Norwegian
PS ITC Zapf Dingbats
(continued)
239
Appendix I – Symbol Sets and Character Maps
Single Byte Code Pages
Code Page
Identifier
Datamax
HP
(PCL)
E6
6N
E7
12N
E9
9N
EG
12N
EH
Font Format
MicroType
CG
Triumvirate
Description
True
Type
[2]
CG
Times
ISO 8859/10 Latin 6
X
[1]
X
[1]
ISO 8859/7 Latin/Greek
[1]
ISO 8859/15 Latin 9
Part
[1]
ISO 8859/7 Latin/Greek
7H
Part
[1]
ISO 8859/8 Latin/Hebrew
ER
10N
Part
[1]
ISO 8859/5 Latin/Cyrillic
FR
1F
Part
G8
8G
Part
[1]
Greek-8
GK
12G
Part
[1]
PC-8 Greek
GR
1G
Part
H0
0H
Part
[1]
Hebrew-7
H8
8H
Part
[1]
Hebrew-8
IT
0I
L$[1]
14L
LG
1U
Legal
M8
8M
Math-8
MC
12J
MS
5M
P9[1]
13U
PB
6J
PC
10U
PC-8, Code Page 437
PD
11U
PC-8 D/N, Code Page 437N
PE
17U
PC-852 Latin 2
PG
10G
Part
ISO 69: French
Part
ISO 21: German
ISO 15: Italian
X
X
[3]
Part
Part
HP4000 ITC Zapf Dingbats
[3]
Macintosh
[3]
[3]
PS Math
[3]
[3]
PC-858 Multilingual
Part
Microsoft Publishing
[1]
(continued)
240
PC-851 Latin/Greek
Appendix I – Symbol Sets and Character Maps
Code Page
Identifier
Font Format
MicroType
CG
Triumvirate
Description
True
Type
[2]
Datamax
HP
(PCL)
CG
Times
PH
15H
PI
15U
PM
12U
PR
10V
PC-864 Latin/Arabic
PT
9T
PC-8 TK, Code Page 437T
PU
9J
PC-1004
PV
26U
PC-775 Baltic
PX
12U
X
X
PY
3Y
X
X
R8
8U
R9[1]
4U
SP
2S
ISO 17: Spanish
SW
0S
ISO 11: Swedish
SY
19M
X
X
Symbol
TK
8T
X
X
Turkish-8
TS
10J
PS Text
UK
1E
ISO 4: United Kingdom
US
0U
ISO 6: ASCII
U8
-
UTF8
VI
13J
VM
6M
VU
14J
W1[3]
19U
WA
9V
[1]
Part
Part
[3]
[3]
PC-862 Latin/Hebrew
Pi Font
[3]
PC-850 Multilingual
PTXT3000
[1]
Non-UGL, Generic Pi Font
Roman-8
[3]
[3]
Roman-9
Ventura International
[1]
Part
Part
Ventura Math
Ventura US
Windows 3.1 Latin 1
[1]
(continued)
241
Windows Latin/Arabic
Appendix I – Symbol Sets and Character Maps
Code Page
Identifier
Font Format
MicroType
Description
True
Type
[2]
Datamax
HP
(PCL)
CG
Triumvirate
CG
Times
WD
579L
X
X
WE[3]
9E
WG[3]
9G
WL[3]
19L
WN
9U
WO
9U
WR[3]
9R
WT[3]
5T
Wingdings
Windows 3.1 Latin 2
[1]
Part
Windows Latin/Greek
Windows 3.1 Baltic (Latv, Lith)
X
[3]
X
[3]
[3]
Windows
[3]
Windows 3.0 Latin 1
[1]
Windows Latin/Cyrillic
Windows 3.1 Latin 5
[3]
Contains the Euro currency symbol ( ).
Double-Byte Symbols, Chinese, Kanji, and Korean
Character Map Selection
Double byte scalable fonts are mapped through a “character map”. This mapping allows the
host application to select a variety of characters to match the application. Each of the code
pages allows the host application to emulate a character set for the application.
Double Byte Character Map
Character
Map ID
TrueType
Font
Description
B5
BIG 5 (Taiwan) Encoded*
EU
EUC (Extended UNIX Code)
GB
Government Bureau Industry Standard; Chinese (PRC); default
JS
JIS (Japanese Industry Standard); default
SJ
Shift JIS
UC
Unicode (including Korean)
*Unavailable for the EX2.
The double-byte symbol set is selected using <STX>yUxx command. The single-byte symbol
set is selected using the same command, <STX>ySxx. Each affects an independent database
selection and has no impact on the other.
242
Appendix J – General Purpose Input Output Port Applications
Appendix J
General Purpose Input Output (GPIO) Port Applications
GPIO-equipped printers can interface with most external controlling devices. Operational
preferences can be stored for subsequent power-ups using the printer menu, or via <STX>Kc
commands. Functions and connections vary, as discussed below.
Always wear a wrist strap and follow ESD prevention measures when handling the GPIO
or Applicator Interface Card. For specification information, reference the printer’s
Maintenance Manual.
GPI/O I-Class Mark II
Four dedicated inputs are available for control of printer functions. These inputs require
no external pull-ups, are designed to interface to open-collector outputs and accept totem
pole outputs from +4.5 to + 26 VDC. Optical isolators are available to provide isolation. Two
print control circuit examples are given below.
•
For direct inputs –
GPI/O A - J1
Use the printer’s +5VDC and Ground to supply
the devices interfacing to the GPI/O A inputs
(as shown, right).
3 Start of Print
4
Slew Label
5 Toggle/Pause
6 Reprint
1 Ground
•
+5 VDC External Source
For isolated inputs –
GPI/O A - J1
To provide galvanic isolation for the GPI/O A
inputs, remove jumper JMP 9 then supply an
external +5VDC source voltage to Pin 2, and
remove jumper JMP 8 then supply an external
Ground to Pin 1 (as shown, right).
2 Vcc
3 Start of Print
4
Slew Label
5 Toggle/Pause
6 Reprint
1
Ground
Seven dedicated outputs are available for control, warning, and error functions. These
open-collector outputs are slew-limited. Optional 10K ohm pull-up resistors, tied to a
common point for use at either +5 or +24 VDC, are available via jumper JMP 1.

To avoid damage if external pull-up resistors are used (that is, without jumper JMP1
installed), ensure that the external voltage does not exceed +30VDC.
The table below details the GPI/O A pin assignments, settings and functions:
243
Appendix J – General Purpose Input Output Port Applications
Failure to properly configure the GPIO Port can result in damage to the printer and / or connected devices.
Applicator Interface Card (Type 2) GPI/O Port A Overview
Pin
Number
1
Signal Name
Signal
Direction
Ground
[1]
Jumper
Position
JMP 8
+5 VDC
Installed
Printer chassis is used.
Removed
Ground must be supplied.
Printer +5VDC is used (.5 amp maximum)
N/A
2
Function / Description
Installed
JMP 9

Removed
3
Start Of Print
Programmable
4
Slew Label
Programmable
5
Toggle /
Pause
6
Reprint
7
+24 VDC
8
Ground
9
Ribbon Low
11
Service
Required
End Of Print
12
Media Out
13
[2]
+5VDC must be supplied.
[2]
10
[1]
Drawing more than .5 amps can cause unreliable printer operation.
Ribbon Out
14
Data Ready
15
Option Fault
Input
The printer pauses when the signal is taken LOW.
N/A
N/A
The last label is reprinted exactly, with no increment or time stamp
changes; recommended for use during error conditions. Keeping this
signal LOW results in non-stop printing.
Printer +24 VDC (1.5 amp maximum)
N/A
Printer chassis.
When inactive, outputs will
be pulled up to a voltage
determined by this jumper
setting, where:
Output
JMP 1
•
•
•
Pins 1 – 2 = +5VDC;
Programmable
[1]
. Signifies a RIBBON LOW DIAMETER warning.
Evoked by occurrences listed under “Fault Messages.”[1] Active LOW.
Programmable
[1]
. Signifies the End of Print (EOP) process.
Evoked during an Out of Stock condition. Active LOW.
Pins 2 – 3 = +24VDC; or,
Evoked during an Out of Ribbon condition. Active LOW.
None = A common external
voltage (not to exceed
+30VDC) via external pullups (providing a 20K ohm
feedback path through any
two outputs).
Evoked when a label is waiting to be printed. Then after the printer
receives the Start of Print signal, printing will begin. For synchronization
with the print cycle, the End Of Print signal indicates the completion of
the print process. Active LOW.
Evoked during a Linear Scanner or RFID fault condition. Active LOW.
Signal directions are given relative to the printer.
If active with no current print job, “WAITING FOR DATA” will be displayed. Specifying a quantity of 9999 while keeping this signal “On” will cause non-stop
label printing, except in single label “Imaging Mode”, which will cause the printer to stop between labels.
244
Appendix K – Maximum Row, Column, & Character Values; Print Resolutions & Widths; and, Module Identifiers & Allocations
Appendix K
Maximum Field & Character Values
[1]
Printer
All
Maximum Format Fields
700
[1]
Total Characters All Fields
32768
When the product of the number of fields and characters in each field exceeds the available printer memory (the limiting factor), portions
of the label may not print.
Print Resolutions and Maximum Width & Record Column Values
Model
E-Class Mark III
(203DPI)
E-Class Mark III
(300DPI)
RL4
RL3
I-Class Mark II
I-Class Mark II
Future
I-Class Mark II
Print Resolution
Dot Dimensions (nominal)
Maximum Print Width
Maximum “gggg” Value
DPI
DPMM
Inches
Millimeters
Dots
Millimeters
Inch
Metric
203
8.0
.0043 x .0052
.11 x .13
864
108.0
425
1080
300
11.8
.0027 x .0043
.07 x .11
1248
105.7
416
1046
203
8.0
.0043 x .0052
.11 x .13
864
108.0
425
1080
203
300
406
600
8.0
11.8
16.0
23.6
.0043
.0027
.0013
.0008
.11
.07
.03
.02
832
1248
1664
2496
104.1
105.7
104.1
105.7
410
416
410
416
1041
1046
1041
1057
x
x
x
x
.0052
.0043
.0018
.0015
245
x
x
x
x
.13
.11
.05
.04
Appendix K – Maximum Row, Column, & Character Values; Print Resolutions & Widths; and, Module Identifiers & Allocations
Column, Present, & Row Adjust Fine Tune Range
Printer
Resolution (DPI)
203
300
400
600
Column Adjust Fine Tune
Parameter Range (+/– dots)
-100 – 100 dots
-150 – 150 dots
-200 – 200 dots
-300 – 300 dots
Row & Present Adjust Fine Tune
Parameter Range (+/– dots)
-100 – 2030 dots
-150 – 3000 dots
-200 – 4060 dots
-300 – 6000 dots
Memory Module Identifiers and Allocations
RL4
RL3
I-Class
Mark II
Description
E-Class
Mark III
Module ID
Printer
X
X
X
X
D
DRAM (default 1MB), configurable.
F
SDIO (as equipped)
G
Main CCA
X
H
USB Host Ports (as equipped)
X
I
Y
USB Host Ports (as equipped)
Z
X
X
X
X
X
X
KB Flash – Menu / EFIGS – protected Main CCA
X
X
X
X
MB Flash – Option ILPC – protected Main CCA
X
X
X
X
246
Appendix L – Speed Ranges
Appendix L
Speed Ranges
Printer Speed Command*
Speed Value:
Inches per Second
Millimeters per Second
A
1.0
25
B
1.5
38
C
2.0
51
D
2.5
63
E
3.0
76
F
3.5
89
G
4.0
102
H
4.5
114
I
5.0
127
J
5.5
140
K
6.0
152
L
6.5
165
M
7.0
178
N
7.5
191
O
8.0
203
P
8.5
216
Q
9.0
227
R
9.5
241
S
10.0
254
T
10.5
267
U
11.0
279
V
11.5
292
W
12.0
305
X
13.0
330
Y
14.0
356
Z
15.0
381
a
16.0
406
b
17.0
432
c
18.0
457
d
19.0
483
20.0
*Applicable speed values are printer dependent. See the table below.
e
247
508
Appendix L – Speed Ranges
Model
Print Speed
Feed Speed
Reverse Speed
Slew Speed
Range
Default
Range
Default
Range
Default
Range
Default
IM2-4212
C – W
O
C – W
O
C – I
G
C – a
O
IM2-4310
C – S
O
C – W
O
C – I
G
C – a
O
IM2-Future
(400dpi)
C – O
K
C – S
K
C – I
G
C – a
K
IM2-4606
C – K
G
C – O
G
C – I
G
C – a
G
RL4
A - I
G
A - I
G
C
C
N/A
N/A
RL3
A – G
E
A – G
G
C
C
N/A
N/A
C - G
G
C - G
G
C
C
G
G
C - I
G
C - I
G
C
C
G
G
C - K
G
C - K
G
C
C
G
G
C - I
G
C - I
G
C
C
G
G
E-Class Mark III
(Basic)
E-Class Mark III
(Advanced)
E-Class Mark III
(Pro)
E-Class Mark III
(Pro 300DPI)
248
Appendix M – Commands By Function
Appendix M
Commands by Function
Commands by Function
Function
Command
pa
<SOH>E
<SOH>C
<ESC>(snnnWdata
<ESC>*cnnnE
<STX>P
Cnnnn
<STX>Z
<STX>Kc
<STX>cnnnn
^nn
<STX>o
:nnnn
cnn
<fii
- fii
<STX>Vn
Dwh
<STX>e
<STX>Sa
<STX>a
Tnn
<STX>xmfname
<STX>v
<ESC>)snnnW
<ESC>*cnnnD
<STX>F
<STX>Kfnnnn
An
<STX>Iabfnamecr
Hnn
<STX>n
>fii
+fii
<STX>Unnstring
<STX>L
<STX>Mnnnn
Backup speed
Batch quantity request
Cancel
Character bitmapped data
Character code
Character dump mode
Column offset amount
Configuration label and dot pattern print
Configuration Set
Continuous paper length
Count by
Cut
Cut by
Cut by
Decrement alphanumerically
Decrement numerically
DIP switch, host controlled settings
Dot size height and width
Edge sensor enable
Feed rate
Feedback characters enable
Field data line terminator
File delete from module
Firmware version request
Font descriptor
Font ID number
Form feed
Set Present Distance
Format attribute
Graphics image download
Heat setting
Inches
Increment alphanumerically
Increment numerically
Label format field replacement
Label formatting start
Label length maximum
(continued)
249
Appendix M – Commands By Function
Function
Command
<STX>KQ
Memory query
Memory query (new format)
<STX>Kq
Metric
<STX>m
Metric
m
Mirror
M
Module clear
<STX>qm
Module, compress
<STX>zm
Module, directory request
<STX>Wa
Module, set default
<STX>Xm
Module, FLASH memory Test
<STX>w
Module, RAM memory Test
<STX>t
Modules, clear all
<STX>Q
Pause for each label
<STX>J
Pause toggle
<SOH>B
Pause, controlled
<STX>p
Place data in global register
G
Print last label format
<STX>G
Print speed
Pa
Print time and date
<STX>Tstring
Print head dot pattern test label
<STX>T
Quantity labels printed
<STX>Ennnn
Quantity of labels
Qnnnn
Recall global data and place in field
<STX>Sa
Recall stored label
rname
Reflective sensor select
<STX>r
Replacement field tag
U
Reset
<SOH>#
Resettable counters reset
<STX>Kr
Ribbon saver
<STX>Rx
Row offset amount
Rnnnn
RS-232 port test
<STX>k
Scalable font download
<STX>imtaabbb...bcrxxxxxxxxfff...f
Sensor values request
<STX>Y
Feed speed
Sa
Status ASCII string request
<SOH>A
Status byte request
<SOH>F
Store label in module & terminate formatting
smname
Symbol set select
<STX>ySaa
Symbol set select
ySaa
Terminate formatting - print label format
E
Terminate label formatting, do not print label
X
Time and date request
<STX>B
Time and date set
<STX>AwMMddyearhhmmjjj
Update system database with current database
<SOH>U
Zero (Ø) conversion to “0”
z
250
Appendix N – Image Loading
Appendix N
Image Loading
The printer will accept four types of image files: .BMP, .IMG, .PCX and a special Datamax 7bit ASCII file (as defined in this section). Use of the Datamax 7-bit ASCII format will require
at least twice as much data transmission time as the other formats, (see <STX>I). The
Datamax ASCII image file format is made up of a set of records with identical formats, each
representing a dot row of the image; a terminator follows the last of these records.
Dot-row record
Dot-row record
Terminator
Each dot-row record has the following format:
Syntax:
80nndd...d<CR>
Where:
nn
-
Is the number of character pairs in dd...d, represented in
ASCII hex.
dd…d
-
Is dot data, character pairs, ASCII hex, 00-FF.
Duplicate records may be encoded using a repeat data record, following the data record that
needs duplicating. The repeat data record format is:
Syntax:
0000FFnn<CR>
Where:
nn
-
Is the number of duplicates, ASCII hex, 00-FF.
The terminator, last record, at the image download is: FFFF<CR>
251
Appendix N – Image Loading
^BqA(CR)
^BIAAFLOGO(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFC00000007FFC0003FFFFC001FC0001FC0003FFFFC0018000FFC001FF8000C0003FFFFE000000FFFFE0001FFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFC00000000FFC0003FFFFC001FC0001FC0003FFFFC0018000FFC001FF800040001FFFFE0000007FFFC0001FFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFC000000003FC0001FFFFC001FC0001FC0001FFFFC0018000FFC001FF800040001FFFFE0000003FFFC0001FFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFC000000000FC0001FFFFC001FE0001FE0001FFFFC00180007FC000FF800060001FFFFE0000003FFFC0003FFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFE0000000007E0001FFFFC001FE0001FE0001FFFFC00180007FC000FFC00060000FFFFE0000001FFFC0003FFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFE0000000003E0000FFFFC001FE0000FE0000FFFFC00180007FC0007FC00020000FFFFE0000001FFF80003FFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFE0000000001E0000FFFFC001FE0000FF0000FFFFC001C0007FC0007FC00030000FFFFE0010000FFF80003FFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFE0000000000F0000FFFFC001FE0000FF0000FFFFC001C0007FC0007FC00030000FFFFE00180007FF80007FFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFE0000000000700007FFFC001FF0000FF80007FFFC001C0007FC0003FC000380007FFFE00180007FF80007FFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFF0000000000380007FFFC001FF0000FF80007FFFC001C0003FC0003FE000380007FFFE001C0003FF80007FFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFF0000000000380007FFFC001FF0000FF80007FFFC001C0003FC0003FE000380007FFFE001E0003FF80007FFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFF0000000000180003FFFC001FF00007FC0003FFFC001C0003FC0001FE0001C0003FFFE001E0001FF0000FFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFF00000000001C0003FFFC001FF00007FC0003FFFC001E0003FC0001FE0001C0003FFFE001F0000FF0000FFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFF00007C00000C0003FFFC001FF00007FE0003FFFC001E0003FC0000FF0001E0003FFFE001F0000FF0000FFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFF80007F80000E0001FFFC001FF80007FE0001FFFC001E0003FC0000FF0001E0001FFFE001F80007F0000FFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFF80007FC0000E00000000001FF80007FE00000000001E0001FC0000FF0001E00000000001FC0007F0000FFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFF80007FE0000600000000001FF80003FF00000000001E0001FC00007F0000F00000000001FC0003F0001FFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFF80003FF0000700000000001FF80003FF00000000001F0001FC00007F0000F00000000001FE0001E0001FFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFF80003FF0000700000000001FF80003FF00000000001F0001FC00007F8000F00000000001FE0001E0001FFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFC0001FFC0003C0000000001FFE0001FFE0000000001F8000FC00000FC0007E0000000001FFE00000003FFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFE0001FFC0001E0000000001FFE0001FFE0000000001F8000FC00000FC0007E0000000001FFF00000003FFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFE0001FFC0001E0000000001FFE0001FFE0000000001F8000FC00000FC0007F0000000001FFF00000007FFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFE0000FFC0001F0000000001FFE0000FFF0000000001F8000FC000007C0003F0000000001FFF80000007FFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFE0000FFC0001F0000000001FFE0000FFF0000000001FC0007C000007E0003F0000000001FFF80000007FFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFE0000FFE0001F0001FFC001FFE0000FFF8001FFC001FC0007C000003E0003F8000FFE001FFFC0000007FFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFE0000FFE0000F8001FFC001FFF0000FFF8000FFC001FC0007C000003E0003F8000FFE001FFFE000000FFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFF0000FFE0000F8000FFC001FFF0000FFF8000FFC001FC0007C000003E0003F8000FFE001FFFE000000FFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFF0000FFE0000F8000FFC001FFF00007FFC000FFC001FC0007C000001F0001FC000FFE001FFFF000000FFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFF00007FE0000FC000FFC001FFF00007FFC0007FC001FE0007C002001F0001FC0007FE001FFFF000000FFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFF00007FF0000FC0007FC001FFF00007FFE0007FC001FE0003C002001F0001FE0007FE001FFFF800000FFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFF00007FF0000FE0007FC001FFF80007FFE0007FC001FE0003C003000F0001FE0007FE001FFFFC00001FFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFF80007FF00007E0007FC001FFF80007FFE0003FC001FE0003C003000F0001FE0003FE001FFFFC00001FFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFF80007FF00007E0003FC001FFF80003FFF0003FC001FE0003C00300078001FF0003FE001FFFFE00001FFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFF80003FF00007F0003FC001FFF80003FFF0003FC001FE0003C00380078000FF0003FE001FFFFE00001FFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFF80003FF80007F0003FC001FFF80003FFF0001FC001FF0003C00380078000FF8001FE001FFFFE00001FFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFF80003FF80007F0001FC001FFF80003FFF8001FC001FF0001C003C0038000FF8001FE001FFFFE00001FFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFC0000000007FFC000001F80000000000FC000001FFF0000003FFE0000007FFC000001FFFC0003F80007FFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFE000000000FFFC000001F80000000000FE000001FFF8000003FFE0000007FFE000001FFFC0003FC0003FFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFF000000000FFFE000001F80000000000FE000001FFF8000003FFF0000007FFE000001FFFC0003FC0003FFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFC00000000FFFE000001FC0000000000FE000001FFF8000003FFF0000007FFE000001FFFC0003FE0001FFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFE00000000FFFE000001FC00000000007F000001FFF8000003FFF0000007FFF000001FFFC0003FE0001FFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFF00000001FFFF000001FC00000000007F000001FFF8000003FFF8000007FFF000001FFF80003FF0000FFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFC0000001FFFF000001FC00000000007F000001FFF8000003FFF8000003FFF800001FFF80007FF0000FFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFE0000003FFFF800001FC00000000007F800001FFFC000003FFF8000003FFF800001FFF80007FF80007FF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFF0000007FFFF800001FC00000000007F800001FFFC000003FFFC000003FFF800001FFF80007FF80007FF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFF800000FFFFF800001FE00000000003FC00001FFFC000003FFFC000003FFFC00001FFF00007FFC0003FF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFFE00001FFFFFC00001FE00000000003FC00001FFFC000003FFFE000003FFFC00001FFF00007FFC0003FF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFFF00007FFFFFC00001FE00000000003FC00001FFFC000003FFFE000003FFFE00001FFF00007FFE0001FF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFFF8003FFFFFFC00001FE00000000003FE00001FFFC000003FFFF000003FFFE00001FFF00007FFE0001FF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0000(CR)
FFFF(CR)
^BL(CR)
1Y1100000000000LOGO(CR)
E(CR)
252
Appendix O – UPC-A and EAN-13 Variable Price / Weights
Appendix O
UPC-A and EAN-13: Variable Price/Weight Bar Codes
The EAN/UPC standard allows for an additional checksum to be generated in the middle of
the bar code based on the data. This is used when the price or weight of an item is
embedded into the bar code data (commonly used in the food industry).
For the printer to generate this checksum, a “V” must be placed in the data stream in the
position the checksum is requested. If the “V” is placed in the 6th position for UPC-A or the
7th position for EAN-13, a checksum will be generated using the next five digits in the data
stream. If the “V” is placed in the 7th position for UPC-A or the 8th position for EAN-13, a
checksum will be generated using the next four digits in the data stream. The checksum is
generated per the EAN/UPC bar code standard.
Examples:
1B110000200020012345V01199
Prints the UPC-A bar code with the variable price checksum in the sixth position.
1B1100002000200123456V0150
Prints the UPC-A bar code with the variable price checksum in the seventh position.
1F1100002000200123456V01199
Prints the EAN-13 bar code with the variable price checksum in the seventh position.
1F11000020002001234567V0150
Prints the EAN-13 bar code with the variable price checksum in the eighth position.
253
Appendix O – UPC-A and EAN-13 Variable Price / Weights
254
Appendix P – ILPC Programming Examples
Appendix P
International Language Print Capability (ILPC)
Programming Examples
ILPC (if equipped) allows the printing of non-English character sets, available with European
language support (CG TIMES), KANJI language support, Chinese language support
(SIMPLIFIED GB) and Korean Hangul. All of the features are embedded in the printer
resident firmware and accessible through DPL thus eliminating excessive download time of
bitmapped characters. Using scalable technology licensed from AGFA, this firmware allows
users to print smooth characters in sizes from 4pt (1.4 mm) to 999pt (350 mm) in over 40
languages. Consult Appendix I for code page selections. Specific details regarding which
characters are supported in each option can be obtained through Datamax-O’Neil Technical
Support.
ILPC - CG
TIMES
The CG Times is a single-byte scalable font consisting of four typefaces in 38 Western
European languages. This contains over 900 unique characters in each of the four typefaces
from the CG Times typeface family, Normal, Italic, Bold, and Bold Italic. Single-byte scalable
fonts are selected using a print format record (see Generating Label Formats and Appendix
H for details).
Scalable CG TIMES Font Code (“eee” field):
SA0 -CG TIMES
SA1 -CG TIMES ITALIC
SA2 - CG TIMES BOLD
SA3 - CG TIMES BOLD ITALIC
Sample DPL file (Greek) and resulting label:
<02>L<CR>
D11<CR>
ySWG<CR>
1911SA003600020P020P020(WG) Greek Characters from<CR>
1911SA003000085P020P020the internal Symbol Set,<CR>
1911SA002400085P020P020font code SA0<CR>
1911SA001500050P020P020<ca><e1><eb><f9><f3><ef><f1><df><f3><e1><f4><e5><20>
<d3><f5><ed><dd><e4><f1><e9><ef><20><CR>
1911SA001100100P020P020<f4><f9><e3><20><c5><f4><e1><df><f1><f9><e3><20><f4>
<e7><f2><CR>
1911SA000700140P020P020Datamax<CR>
1X1100000100020B365190005005<CR>
Q0002<CR>
E<CR>
255
Appendix P – ILPC Programming Examples

The notation “<xx>” in this DPL file should be interpreted by the reader as representing the
hexadecimal value of the character sent to the printer.
ILPC - Kanji
The Kanji Option is a double byte scalable font supporting Kanji Gothic B. In the double byte
format, the printer recalls one character printed from every two 8-bit bytes sent from the
host. Double byte scalable fonts are selected using a print format record (see Generating
Label Formats and Appendix H for details).
256
Appendix P – ILPC Programming Examples
Scalable Double-Byte Font Map - KANJI
eee
(Font Code)
Scalable
Font Type
Font
Name
U40
Scalable Resident
HG-Gothic-B Kanji
Scalable
EUC, JIS,
SJIS, UC
u40
Scalable Resident
HG-Gothic-B Kanji
Scalable
EUC, JIS,
SJIS, UC
UK1
Scalable Resident
HG-Gothic-E Kanji
Scalable
EUC, JIS,
SJIS
uK1
Scalable Resident
HG-Gothic-E Kanji
Scalable
EUC, JIS,
SJIS
u50 - u5z…
u90 - u9z
Scalable Non-Resident
(download)
User defined
U50 U5z...
U90 - U9z
Scalable Non-Resident
(download)
User defined

Binary
Hex ASCII
Addressing Addressing
Code
Pages
Not all fonts contain an entire compliment of character codes for a given character map.
Sample Kanji Gothic B DPL file (binary addressing) and the resulting label:
<02>L<CR>
D11<CR>
ySPM<CR>
1911S0003100010P020P015Scalable Kanji Gothic B Available<CR>
1B110000020017001234567890<CR>
yUJS<CR>
1X1100001900010b0392011000020002<CR>
112200002800030JIS CHARACTER’S IN ALL 4 ROTATION’S<CR>
112200002600030Rotation 1<CR>
1911U4002650150P012P012<4D><3F><21><21><21><21><4D><4F><21><21><21><21><4D>
<5F><21><21><21><21><4D><6F><00><CR>
112200002400030Rotation 2<CR>
2911U4002600150P012P012<4D><3F><00<CR>
2911U4002600205P012P012<4D><4F><00>CR>
2911U4002600250P012P012<4D><5F><00><CR>
2911U4002600300P012P012<4D><6F><00><CR>
112200002200030Rotation 3<CR>
3911U4002330315P012P012<4D><6F><21><21><21><21><4D><5F><21><21><21><21><4D>
<4F><21><21><21><21><4D><3F><00><CR>
112200002000030Rotation 4<CR>
4911U4001950165P012P012<4D><3F><00><CR>
257
Appendix P – ILPC Programming Examples
4911U4001950215P012P012<4D><4F><00><CR>
4911U4001950265P012P012<4D><5F><00><CR>
4911U4001950315P012P012<4D><6F><00><CR>
1X1100001100010b0392007500020002<CR>
112200001650030SCALING JIS CHARACTER’S<CR>
1911U4001200020P010P020<21><6F><00><CR>
1911U4001200050P020P020<21><6F><00><CR>
1911U4001200080P030P020<21><6F><00><CR>
1911U4001200110P040P020<21><6F><00><CR>
1911U4001200145P040P030<21><6F><00><CR>
1911U4001200190P040P040<21><6F><00><CR>
1911U4001200250P040P050<21><6F><00><CR>
1911U4001200320P040P060<21><6F><00><CR>
112200000050010NORMAL
INVERSE<CR>
112200000050245 NORMAL
MIRROR<CR>
1911U4000250010P040P040<21><6F><00><CR>
1911U4000250245P040P040<4B><30><00><CR>
A5<CR>
1911U4000250090P040P040<21><6F><00><CR>
A1<CR>
M<CR>
1911U4000250390P040P040<4B><30><00><CR>
M<CR>
E<CR>

The notation “<xx>” in this DPL file should be interpreted by the reader as representing the
hexadecimal value of the byte sent to the printer.
258
Appendix P – ILPC Programming Examples
Sample Kanji Gothic E DPL file (Hex-ASCII addressing) and resulting label:
<02>L<CR>
D11<CR>
ySPM<CR>
1911S0003100010P020P015Scalable Kanji Gothic E Available<CR>
1B110000020017001234567890<CR>
yUJS<CR>
1X1100001900010b0392011000020002<CR>
112200002800030JIS CHARACTER’S IN ALL 4 ROTATION’S<CR>
112200002600030Rotation 1<CR>
1911uK102650150P012P0124D3F212121214D4F212121214D5F212121214D6F<CR>
112200002400030Rotation 2<CR>
2911uK102600150P012P0124D3F<CR>
2911uK102600205P012P0124D4F<CR>
2911uK102600250P012P0124D5F<CR>
2911uK102600300P012P0124D6F<CR>
112200002200030Rotation 3<CR>
3911uK102330315P012P0124D6F212121214D5F212121214D4F212121214D3F<CR>
112200002000030Rotation 4<CR>
4911uK101950165P012P0124D3F<CR>
4911uK101950215P012P0124D4F<CR>
4911uK101950265P012P0124D5F<CR>
4911uK101950315P012P0124D6F<CR>
1X1100001100010b0392007500020002<CR>
112200001650030SCALING JIS CHARACTER’S<CR>
1911uK101200020P010P020216F<CR>
1911uK101200050P020P020216F<CR>
1911uK101200080P030P020216F<CR>
1911uK101200110P040P020216F<CR>
1911uK101200145P040P030216F<CR>
1911uK101200190P040P040216F<CR>
1911uK101200250P040P050216F<CR>
1911uK101200320P040P060216F<CR>
112200000050010NORMAL
INVERSE<CR>
112200000050245 NORMAL
MIRROR<CR>
1911uK100250010P040P040216F<CR>
1911uK100250245P040P0404B30<CR>
A5<CR>
1911uK100250090P040P040216F<CR>
A1<CR>
M<CR>
1911uK100250390P040P0404B30<CR>
M<CR>
E<CR>
259
Appendix P – ILPC Programming Examples
ILPC - Chinese
The Chinese Option is a double byte scalable font supporting Simplified GB Chinese. In the
double byte format the printer recalls one character printed from every two 8-bit bytes sent
from the host. Double byte scalable fonts are selected using a print format record (see
Generating Label Formats and Appendix H for details).
DPL Big 5 Encoding Support: With the ILPC Chinese option, the printer firmware supports
font files that are encoded for the GB Character Map and the Big 5 Character Map. The
resident Asian font in the printer is encoded in the GB Character Map. To utilize the Big 5
Character Map, the user must download a font file that is Big 5 encoded. The font file
downloaded must be of a size compatible with the internal module size available or of a size
compatible with an external (plug in) module where applicable. Printing characters from the
Big 5 encoded font file is accomplished by:
1. Setting the character mapping with a System Command or Label Format Command
(<STX>yUB5 or yUB5, respectively).
2. Setting the “b” field = “9” and “eee” field = “Unn”, where “nn” is equal to the Font ID
number selected for the Big 5 encoded font file downloaded.
3. Selecting string data corresponding to the Big 5 Character Map.
260
Appendix P – ILPC Programming Examples
Scalable Double-Byte Font Map - CHINESE
eee
(Font Code)
Scalable
Font Type
Font
Name
Binary
Hex ASCII Code
Addressing Addressing Pages
UC0
Scalable Resident
Simplified
GB Chinese
GB
uc0
Scalable Resident
Simplified
GB Chinese
GB
U50 U5z...
U90 - U9z
Scalable Non-Resident
(download)
Big 5
B5
u50 - u5z…
u90 - u9z
Scalable Non-Resident
(download)
Big 5
B5
U50 U5z...
U90 - U9z
Scalable Non-Resident
(download)
User
defined
–
u50 - u5z…
u90 - u9z
Scalable Non-Resident
(download)
User
defined
–
Sample Simplified GB Chinese DPL file (binary addressing) and resulting label:
<02>L<CR>
D11<CR>
ySPM<CR>
1911S0003100010P020P015Scalable Chinese Available in GB Character Set<CR>
1B110000020017001234567890<CR>
yUGB<CR>
1X1100001900010b0392011000020002<CR>
112200002800030GB CHARACTER’S IN ALL 4 ROTATION’S<CR>
112200002600030Rotation 1<CR>
1911UC002650150P012P012<BD><D0>A1><A1><A1><A1><BD><D1><A1><A1><A1><A1><BD>
<D2><A1><A1>
<A1><A1><BD><D3><00><CR>
112200002400030Rotation 2<CR>
2911UC002600150P012P012<BD><D0><00><CR>
2911UC002600205P012P012<BD><D1><00><CR>
2911UC002600250P012P012<BD><D2><00><CR>
2911UC002600300P012P012<BD><D3><00><CR>
112200002200030Rotation 3<CR>
3911UC002330315P012P012<BD><D3><A1><A1><A1><A1><BD><D2><A1><A1><A1><A1><BD>
<D1><A1><A1><A1><A1><BD><D0><00><CR>
112200002000030Rotation 4<CR>
4911UC001950165P012P012<BD><D0><00><CR>
261
Appendix P – ILPC Programming Examples
4911UC001950215P012P012<BD><D1><00><CR>
4911UC001950265P012P012<BD><D2><00><CR>
4911UC001950315P012P012<BD><D3><00><CR>
1X1100001100010b0392007500020002<CR>
112200001650030SCALING GB CHARACTER’S<CR>
1911UC001200020P010P020<BA><D0><00><CR>
1911UC001200050P020P020<BA><D0><00><CR>
1911UC001200080P030P020<BA><D0><00><CR>
1911UC001200110P040P020<BA><D0><00><CR>
1911UC001200145P040P030<BA><D0><00><CR>
1911UC001200190P040P040<BA><D0><00><CR>
1911UC001200250P040P050<BA><D0><00><CR>
1911UC001200320P040P060<BA><D0><00><CR>
112200000050010NORMAL
INVERSE<CR>
112200000050245 NORMAL
MIRROR<CR>
1911UC000250010P040P040<BD><E0><00><CR>
1911UC000250245P040P040<BD><E1><00><CR>
A5<CR>
1911UC000250090P040P040<BD><E0><00><CR>
A1<CR>
M<CR>
1911UC000250390P040P040<BD><E1><00><CR>
M<CR>
E<CR>

The notation “<xx>” in this DPL file should be interpreted by the reader as representing the
hexadecimal value of the byte sent to the printer.
262
Appendix P – ILPC Programming Examples
ILPC - Korean
The Korean Option is a double-byte scalable font supporting Korean Hangul. In the doublebyte format, the printer recalls one character printed from every two 8-bit bytes sent from
the host. Double-byte scalable fonts are selected using a print format record (see
Generating Label Formats and Appendix H for details).
Scalable Double-Byte Font Map - KOREAN
eee
(Font Code)
Scalable
Font Type
Font Name
UH0
Scalable Resident
Korean Hangul
UC
uh0
Scalable Resident
Korean Hangul
UC
u50 - u5z…
u90 - u9z
Scalable Non-Resident
(download)
User defined
U50 U5z...
U90 - U9z
Scalable Non-Resident
(download)
User defined

Binary
Addressing
Hex ASCII
Addressing
Code
Pages
Not all fonts contain an entire compliment of character codes for a given character map.
Sample Korean Hangul DPL file (binary addressing) and the resulting label:
<02>L<CR>
D11<CR>
ySPM<CR>
1911S0003100010P020P015Scalable Korean Available in UC Character Set<CR>
yUUC<CR>
1B110000020017001234567890<CR>
1X1100001900010b0392011000020002<CR>
112200002800030HANGUL CHARACTER’S IN ALL 4 ROTATIONS<CR>
112200002600030Rotation 1<CR>
1911UH002620150P012P012<AC><00><00><CR>
1911UH002620205P012P012<AC><65><00><CR>
1911UH002620250P012P012<AC><69><00><CR>
1911UH002620300P012P012<AC><DF><00><CR>
112200002400030Rotation 2<CR>
2911UH002550150P012P012<AC><00><00><CR>
2911UH002550205P012P012<AC><65><00><CR>
2911UH002550250P012P012<AC><69><00><CR>
2911UH002550300P012P012<AC><DF><00><CR>
263
Appendix P – ILPC Programming Examples
112200002200030Rotation 3<CR>
3911UH002330165P012P012<AC><00><00><CR>
3911UH002330220P012P012<AC><65><00><CR>
3911UH002330265P012P012<AC><69><00><CR>
3911UH002330315P012P012<AC><DF><00><CR>
112200002000030Rotation 4<CR>
4911UH001950165P012P012<AC><00><00><CR>
4911UH001950215P012P012<AC><65><00><CR>
4911UH001950265P012P012<AC><69><00><CR>
4911UH001950315P012P012<AC><DF><00><CR>
1X1100001100010b0392007500020002<CR>
112200001650030SCALING HANGUL CHARACTERS<CR>
1911UH001200020P010P020<AC><AC><00><CR>
1911UH001200050P020P020<AC><AC><00><CR>
1911UH001200080P030P020<AC><AC><00><CR>
1911UH001200110P040P020<AC><AC><00><CR>
1911UH001200145P040P030<AC><AC><00><CR>
1911UH001200190P040P040<AC><AC><00><CR>
1911UH001200250P040P050<AC><AC><00><CR>
1911UH001200320P040P060<AC><AC><00><CR>
112200000200010NORMAL
INVERSE<CR>
112200000200245 NORMAL
MIRROR<CR>
1911UH000450010P040P040<AC><4D><00><CR>
1911UH000450245P040P040<AC><15><00><CR>
A5<CR>
1911UH000450090P040P040<AC><4D><00><CR>
A1<CR>
M<CR>
1911UH000450390P040P040<AC><15><00><CR>
M<CR>
E<CR>

The notation “<xx>” in this DPL file should be interpreted by the reader as representing the
hexadecimal value of the byte sent to the printer.
264
Appendix Q – Plug and Play IDs
Appendix Q
Plug and Play IDs
MFG; CMD; MDL; CLS; DES
Where:
MFG
= Datamax-Oneil
CMD
= Fixed string: “DPL”
MDL
= Model: (Valid designations are:
E-4204B Mark III, E-4304B Mark III,
E-4305A Mark III, E-4205A Mark III,
E-4206P Mark III, E-4305P Mark III,
E-4206L Mark III, E-4305L Mark III,
I-4212e MarkII, I-4310e MarkII, I-4606e MarkII
RL3, RL4)
CLS
= Fixed string: “PRINTER”
DES
= Description (subject to change with the application [firmware] revision and printer
model)
Example: Datamax-Oneil I-4212e MarkII Printer Version 10.3_0026 07/09/2001
265
Appendix Q – Plug and Play IDs
266
Appendix R – Line Mode
Appendix R
Line Mode
Line Mode allows the printer to respond to raw data from a device that may not be able to
send a complete DPL file. In Line Mode raw data is directed into replaceable fields in formats
or templates stored in the printer.
The printer can be placed in Line Mode via the front panel, as explained in the printer’s
Operating Manual, or by using the <STX>KcEM command (see Extended System-Level
Command Functions), where:
<STX>KcEM0 will enter standard DPL Mode; and,
<STX>KcEM1 will enter Line Mode.

•
A reset will follow a change of mode.
•
While in Line Mode, the printer will also respond to DPL commands; however, special
download types (such as firmware updates) should only be sent when the printer is in
DPL mode.
Line Mode Specifics

Raw data sent to the printer must be terminated by a carriage return [0x0D].

The host timeout setting (see <STX>KcHT) will determine the maximum waiting period
between data sent. If the timeout value is reached, the label will print using the data
received before timeout occurred.

A form feed command [0x0C] may be sent to terminate processing and print the data
that has been received.

Issuing the <STX>Ennnn command (where nnnn represents the print count), allows
quantities of the same label to be printed.

The printer must have a template program loaded. A template is a standard DPL file that
ends in a store format command, instead of the print command (E). The template name
must be either DMXFRM or DMXFRMxx. Using DMXFRMxx, allows multiple templates to
be available.
Sample Template 1:
The following sample uses DMXFRM as the template name and stores it to the default module.
(The default module is printer model dependent.)
267
Appendix R – Line Mode
<STX>L
PG
SG
D11
15110000160001099999999999999999999999999999999999
U
151100001200010FIXED FIELD #1
15110000080001099999999999999999999999999999999999
U
151100000400010FIXED FIELD #2
15110000000001099999999999999999999999999999999999
U
Q0001
sCDMXFRM
To print a label, the attached device now only has to send the data. Sample data in this
example is as follows:
TEST DATA AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA[CR]
TEST DATA BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB[CR]
TEST DATA CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC[CR]
The sample data will print the following label (layout and font are approximations):
TEST DATA AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA
FIXED FIELD #1
TEST DATA BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB
FIXED FIELD #2
TEST DATA CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC
If multiple labels are needed, data for the labels can be sent at the same time. Sample data
for two labels:
TEST
TEST
TEST
TEST
TEST
TEST
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA[CR]
BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB[CR]
CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC[CR]
DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD[CR]
EEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE[CR]
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF[CR]
The sample data will print the following two labels (layout and typeface are
approximations):
268
Appendix R – Line Mode
Label 1:
TEST DATA AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA
FIXED FIELD #1
TEST DATA BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB
FIXED FIELD #2
TEST DATA CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC
Label 2:
TEST DATA DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
FIXED FIELD #1
TEST DATA EEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE
FIXED FIELD #2
TEST DATA FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
Sample Template 2:
If a template in the form of DMXFRMxx is used, the data must be preceded by the value of
xx. Below is a sample template for DMXFRMxx:
<STX>L
PG
SG
D11
15110000160001099999999999999999999999999999999999
U
151100001200010FIXED FIELD NUMBER ONE
15110000080001099999999999999999999999999999999999
U
151100000400010FIXED FIELD NUMBER TWO
15110000000001099999999999999999999999999999999999
U
Q0001
sCDMXFRMA1
Sample data for DMXFRMxx type templates:
A1>TEST DATA AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA[CR]
A1>TEST DATA BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB[CR]
A1>TEST DATA CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC[CR]
269
Appendix R – Line Mode
270
Appendix S – RFID Overview
Appendix S
RFID Overview
The printer has two different operational modes for the programming of RFID tags: Direct,
and Label Formatting.
The RFID programming data can be entered in one of two formats: ASCII, or Hexadecimal.
Data in the ASCII format is entered conventionally, while data in the hexadecimal format is
entered as the hexadecimal-pairs equivalent of the ASCII character(s). For example, to
program the word “TEST” in the ASCII format, the data is entered as TEST; alternately, in
the hexadecimal format the word is entered as 54455354. The other important
consideration is the data format byte count. Compared to the ASCII format, hexadecimal
formats use twice the number of bytes. Returning to the example above, in the ASCII
format “TEST” has a byte count of four, while the hexadecimal format equivalent has a byte
count of eight.
To send information about the results of tag printing back to the host, refer to the
<STX>KcOF command for option feedback.
Direct Mode
Direct Mode allows the user (host) to directly control the reading and writing of RFID tags.
This mode contains both a generic Read / Write Interface and a high level HF / UHF Tag
Interface. In Direct Mode, each RFID tag is individually processed with status and data
responses. Typically these commands are used for diagnostics or custom applications.
Generic Read/Write Interface
The Generic Read/Write Interface allows the Host Application to send generic commands
for RFID operations by utilizing the printer’s database for specific parameters. Requiring
no knowledge of the tag types being used (except the data format), these commands
consist of simple read and write operations. See the <STX>KaR and <STX>KaW commands
for details.
HF (13.56 MHz) ISO15693 Tag Interface
The ISO15693 Tag Interface allows the Host Application to perform specific operations
pertaining to HF-type (13.56 MHz) tags. Since these commands override the printer’s
database by interfacing directly to the tag module, knowledge of HF tags and their
operation is required. See the <STX>KtA, <STX>KtD, <STX>KtE, <STX>KtH, <STX>KtU,
<STX>KtR, and <STX>KtW commands for details.
271
Appendix S – RFID Overview
UHF Interface
This interface allows the Host Application to perform specific operations pertaining to
UHF-type tags. Since these commands override the printer’s database by interfacing
directly to the tag module, knowledge of UHF protocols and their operation is required.
See the <STX>KuR and <STX>KuW commands for details.
Label Formatting Mode
Label Formatting Mode utilizes the current printer configuration to process all reading,
writing, and exception processing for each tag printed. (For exception processing and fault
handling; see the <STX>KcFH command.) The specification for RFID programming is
contained in the data fields of the DPL label format, which instructs the printer to write and
read data. Two Label Formatting Modes for RFID are available. While each supports auto
increment and decrement commands for numeric (+/-), alphanumeric (>/<), or
hexadecimal ((/)) data, they differ when a byte count specifier is added. Both RFID Label
Formatting commands are detailed below.

Up to six RFID operations per label are allowed.
Wx / W1x:
RFID
Syntax for RFID (spaces added for readability):
a bbb c d eee ffff gggg jj…j
Where:
272
Appendix S – RFID Overview
Field
Valid Inputs
Meaning
Operation to perform, where:
1 = Read (report to host)
2 = Write
3 = Write w/ Read back and Verify
a
1, 2, and 3
bbb
Wnx
c
0
Not Used, should be 0
d
0
Not Used, should be 0
RFID Hexadecimal Operation, where no “n” is an implied 1.
HF: Lock after write, where:
x = 0 – Use printer setup to determine if lock is performed.
x = 1 – Lock after write.
yy = Not Used
UHF EPC Gen2: Lock after write, where:
eee
xyy
x = 0 – Use printer setup to determine if lock is performed.
x = 1 – Lock after write.
yy = Lock state where “01”is permalock, “10” is pwd-write
lock or “11” is both states
UHF other tag types: Not Used, should be 000
HF: Starting block number to write.
ffff
0000 – 9998
UHF EPC Gen2: Block address where “0001” is EPC data, “0002”
is Tag ID or “0003” is user memory. Using “0000” is for EPC
data also (for backwards compatibility).
UHF other tag types: Not Used, should be 0000
HF: Not Used, should be 0000
gggg
0000
UHF EPC Gen2: Data word offset – currently only used for read
operation
UHF other tag types: Not Used, should be 0000
jj…j
Valid hexadecimal
pairs per character
followed by a
termination
character.
Data to write to the tag.

UHF data length must be 16 or 24 for EPC, 16 for Tag ID or
multiples of four for user memory sections.
273
Appendix S – RFID Overview
Example 1: The following example encodes an HF tag , starting at block 001, with
“Datamax writes RFID best”:
<STX>L
D11<CR>
2W1x0000000010000446174616D61782077726974657320524649442062657374<CR>
E
Example 2: The following format encodes a UHF Gen2 tag with EPC data
“112233445566778899AABBCC” and user memory data “1111222233334444”.
<STX>L
D11
2W1x0000000010000112233445566778899AABBCC
2W1x00000000300001111222233334444
E
Example 3: The following format reads a UHF Gen2 tag with data from address 1,
offset 2nd word (EPC data), Tag ID from address 2, and user data from address 3. Note
that the length of the data in the record determines how much data is read.
<STX>L
D11
1W1x0000000010002xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
1W1x0000000020000xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
1W1x0000000030000xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
E
With Option Feedback enabled, the format above would return data, such as:
<R;C;03;03;0002:0001;112233445566778899AABBCC;E20060010128FF33;11112222333
34444>
Where, “112233445566778899AABBCC” is the EPC data, “E20060010128FF33” is the
Tag ID and “1111222233334444” is the user memory data. See Option Feedback Mode
(<STX>KcOF) for more information on the response format.
WX / W1X:
RFID with Byte Count Specifier
Specified Length – The upper case X identifies an RFID data string with a string 4-digit
length specifier. The length specifier allows values 0x00 through 0xFF to be included
within the data strings without conflicting with the DPL format record terminators. The
four-digit decimal data byte count immediately follows the four-digit column position
field. This value includes all of the data following the byte count field, but does not
include itself.
Syntax for RFID with Byte Count Specifier (spaces added for readability):
a bbb c d eee ffff gggg hhhh jj…j
Where:
274
Appendix S – RFID Overview
Field
Valid Inputs
Meaning
Operation to perform, where:
1 = Read (report to host)
2 = Write
3 = Write / Verify
a
1, 2, and 3
bbb
Wnx
c
0
Not Used, should be 0
d
0
Not Used, should be 0
RFID Hexadecimal Operation, where no “n” is an implied 1.
HF: Lock after write, where:
x = 0 – Use printer setup to determine if lock is performed.
x = 1 – Lock after write.
yy = Not Used
eee
xyy
UHF EPC Gen2: Lock after write, where:
x = 0 – Use printer setup to determine if lock is performed.
x = 1 – Lock after write.
yy = Lock state where “01”is for permalock, “10” for pwdwrite lock or “11” for both states
UHF other tag types: Not Used, should be 000
HF: Starting block number to write.
ffff
0000 – 9998
UHF EPC Gen2: Block address where “0001” is EPC data, “0002”
is Tag ID or “0003” is user memory. Using “0000” is for EPC
data also (for backwards compatibility).
UHF other tag types: Not Used, should be 0000
HF: Not Used, should be 0000
gggg
0000
UHF EPC Gen2: Data word offset – currently only used for read
operation
UHF other tag types: Not Used, should be 0000
hhhh
Four-digit decimal
data byte count.
Number of bytes to follow (to include all bytes that follow until
the end of the data).
 UHF data length must be 8 or 12 for EPC, 8 for Tag ID or
multiples of 2 for user memory sections.
jj…j
Valid ASCII character
string followed by a
termination
character.
Data to write to the tag.
 UHF data length must be 8 or 12 for EPC, 8 for Tag ID or
multiples of 2 for user memory sections.
275
Appendix S – RFID Overview
Example1: The following example encodes a HF tag, starting at block 001, with
“Datamax <CR> writes RFID best.” It includes a Byte Count Specifier (the portion in
bold), where 0024 equals a four-digit decimal data byte count and includes all bytes that
follow until the end of the data. Field termination is set by the byte count.
<STX>L
D11<CR>
2W1X00000000100000024Datamax<CR>
writes RFID best<CR>
E
Example 2: The following format encodes a tag with EPC data “1122334455667788”
with byte count shown in bold. Note that the field data is entered as the hex value for
the ASCII character.
<STX>L
D11
2W1x00000000000000008<0x11><0x22><0x33><0x44><0x55><0x66><0x77><0x88>
E
GEN2 Kill/Access Passwords
Gen2 tags are capable of storing a 4-byte kill password and a 4-byte access password. The
kill password is stored at address 0, word offset 0 and access password is stored at address
0, word offset 2. The default for these passwords is typically 0.
To write these to the tag it is necessary to store the desired password value in the printer
database:
To write the database for the kill password the command is <STX>KcRIKnnnnnnnn, where
nnnnnnnn represents the 4-byte value in hexadecimal pairs; and,
To write the database for the access password the command is <STX>KcRICnnnnnnnn,
where nnnnnnnn represents the 4-byte value in hexadecimal pairs.
These can also be viewed or modified via the printer’s display under RFID OPTIONS / UHF
SETTINGS. If the stored value for either or both of these passwords is non-zero and a label
formatting command to write EPC data is issued, then these passwords will be written also.
GEN2 Lock States
Gen2 supports a lock state of permalock, pwd-lock or both for any of the data sections of
the tag. This includes access/kill passwords, EPC data, Tag ID or user memory. To store
these states in the printer database the command is <STX>KcRIGn, where: 1 is permalock; 2
is pwd-lock; 3 is both; and, 0 is none (default). When a section of the tag is written via
label formatting command and the stored lock state and lock after write are enabled, the
section will be locked.
276
Appendix T – WiFi Region Country Codes
Appendix T
WiFi Region Country Codes
Region Country Codes
Code
Country
Code
Country
Code
Country
AF
Afghanistan
GH
Ghana
PK
Pakistan
AX
Åland Islands
GI
Gibraltar
PW
Palau
AL
Albania
GR
Greece
PS
Palestinian Territory
DZ
Algeria
GL
Greenland
PA
Panama
AS
American Samoa
GD
Grenada
PG
Papua New Guinea
AD
Andorra
GP
Guadeloupe
PY
Paraguay
AO
Angola
GU
Guam
PE
Peru
AI
Anguilla
GT
Guatemala
PH
Philippines
AQ
Antarctica
GN
Guinea
PN
Pitcairn
AG
Antigua and
Barbuda
GW
Guinea-Bissau
PL
Poland
AR
Argentina
GY
Guyana
PT
Portugal
AM
Armenia
HT
Haiti
PR
Puerto Rico
AW
Aruba
HM
Heard Island and
McDonald Islands
QA
Qatar
AU
Australia
VA
Holy See (Vatican City
State)
RE
Réunion
AT
Austria
HN
Honduras
RO
Romania
AZ
Azerbaijan
HK
Hong Kong
RU
Russian Federation
(continued)
277
Appendix T – WiFi Region Country Codes
Code
Country
Code
Country
Code
Country
BS
Bahamas
HU
Hungary
RW
Rwanda
BH
Bahrain
IS
Iceland
SH
Saint Helena
BD
Bangladesh
IN
India
KN
Saint Kitts and Nevis
BB
Barbados
ID
Indonesia
LC
Saint Lucia
BY
Belarus
IR
Iran, Islamic Republic of
PM
Saint Pierre and Miquelon
BE
Belgium
IQ
Iraq
VC
Saint Vincent and the
Grenadines
BZ
Belize
IE
Ireland
WS
Samoa
BJ
Benin
IL
Israel
SM
San Marino
BM
Bermuda
IT
Italy
ST
Sao Tome and Principe
BT
Bhutan
JM
Jamaica
SA
Saudi Arabia
BO
Bolivia
JP
Japan
SN
Senegal
BA
Bosnia and
Herzegovina
JO
Jordan
CS
Serbia and Montenegro
BW
Botswana
KZ
Kazakhstan
SC
Seychelles
BV
Bouvet Island
KE
Kenya
SL
Sierra Leone
BR
Brazil
KI
Kiribati
SG
Singapore
IO
British Indian Ocean
Territory
KP
Korea, Democratic
People's Republic of
SK
Slovakia
BN
Brunei Darussalam
KR
Korea, Republic of
SI
Slovenia
BG
Bulgaria
KW
Kuwait
SB
Solomon Islands
BF
Burkina Faso
KG
Kyrgyzstan
SO
Somalia
(continued)
278
Appendix T – WiFi Region Country Codes
Code
Country
Code
Country
Code
Country
BI
Burundi
LA
Lao People's Democratic
Republic
ZA
South Africa
KH
Cambodia
LV
Latvia
GS
South Georgia and the
South Sandwich Islands
CM
Cameroon
LB
Lebanon
ES
Spain
CA
Canada
LS
Lesotho
LK
Sri Lanka
CV
Cape Verde
LR
Liberia
SD
Sudan
KY
Cayman Islands
LY
Libyan Arab Jamahiriya
SR
Suriname
CF
Central African
Republic
LI
Liechtenstein
SJ
Svalbard and Jan Mayen
TD
Chad
LT
Lithuania
SZ
Swaziland
CL
Chile
LU
Luxembourg
SE
Sweden
CN
China
MO
Macao
CH
Switzerland
CX
Christmas Island
MK
Macedonia
SY
Syrian Arab Republic
CC
Cocos (Keeling)
Islands
MG
Madagascar
TW
Taiwan (Republic of
China)
CO
Colombia
MW
Malawi
TJ
Tajikistan
KM
Comoros
MY
Malaysia
TZ
Tanzania, United Republic
of
CD
Congo, The
Democratic Republic
of the
ML
Mali
TL
Timor
CK
Cook Islands
MT
Malta
TG
Togo
CR
Costa Rica
MH
Marshall Islands
TK
Tokelau
CI
Côte d'Ivoire
MQ
Martinique
TO
Tonga
HR
Croatia
MR
Mauritania
TT
Trinidad and Tobago
(continued)
279
Appendix T – WiFi Region Country Codes
Code
Country
Code
Country
Code
Country
CU
Cuba
MU
Mauritius
TN
Tunisia
CY
Cyprus
YT
Mayotte
TR
Turkey
CZ
Czech Republic
MX
Mexico
TM
Turkmenistan
DK
Denmark
FM
Micronesia, Federated
States of
TC
Turks and Caicos Islands
DJ
Djibout
MD
Moldova, Republic of
TV
Tuvalu
DM
Dominica
MC
Monaco
UG
Uganda
DO
Dominican Republic
MN
Mongolia
UA
Ukraine
EC
Ecuador
MS
Montserrat
AE
United Arab Emirates
EG
Egypt
MA
Morocco
GB
United Kingdom
SV
El Salvador
MZ
Mozambique
US
United States
GQ
Equatorial Guinea
MM
Myanmar
UM
United States Minor
Outlying Islands
ER
Eritrea
NA
Namibia
UY
Uruguay
EE
Estonia
NR
Nauru
UZ
Uzbekistan
ET
Ethiopia
NP
Nepal
VU
Vanuatu
FK
Falkland Islands
(Malvinas)
NL
Netherlands
FO
Faroe Islands
AN
Netherlands Antilles
VE
Venezuela
FJ
Fiji
NC
New Caledonia
VN
Viet Nam
FI
Finland
NZ
New Zealand
VG
Virgin Islands, British
FR
France
NI
Nicaragua
VI
Virgin Islands, U.S.
GF
French Guiana
NE
Niger
WF
Wallis and Futuna
(continued)
280
Vatican City State - see
Holy See
Appendix T – WiFi Region Country Codes
Code
Country
Code
Country
Code
Country
PF
French Polynesia
NG
Nigeria
EH
Western Sahara
TF
French Southern
Territories
NU
Niue
YE
Yemen
GA
Gabon
NF
Norfolk Island
GM
Gambia
MP
Northern Mariana
Islands
ZM
Zambia
GE
Georgia
NO
Norway
ZW
Zimbabwe
DE
Germany
OM
Oman
281
Zaire - see Congo, The
Democratic Republic of
the
Appendix T – WiFi Region Country Codes
282
Appendix U – Bar Code Symbology Information Resources
Appendix U
Bar Code Symbology Information Resources
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
1819 L Street, NW
Washington, DC 20036 USA
Phone: 202-293-8020
Fax: 202-293-9287
http://www.ansi.org/
Association for Automatic Identification and Mobility, Inc.
125 Warrendale-Bayne Road
Warrendale, PA 15086 USA
Phone: 724-934-4470
Fax: 724-934-4495
http://www.aimglobal.org/
Automotive Industry Action Group
26200 Lahser Rd., Suite 200
Southfield, MI 48034-7100 USA
Phone: 248-358-3570
Fax: 248-358-3253
http://www.aiag.org/
Computing Technology Industry Association
1815 S. Meyers Road, Suite 300
Oakbrook Terrace, IL 60181-5228 USA
Phone: 630-678-8300
Fax: 630-268-1384
http://www.comptia.org/
GS1 (International Article Numbering Association)
Blue Tower
Avenue Louise 326 - Bte 10
1050 Brussels - Belgium
Phone: 32(0)2-788 78 00
Fax: 32(0)2-788 78 99
http://www.gs1.org/
283
Appendix U – Bar Code Symbology Information Resources
Health Industry Business Communications Council (HIBCC)
2525 E Arizona Biltmore Circle, Suite 127
Phoenix, Arizona 85016 USA
Phone: 602-381-1091
Fax: 602-381-1093
http://www.hibcc.org/
Uniform Code Council, Inc.
7887 Washington Village Drive, Suite 300
Dayton, OH 45459 USA
Phone: 937-435-3870
Fax: 937-435-7317
http://www.uc-council.org/
U.S. Government Printing Office
732 North Capitol St. NW
Washington, DC 20401 USA
Phone: 202.512.0000
Fax: 202-512-1293
http://www.gpo.gov/
284
Glossary
Glossary
alphanumeric Consisting of alphabetic, numeric, punctuation and other symbols.
backing material The silicon-coated paper carrier material to which labels with adhesive
backing are affixed. Also referred to as “liner”.
bar code A representation of alphanumeric information in a pattern of machine-readable
marks. The basic categories are divided into one-dimensional (UPC, Code 39, Postnet,
etc.) and two-dimensional bar codes (Data Matrix, MaxiCode, PDF417, etc.).
boot loader The resident program that loads the application from Flash memory,
decompresses it into the DRAM, and starts operations.
burn line The row of thermal elements in the print head.
calibration The process through which Media Sensor readings are entered into the printer
for correct sensor function (for example, detection of a given media type) and top of
form positioning.
character set The entire complement of alphanumeric symbols contained in a given font.
checksum An alphanumeric error detection method used in many bar code symbologies
for informational security.
continuous media An uninterrupted roll or box of label or tag stock media that contains
no gap, slit, notch, or black mark to separate individual labels or tags.
cutter A mechanical device with a rotary or guillotine type blade used to cut labels or tags
following printing.
defaults The functional setting values returned following a factory reset of the printer.
diagnostics Programs used to locate and diagnose hardware problems.
die-cut media Media that has been cut into a pattern using a press, where the excess
paper is removed leaving individual labels, with gaps between them, attached to a
backing material.
direct thermal The printing method that uses a heat sensitive media and only the heat of
the thermal print head to create an image on the label.
direct thermal media Media coated with special chemicals that react and darken with the
application of heat.
DPI (dots per inch) A measurement of print resolution, rated in the number of thermal
elements contained in one inch of the print head. Also referred to as “resolution.”
285
Glossary
DPL (Datamax-O’Neil Programming Language) programming commands used
specifically for control of and label production in Datamax-O’Neil printers.
fan-fold Media that is folded and stacked.
feed speed The rate at which the media moves under the print head in non-printed areas
or when the FEED Key is pressed.
Flash memory Non-volatile memory (does not require printer power to maintain data)
that can be erased and reprogrammed, used to hold the printer’s operating program.
font A set of alphanumeric characters that share a particular typeface.
gap A space between die-cut or notched labels used to sense the top-of-form.
IPS (inches per second) Imperial measurement of printer speeds.
label A paper or synthetic printing material, typically with a pressure sensitive adhesive
backing.
label length The distance from the top of the label to the bottom of the label as it exits
the printer.
label repeat The distance from the top of one label to the top of the next label.
label tracking Excessive lateral (side to side) movement of the media as it travels under
the print head.
label width The left to right measurement of the label as it exits the printer.
media Generalized term for all types of printing stocks, including: roll fed, continuous,
butt-cut, die-cut, reflective, and fanfold.
media hub Device in the printer used to support roll media.
media sensor An electronic device equipped with photosensors to detect media and the
top-of-form on die-cut, notched or reflective media.
MMPS (millimeters per second) Metric measurement of printer speeds.
notched stock Media, typically tag stock, with holes or notches in the material that is
used to signal the top-of-form. The printer must be set to “gap“ to use this media type.
perforation Small cuts extending through the backing and/or label material to facilitate
their separation. Also referred to as “perf”.
preprinted media Label stock that contains borders, text, or graphics, floodcoating, etc.
present sensor An electronic sensor that provides a signal to the printer firmware that a
label is present, typically located beyond the print head, where the labels exits the
printer.
286
Glossary
print speed The rate at which the media moves under the print head during the printing
process.
reflective media Media imprinted with carbon-based black marks on the underside of the
material, which is used to signal the top-of-form when the “reflective” Media Sensor is
enabled.
registration Repeatable top to bottom alignment of printed labels.
reverse speed The backward rate of media motion into the printer during tear-off, peel
and present and cutting operations for positioning the label at the start of print
position.
ribbon An extruded polyester tape with several layers of material, one of which is ink-like,
used to produce an image on the label. Also referred to as “foil”.
roll media A form of media that is wound upon a cardboard core.
slew The moving of media using the GPIO function.
start of print The position on the label where the printing actually begins.
tag stock A heavy paper or synthetic printing material, typically featuring a notch or black
mark for top of form and no adhesive backing.
thermal transfer The printing method that creates an image by transferring ink from a
ribbon onto the media using the heat from the thermal print head.
TOF (top-of-form) The start of a new label as indicated by a label gap, notch, mark or
programming.
287
Glossary
288
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement